Home

GT11 User's Manual - Automation Systems and Controls

1. z 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 7 10 11 y y e et FD Battery cover opened E ms B BUS E Cc i l a Power supply terminal layout 35 S M A No s ae Cc FO Co CD Co C G zi a 1 ses U 8 EI CF card cover opened No Name Specifications Nr 10 11 12 Compatible GOT GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ Use For connection to QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus interface Compatible GOT GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Use For connection to QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series For communicating with controller bar code reader RFID or personal RS 232 interface computer OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9 pin male o oe Hole for the inserting installation fittings accessory during the GOT Hole for unit installation fitting l installation to the panel 4 holes at top and bottom Rating plate nameplate CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed Not lit CF card not accessed Switch for prohibiting access to CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON CF card being acce
2. READ E EE TE Read mode 8 WRITE eee Write mode Onn INSERT oor Insert mode SS Delete res Delete mode Za PARAM ee Parameter mode ae OTHER a amen Other mode R A Remark Mode key input is always valid Input of the mode key clears the input data except for the step numbers The display returns to the initial status of the mode selection INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 63 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions 14 3 10 Command input procedures Command input procedures can be classified as follows 1 Input the command key to use the command on the key 2 Input the alphanumeric keys corresponding to each character of command sequentially 3 Select and input the command to be used from the Help function Command input procedures for 1 and 2 above are as follows For command input procedure 3 from the Help function refer to Subsection 14 3 10 Command input procedures Point P When the command is input the input details are displayed at the 4th line the bottom line on the display In the following description the input of key may be omitted when a blank space between the input command and the cursor position is automatically inserted Refer to the example in each description 1 For command code only a When the command available on the keyboard is input Command gt GO Ex
3. Ex 5 When ANDD lt H7FFFF D20 is input S 4 Handling of devices M Land S Devices M L and S in the Test Monitor Write and Insert modes change the display depending on the set parameters lf LD LO is input for the parameter setting of MO to 999 and L1000 to L2047 the result is LD MO 14 66 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 10 Command input procedures 5 For extension timer extension counter of AnA and AnUCPU When the extension timer T256 to T2047 and the extension counter C256 to C1023 are input as the first device of the command input the first device and the device number z gt Ex When OUT T256 D500 is input CZ O 3 220 22i The device D500 for the T256 setting value on the parameter is automatically displayed Q tf a l lt 6 un Point f When the extension timer and the extension counter are used be sure to set the zE 257 points or more and the setting value device D W R on the parameter for ae both the timer and the counter crer es nE O gt 14 3 11 Action if an incorrect key is input zx mae 252 If an incorrect key is input cancel the input contents ook OXN Operation 1 Before touching the key before reading writing the input contents z Before touching the key touch the key z A a 2 After touching the key after reading writi
4. PLC connection cable gt A BUS PC barcode RFID f l connection cable FG L IL RS 232 z BATTERY 2 ele Class D grounding A D class 3 grounding 1 2 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Make sure to carry out the followings for grounding e Carry out the independent grounding if possible e If the independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding as shown in fig 2 below Lu Other Other Other gt Q O O l Grounding Grounding 100 or less 100 or less gma gm r 2 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding 2 ee Best condition Good condition Not allowed BS mD Use the cable of 2mm or more for grounding a Set the grounding point closer to the GOT to make the grounding cable short as possible 26 op Recommended terminal shape Terminal Solderless a Terminal Solderless 2 3 2 screw _ terminal _ ie lt x 6 2mm i GI J J ra ra or less O 03 2 a or less When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to R one terminal one terminal z z Cable size For power supply 0 75mm min For grounding 2mm min x Solderless terminal M3 solderless terminal applicable solderless terminal RAV 1 25 3 V2 N3A and FV2 N3A Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 8BNem Lu gt n a l 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy P A O Grounding of the GOT may cause electric potential diffe
5. cccecc cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Performance SpeCifiCatiOns ccccccseeeseeeeeeeeeees 3 2 Periodic INSPECTION cccccscceeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 17 2 Power supply Specifications ccccccseeeeeeeee ees 3 8 Program data control cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 1 Project data storage location 06 13 1 13 5 Protective SINEC le ncoritecisionssascireie elena 2 1 8 10 17 2 R Required GOVICE ccccceccceccseesseeceecceesanecenesensans 2 1 REIO E ence een orn eee net near ere 2 1 2 12 Rough pre operation proCcedure cccceceeee eee 1 5 S screen data transfer Cable ccccccceeeeseeeaees 2 12 Security level ChANGE cccseceeeee scene 11 10 11 14 SEI CMECK arran A EA 14 118 Serial multi drop connection unit 2 1 8 15 SOUD iea ene nee ee nee eee 11 1 SDCCINCATONS arannira A 3 1 General specifications cccccceceseeeeeeeseeeeeees 3 1 Performance specifications cccccseeeeeeeeees 3 2 Power supply specifications ccccceceeeeee es 3 8 LANG Sates a a otras aun ae oeRia 2 1 8 12 Standard monitor OS 2 0 0 eee 9 1 13 2 16 2 DV SILOM aaan a aa a 14 135 System AlANMN ccceccsecceceseeserecsesseesareseetes 17 4 18 1 System Alarm Display c ccccceceseeeeeeeeaees 14 135 System configuration ccc ceccceeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeees 2 1 DVSIE MT MONO cn
6. l 2 HELP gt 2 Perform program display operation gt in the Write Read Insert Delete mode Command gt Command gt Device Device No gt Input the between the device the source data and the destination Input the between the command the device the source data and the destination 14 3 22 Operation in write mode W Details Procedures key input sequence Program display gt HELP gt 1 gt 2 in the Write mode Start step specification gt gt in Start step specification gt Set the specified range in the Continuous write in NOP program to NOP Write modify change of Write the new program mani program modify change 14 3 23 Operation in read mode R Details Procedures key input sequence Read the command of the specified step number in the READ gt Step number gt N program Command reading with the specified step number Read the command with the Read the specified command READ gt Command 7 gt Device gt Device number gt GO 4 specified command in the program N Gol Read the command with the 4 Read the command with the p READ gt Device gt Device number GO specified device used in the i gt GO specified device program Read operation above T gt SET 7 gt
7. Touch Display Z O r SO SxQ 2x SWE Display oz GOT setup Display 11 Language Opening screen time Sec Screen save time o Min ca None screen save backlight o ZZ TOn gt Zaz spas HANI OON Touch an item to oe change settings ome HEG lt n ook OH Q Z lt x Point Restart after setting change a ee a If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the wa LO setting of each item is changed and touch the button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings o W If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the 5 setting contents are canceled without reflected A O If touch x the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected Z O whe On On Sz ng oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 1 Display Settings 11 3 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting 11 1 3 Display setting operations Opening screen time screen save time GOT setup Di splay ED If touching the setting time numerical Language acilen keyboard is displayed Input numeric with Opening screen time the keyboard Screen save time SOS SE ans Sey 2 Setting contents are defined if button Ai is touched Opening screen time Sec Screen save time o Min O None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Brightness contrast With do
8. ao d amp m ep Ce oh 5 CALL LALLALALALILLJ s h d z O H TE OF Ow Ze Se D a a 10 OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 7 Drawing Check 14 127 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check 14 8 Font Check 14 8 1 Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by one 14 8 2 Display operation of font check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Debug self check Self check Memory check Sy Touch Display clock Debug amp self check Display check Debue self check Display check Starting font check D Touch Font check in the Display check Touch Font check to display the screen describing the font check operation Touch the upper right of the description screen to start the font check Point Notes on font check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic amp etc O x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 From basic Latin to Krill Hangul O x ACOO to 0 x D7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Chinese Characters O x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be normally installed Install the Standard monitor OS again 14 128 14 8 Fo
9. 12 1 to 12 5 121 HIME SCHING ANG DISDIAY jscsinaiicanasieeioalduainasnesincs a a ees pee 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display fUNCTIONS cccceccceccceecce sees eeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeseeeseeeeaaes 12 1 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting cc ceccccccc cece eeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 12 1 2 125 Clock Seting OPCl ALON Ss cote astaccee stra ce eta abe tage adalah rat inh delice nla he rE a a 12 2 PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 to 13 37 13 1 Dale StOlage LOCAL ON eo A E 13 1 1311 Dive name ANOC ATION eitaicacdey chaoui a Act rroceld delaclmniat acetate Ado eas alee cesta 13 1 13 1 2 Data type and storage location ccccccccceecccececeeecseeaueceucecueecaeecsueceueeseesueecsusssunssuessaeesaaesnaes 13 1 ITS Oo Version COMMMAUON naaa a ede chs r A N dea 13 3 Ta t ABISH O o a ea a a ee cM eee ee ere See em 13 5 TZO TOF MIN OME a a 13 6 V3 2 Al PUR CUOMIOr OS INONMA UON easi a a a alone 13 6 13 2 2 Display operation Of OS information screen cccceccceecceeeee sees eee eeeaeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeseesaees 13 7 13 2 3 Display example of OS information cccccccssecceeeceeeeeeecceeeceeceeesaeecueecaeeesaeeseeesceeseeeseeesaaes 13 8 13 2 4 Operation of OS information ie wos cteetedoasccinenesamautce sl aoindkauscesteeds sugedec ol mete deat soecesitedasyaweeenslnattoasoraes 13 9 T S Project IMMOMM ATOM acieceeetttsacnretf
10. GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 GT1595 XTBA 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1595 XTBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1585 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1565 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Continued to next page App 1 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Version of GT Target Models Version of OS Designer2 a Z GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 if O GT1555 VTBD 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 26 lt GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Mo Z GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA aD 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 Sz GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1155 QTBD 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 Lu GT1155HS QSBD to GT1150HS QLBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 2 Le ry GT SoftGOT1000 2 27D o ers k Or Standard monitor OS 02 02 tae X Communication driver MEE GT15 QBUS 2 GT1
11. 1 Q Enter the password entered in the sequence program x or se at 1 KEY WOR key Touch this key to enter alphabetic O T O characters A to Z uppercase f h 6 key Touch this key to enter alphabetic TES a cee i it De Enter ey Touch this key to enter numbers 1 to 9 key Use this key to delete an entered character key Use this key to delete all characters under the cursor Entry is completed by touching the key and the keyboard closes 14 48 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 28 Test operation procedure 14 2 29 Test operation basic procedure UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Device Entry screen DEVICE MONITOR NetNe O ST FF CPUNG 0 PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE T PE amp Ne DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND COPY x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O If necessary change bit device on off or word device values on the setting key window screen For further information about each setting key window screen see the following Subsection 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 49 14 2 29 Test operation basic procedure 14 2 30 Error messages and corrective actions
12. C gt gt GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual 14 10 2 Display operation of I O check Main menu Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check Debug amp self check Debug self check Self check Memory check EJ Display check Touch panel check vo m 0 check N l Touch I O check a Touch Debug amp self check I O check GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Debug self check 1 0 check Please select check channel 1 R8422 PU Oi RS232 14 132 14 10 I O Check 14 10 1 I O check function 14 10 3 I O check operation Z O O 5 Target confirmation z D As a preparatory step for the CPU communication pines ce ese check chanai check perform the following items 1 RS422 ep e Installing Communication driver Use drawing z 0 RS232 ERF software to install Z e Setting Communication settings Use drawing Zlo gt A software to enter and download ZKE e Connecting connection device Connect a PLC to 82H the communication interface for which the CPU communication check is applied in order to start the communication Check for the power is on or if any error occurred aan gt EO IIZ 2 If touch the button the CPU communication miia 0 U check is carried out 00 CPL communication After the CPU communication starts normally the communicat ion check l a B D Executing now dialog mentioned left notifying that it is on checkin
13. Input a keyword into keyword to cancel the protection 4 FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 1 For details on FX PLCs compatible with the 2nd keyword or customer keyword refer to the following gt FX series PLCs Manual Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection Keyword protection function is valid when the 2nd keyword is registered Touching the key activates keyword protection 10 16 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION Z O SETTINGS GOT SET UP O Z 5 LL a Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from GOT setup z In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight language battery alarm display iiai Setting screen for display invert colors 2 Brightness contrast 11 8 Sui Buzzer volume window move buzzer 11 12 S lt o Setting screen for Security setting 11 12 SW operation 9zW Utility call key 11 12 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions Q ZZ oe gt ggz au HAN mO Setting regarding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below N O x The title display period at the main unit boot can be 0 to 60 seconds Z
14. J MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes the error messages and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT or Controller the system alarm is available The error code can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information For details of system alarm and system information refer to the following LU lt x Ze yyy H SH gt xo wa wz Ww lt lt X lt j lt K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 VersionO Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 18 1 Error Contents Display This section describes how to identify the error code and system alarm displayed on the monitor screen by the system alarm display function and the reference material APPENDICES 1 Displaying format on monitor screen Displayed in user setting position The system alarm is displayed together with an error code its error message and occurrence time The displayed error code and error message are registered to the GOT in advance and need not to be prepared by the user 335 Memory card battery voltage low Replace battery 16 40 30 Up to 3 lines are displayed 104 Parameter error 1 line per error 400 Unable to communicate with CPU Error code Error message Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors related to GOT Display priority The alarm is displayed in the following priorit
15. The GOT is designed to be embedded into a panel Mount the GOT by following the procedure below gt For panel cutting dimensions refer to Section 6 2 ui Note that the panel thickness should be within 5mm 2 D Installing the packing Packing z 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD 2 Install packing to the packing installation groove on S the back panel of the GOT iE While referring to the cross sectional view of the 26 packing shown right push the thinner side into the packing groove Right drawing is the example of lateral format o M Packing installation groove 2 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ lt GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA Packing cross sectional view 7 and GT1150 QLBDA a Units are shipped with the packing attached J Inserting direction D Inserting into the panel face Insert the GOT from the front side of the panel z Lu gt T oc QO S Mounting hole 6 Z O x x H N Z WIRING OPTION 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 6 Fixing the GOT Engage the hook of the mounting fitting accessory to the unit fixing hole of the GOT and tighten the screw until the GOT is fixed with the mounting bolt accessory The GOT will be fixed in 4 upper lower parts Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the protective sheet GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ
16. 13 2 OS Information 13 8 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Display operation of OS information 13 9 OS information screen Js information elect drive A Built in CF card Co Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen LORD OF ile 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information D If touch a drive in Select drive the information of the first folder of the touched drive is displayed O If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the touched file name is selected and inverted O Refer to the following for operation of installation upload property data check Installation lt this section A Upload eee L this section E Property ae lt this section A Data check 3 this section B Touching button closes the screen Installation operation z BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive Built in CF card can be installed in GOT z gt o Install the CF card to which the BootOS or H OS to install is written to the GOT Refer to the following for inserting rem
17. 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information Main menu Section 9 3 Utility Display Communication setting ir GOT setup Time setting amp display Program datagcontrol A Debug amp self ck Program data control Program Data control Touch E Memory card Format Alarm information Alarm information Program Data Alarm information i be lect drive A Built in CF card Cot Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Select a drive and operate alarm log file 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information 13 24 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information Alarm information screen Program Data Alarm information Select drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory D nternal SRAM Number Item 1 Select drive 2 Kind Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Froeram Data Alarm information D PROJECTI ke l RindMame Size Date Time ALARMHET B a heon 18 26 5 6 7 8 ASKB BOAKB yt o i File w Contents The drive of which file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is not instal
18. S G a a A Creating screens Detailed E N ja a E Drawing figures Detailed U eee po ee Making Common Settings Detailed m aae eee ee Placing Setting objects Detailed Transferring data to GOT 1 Stored in the GT Works 2 GT Designer2 GT Works 3 GT Designer3 in PDF format 2 Installing a GOT connection to a PLC For the operations from installing a GOT to communicating with a PLC CPU refer to the following manuals m gt T gt Included Z GT15 General O Purpose Description GT15 User s Manual GOT1000 Series EE P GT 11 General GT11 User s Manual Connection Manual S Description m oS Confirming part names and specifications of the GOT Belated Overview a Se 09 Z O Qe a ae Confirming the GOT installation S method Detailed 5 D Confirming the mounting method for V communication units or option Detailed devices E z m ee S Confirming the PLC connection z method Detailed A Confirming the utility operation pae g method Detailed oc QO O i Confirming error codes system alarm displayed on the GOT Detailed 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 GT Works 3 GT Designer3 in PDF format 5 E 3 Other manuals The following manuals are also available 5 The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 GT Works3 GT Designer3 in PDF format a GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Describes how to us
19. Start Check the error code step appearing on the PLC CPU Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs APPENDICES The SP UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on PLC CPU Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2 at IN side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on the GOT 2 bus connection unit Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1 at OUT side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error will not occur The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1 to the GOT 2 is judged faulty Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 9 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring This section describes the countermeasures when GOT does not display the monitor screen GOT does not display the screen YES POWER LED of GOT is off NO YES GOT POWER LED is lit in orange NO
20. Version of OS Version of Description GT Designer2 The communication driver name is changed Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Communication driver 2 82L Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC GT11 GT GT Soft 15 GOT1000 Serial Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU CRnD 700 03 13 Communication driver 2 91V Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 03 Supporting connection to QS001CPU Supporting connection to QOQOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20UDEHCPU Supporting connection to Q170MCPU Communication driver 2 96A Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 04 Communication driver 2 09K OMRON SYSMAC 01 02 Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC Extended device range monitored The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095 etc Supporting delay time setting 2 27D 02 04 Supporting the settings of Retry and 9 43V Communication driver Timeout Time l OMRON SYSMAC 03 01 x x O z i TE E TTR Communication driver upporting connection to EEN OMRON SYSMAC 03 13 ms Communication driver Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 18U x x O KEYENCE KV700 1000 02 02 Supporting connection to KV 3000 and Communication driver 2 17F x x KV 5000 KEYENCE KV700 1000 03 12 Communication driver Supporting connection to KOYO El PLC 2 82L x x O KOYO KOSTAC DL 03 13 Communication driver Su
21. lt gt Section 8 3 Option Function Board Z X Z O H ai O 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications 3 6 3 7 e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Built in Interface Specifications GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 1ch Item Use PLC communication Bus j QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series 1ch Use PLC communication RS232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps RS 232 Connecter type D sub 9 pin male Use Barcode reader RFID connection PC communication project data upload download OS installation transparent function USB Full Speed 12Mbps device 1ch USB Use PC communication project data upload download OS installation transparent function PCMCIA compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector type For TYPE I only Use Data transmission and storage 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications 3 4 Power Supply Specifications e GI1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Specifications z Item gt GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 2 Input power supply voltage 24VDC 10 15 ripple voltage 200mV or less Fuse built in not z 1 0A O exchangeable z ma l 9 36W 390mA 24VDC or SO Power consumption 9 84W 410mA 24VDC or less es Lu m ep gt O V O At backlight off 4 32W 180mA 24VDC or less 3 Inrush cu
22. ly gt Step number 7 gt 4 gt SET gt SP c It Ly Display the program with Automatic scroll automatic scroll 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 22 Operation in write mode W SHIFT gt WRITE SET gt Step number gt GO Com gt GOl 14 77 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 24 Operation in insert mode 1 Details Procedures key input sequence INSERT SET gt Step number gt GO gt Com gt Go mand Insert a command in the Insert a command in the program program Display the program HELP gt 1 gt 2 gt Specify the movement in the Insert mode start step Move the program Move the whole program GO gt Specify the movement gt GO gt Specify the movement gt GO end step destination step 3 gt Specify the Display the program gt HELP gt in the Insert mode copy start step Copy the program Copy the program Specify the gt Specify the copy gt copy end step destination step 14 3 25 Operation in delete mode
23. operating ambient temperature of 25 C Maximum panel l simultaneous key Maximum of 2 points presses Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Flash memory Internal for storing project data 3Mbytes and OS Life Number of Memory n 100 000 times write times D drive SRAM internal 512kbytes battery backup Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data alarm history and recipe data Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Environmental protective Equivalent to IP67f JEM1030 front section when the USB environmental protective structure 4 cover is attached Horizontal format W167 6 58 x H135 5 32 x D65 2 56 mm inch Excluding USB environmental protective cover Horizontal format Panel cutting dimensions W153 6 03 x H121 4 77 mm inch Horizontal format External dimensions 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 4 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM OO A Z O H lt O O D Oo on EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 5 Item Weight Compatible software package 4 2 3 4 Specifications GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ 0 9kg Excluding mounting fixtures GT Designer2 Version2 58L or later GT Designer2 Version2 or later GT Designer3 Version1 or GT Designer3 Version1 or _ later later Bright dots always lit and dark dots u
24. returns to the initial status of the mode selection The input commands or device numbers except for the mode are cleared This is used for repeating the procedure if incorrect keys are pressed Subsection 14 3 11 4 Control key In the Other mode the screen returns to the previous display Key that provides blank space at the command and at between device names Key that moves the cursor on the display gt jg or determines scroll directions Subsection 14 3 8 Press this key at the last of a series of key operations to execute the operation l tion 14 3 1 Check the details of key operations on the display before pressing this key SUPSEENON TEG 14 58 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 6 Operation methods 2 How to express keys and key operation descriptions The keys for the MELSEC A list editor and operation procedures are described in text in a simplified manner as shown below z a Some keys such as and al are available for two different purposes Operate such keys with either the upper or lower function indicated on them valid according to 5 the operation In descriptions only the necessary functions are indicated on keys Example of description CZ When entering the character M the key is indicated as in the description Ou 529 Make upper or lower functions valid by using the key or the key For further Sar information about the procedure for making upper or lower functions valid see
25. v The following fonts are supported in e Japanese 12dot 2 04E Standard monitor OS 01 01 O Crs e Japanese 16dot Gothic Zo e Japanese 16dot Mincho Hga The following fonts are supported e Japanese supporting Europe 12dot e Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Gothic e Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Mincho e Chinese Simplified 12dot e Chinese Simplified 16dot Mincho e Chinese Simplified Supporting Europe 12dot e Chinese Simplified Supporting Standard monitor OS 02 04 Boot OS G Europe 16dot Mincho Supporting Standard font Bi i 2 91V Standard monitor OS 04 03 O Chinese Traditional supporting Europe Supporting the TrueType numerical font Standard monitor OS 04 02 TrueType font 2 90U O 7 segment Boot OS 04 02 U Enables setting the KANJI region 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 lol o x 2 472 Standard monitor OS 03 02 Jo o X Extended function OS Stroke Standard Font 03 03 x Standard font 2 27D o m O m Z m Q o lt Supporting Thai The following font name is changed e Stroke Standard Font JPN Stroke font e The following fonts are added l 2 58L x e Stroke Standard Font China GB e Stroke Standard Font China GB supporting Hangul The following font is added Option OS 2 58L x x e Stroke Font JPN Stroke Font JPN 03 03 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Bi Option OS KANJI Region Supporting Chinese Tradi
26. 4 Step number display A step number is displayed as a decimal number aan On the 1st and 2nd lines in the display area significant digits in the lower four digits of a step zez number are displayed iE On the 3rd and 4th lines in the display area up to five significant digits in a step number are ahd displayed ep Mode 2 FEA mae Line 1 7 Displays significant digits in the lower OO i four digits of a step number ome neam Displays up to five significant digits in zE ine LEER a step number Step number Q 5 Device display gt Two or more device specifications attached to a basic or application instruction are displayed using a the same step number act AO For information on the step numbers see Paragraph 4 above LO 14 6 Display of data input from the keys Data input from the keys will appear at the cursor position As more characters are input the cursor moves to the right The cursor appears as W Example The user enters SET h 1 0 x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 61 14 3 7 Display format of the display area 14 62 7 Shifting of data to the left during the input of a program When the user inputs a program the codes entered before a touch on the key will appear on the 4th bottom line of the display area If the codes cannot appear on a single l
27. 4 ee 5 Ooty G QON 3 ID 9 MOY K 2 3 Za See mae NZD In the case the mode cannot be changed Sip OQT In the following cases only READ mode is allowed o4 If you try to change to other than READ mode an error message is displayed To change to other than READ mode take the action below n Z lt x x 09 LU The protect switch of the EEPROM memory Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM TO cassette is on memory cassette 4 4 Can not write Set a memory other than EPROM as the memory The EPROM memory cassette is enabled X to write to O 5 Er LU 09 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 97 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes 14 4 7 Sequence program display Sequence programs are read from the FX PLC to the GOT and displayed There are two displaying methods specifying the step number and scrolling one screen at a time Display using cursor keys 1 Operation Scroll with 4 or v 2 Example Scroll one line upward or downward 128 MPP 129 DIV D56 K200 Scrolling one line upward a v Scrolling one line downward 128 MPP 128 MPP 129 DIV 129 DIV Display specifying the step number 1 Operation 2 Example Displaying step number 123 Step number 3 MOV _ ii P 3 Hin tl When the specified step number is the operand of an applied instruction If the speci
28. By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue black red purple green light blue yellow white Check missing bit and color visually Ci ft ff i joie Blue Black Purple Green Light blue Yellow White To D Basic figure eae screen If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following Basic figure check screen is displayed 14 124 14 7 Drawing Check 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse r 5h A Be Po To a Pattern 1 of Move check among screens 14 7 Drawing Check 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check 14 125 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND COPY x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Move check among screens a Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visual
29. Clears all device memories except for special D special M and R Switches the target ACPU in GOT operations in each mode Switches the target program Main Sub in GOT operations in each mode Forcibly changes the ACPU running status between RUN and STOP Performs a read or write operation to the ACPU memory in the machine language 14 68 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 12 List of functions 14 3 13 Basic Operation This section takes an easy operation example to describe the basic operation of the MELSEC A list editor 14 3 14 Reading sequence programs Operation exaple lt Key operation gt lt Display gt Select the Read mode Read the Oth step SETP gt _0 GO Scroll the screen with the 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 13 Basic Operation 14 69 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND x O Lu IL LL Lu o H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 15 Changing Overwriting commands The example shown below is used to describe how to change sequence program commands Before change 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO KIO X000 X001 Y010 Change the timer setting Y t0 value from K10 to K100 After change f 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO K100 Change the timer setting value
30. From previous page f NetNo OlST FIN ODE DEVICE WIE 200 v IEM T 8 9 AL Bla CUDONEIE J 2 3 6 Fl 4 gt O Enter Del AC DEVICE MONITOR NetNo OlT FF CPUNc The device value of W200 is changed from 43 to 100 Point 7 Effective number of digits of device values that can be changed If an entered value exceeds the corresponding number of digits specified below the device value cannot be changed Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits 32 bit two word module Eight digits 14 24 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Z O This subsection takes the entry monitor as an example to describe how to change screens 2 ip gt Functional change menu screen gt gt Section 14 2 E System Monitor The screen returns to the screen on which the system monitor function was activated Start from the utility screen gt The screen returns to the Main lt x Menu screen of the utility chs Z Start from the user created screen 22 The screen returns to the Zur User created screen O n Functional change Q menu screen aer e zzz TES T MENUPF ORME SET lt CANCEL 52 NetNo O ST FFI CPUNG 0 Tu
31. GT01 C30R2 25P 16 7 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 50 1 97 nnnnnnnn 55 2 17 35 1 38 GT01 C30R2 9S 35 1 38 35 1 38 App 7 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimentions of bus connection cable connector Cable model External dimensions z GT15 QCOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 Fig 1 GT15 QCOBS 15 49 20 66 25 82 30 98 35 120 Fig 1 aS GT15 CONB 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 2 g GT15 ACOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 3 GT15 A370COB S1 Fig 4 GT15 A370COB Fig 5 a GT15 A1SCOINB 0 45 1 5 0 7 2 3 10 5 20 Fig 7 Saz GT15 COEXSS 1 10 6 34 8 20 6 67 6 30 6 100 Fig 8 Fig 9 uit GT15 EXCNB 0 5 2 Fig 8 0 7 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 GT15 COBS HAE EA a Fig 9 GT15 J2COB 1 3 Fig 10 o im O Q Z Qi A A lt x 1 The GT15 CLJEXSS GT15 CLIBS cable has a grounding wire 1 m The GT15 CLJBS cable has a grounding wire For the cable length of 10m or more 1m for the cable length less than 10m 0 5m Be sure to connect the wire to control panels 2 The GT15 CLJEXSS 1 is the set product consisting of GT15 EXCNB GT15 CLIBS Refer to Fig A a GT15 EXCNB Fig 8 GT15 CL1BS Fig 9 Unit mm inch 11 5 0 45 Ea 145 5 7 i 7 20 0 78 _60_ L 32 1 25 S i Cable Approx 10 E i Ferrite core Approx 35x 40 PLC side Ferrite core Approx p35 x
32. MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Moog GT11 User s Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION gt DANG ER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous uN CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage ek ee eee ees coe eee S eam ES SS SS SS Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Some failures of the GOT or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction lf a communication error including cable disconnection
33. Memory information O 7 ep Memory information 9 Frosram data Memory information Flash memory empty area size A gt Built in CF card 249192 K byte e O C i Flash Memory 59 Project data area Pode Kk byte Oo OS area y Sa Select a drive and mes then format it oa INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 6 Memory Information 13 32 13 6 1 Memory information function 13 6 3 Display example of memory information Program data Memory information memory empty area size Built in CF card 249192 K byte 1 gt Flash Memory Project data area rude K byte US area FOB KO byte No Setting items Description Indicates the amount of memory empty area size for each drive in which a file or 1 Flash memory empty area size folder can be stored If CF card is not mounted A Standard CF card is not displayed 13 33 13 6 Memory Information 13 6 3 Display example of memory information 13 GOT data package acquisition Zz O o F 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition z gt This function copies the following OSs that are installed on the GOT and the data to the memory card e OS Boot OS Standard monitor OS Communication OS Extended function OS Option OS z e Project data Copied data can be used as a backup or they can be installed on another GOT to create a GOT that has the same configuration 6 Refer to the following section for the Installation function of
34. O Applicable X Not Applicatble Not itll Channel No setting and communication driver aa Communication parameter setting parameter setting Communication parameter setting oO x 0 O Sequence program protection key word setting a Erenora o O e Connection When connecting FX series PLC Sequence program protection status cancel When connecting FX series PLC of x Jo Openingscweeniimeseting Screen save time setting ol x oe Screen save backlight ON OFF setting Po oo Message language switching Japanese English Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean Or German Bateryalarmdspiay onor ein Jo o o Screen saving human sensor enable disable setting X 5 V S ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM X X Connection settings o m O Q Z m A o lt x ON X O Human sensor detect level setting Display GT1595 GT1585 X 5 V S GOT Setup Display of human sensor detect time X S V S Human sensor OFF delay setting GT1595 GT1585 X S V S Invert colors ON OFF setting GT1550 GT1150 Q Q Brightness Liquid crystal brightness setting contrast m adjustment iquid crystal contrast setting Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 10 x x x Continued to next page O Applicable X Not Applicatble Not required a GT Soft Drawing Operation Buzzer volume setting O er 4g Security level change Secu
35. Touching executes read write check for the flash memory Debug self check Memory check Please input password 14 120 14 6 Memory Check 14 6 3 Memory check operation Internal Flush memory area write read check Executing mow Internal Flush memory area Touching the button returns to the write read check Memory check screen Mormaly completed Z Remark PAAA Password change The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog is displayed If touch Ok returns to the Internal Flush memory area Memory check screen write read check Password error 14 6 Memory Check 14 6 3 Memory check operation 14 121 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND COPY x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 122 Point f When error is found in the memory When error is found by memory check the dialog indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed If an error is found in the D drive Internal SRAM format the internal SRAM For details of the formatting of the D drive Internal SRAM refer to the following Section 13 5 Memory Card Format If an error is found in the C drive Flash memory
36. When the GOT power in turned OFF the setting may return to the factory shipped default when the GOT power turned on next time If the power is turned off due to power failure or others install the OS or download the project data again LU a Ons LU gt rae wa xz L lt X lt a lt x lt When GOT standard monitor OS is V 01 02 02 or later gt Even if the power is turned off during the start up GOT operates in the condition that the OS and project data before the power OFF are stored when turning the GOT power on APPENDICES 18 5 2 Communication from drawing software to the GOT Drawing software cannot communicate with the GOT while Booting is displayed on the GOT screen Booting is displayed on the GOT screen under the following conditions e Right after turning on the power to the GOT e When rebooting after transferring OSs and project data e When rebooting after changing the settings on the utility screen When the communication with GOT is attempted communication errors will occur on drawing software Carry out the communication after Booting project data is displayed on the GOT screen It may take time to start the communication between the GOT and the controller depending on the type of controllers GOT starts the communication with drawing software after the communication with the controller has been established 18 5 Starting GOT 18 11 18 5 1 Power Off APPENDICES Appendix 1 External
37. CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 2 OS Information 13 12 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file When data is normal Data normal When data is erroneous Data error 13 13 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information D Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check D Touching button closes the dialog If the data check fails the target file may be broken Install the target file again For details of installation refer to the following K gt Chapter 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 Project Information 13 3 1 Function of project information The project data files stored in each drive A Built in CF card C Flash memory can be displayed by lists In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc Function Information display of files and Displays the kind name data size the creation date and time of the file or folder COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Contents folders Delete Deletes project data 13 17 Copy Copies project data Enabled to copy only from the A drive to the A drive 13 18 Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of drawing Property display 13 19 software Data check Data check of th
38. DELETE gt DELETE L mode Move the cursor to the command to be deleted with 4 l v or the key 14 106 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 11 Deleting commands 14 4 12 Sequence program all clear Z O Clears all the sequence programs 2 T i Operation H Ss i i ey i Stop the FXPLC MODE a gt WRITE mode CZ O x SY Cz Example Sg Zw Clears all the sequence programs oin Stop the FXPLC Q Caution 22 lt READ gt The program will be erased SEO Press OK to continue see oe AOD Set the U lt WRITE gt WRITE O X S 2 mode FA HUN W S Oz lt 8 Sa oe OXN Q Z lt x z A 2 O gt LU mle LO Point 7 Items cleared when All Clear for a sequence program is performed 14 When All Clear is executed the parameters before program execution are initialized g O and Latch Clear is executed L O The memory space becomes the default value the comment area a 0 block the file n r r LU register space a 0 block and keywords unregistered ih After All Clear set the above parameters etc again D DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 107 14 4 12 Sequence program all clear 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics Displays the FX PLC error message error code and step at which the error occurred Operation gt PLC diagnostics gt gt Select PLC diagnostics
39. GOT Hardware version z7 GT1155 QTBD Hardware version C or later 5 GT1155 QSBD GT1155 QLBD Hardware version F or later Z 2 Checking method of hardware version Confim the hardware version with the products rating plate Aa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SERIAL 540001 BC BC Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 15 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit The following serial multi drop connection unit is applicable Model Contents GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection 8 9 3 Part name 1 So cover is installed e Protective cover is removed 2 1 D4 MITSUBISHI GTO1 RS4M MITSUBISHI crovessm 5 8 4 zo epee A O ERROR 3 10Q RS 232 jules Julies i h 7 gt ats apy a 6 No Name Specifications 1 Installation hole for the main unit Installation hole POWER Lit in green when the power is properly supplied SD 2 LED Lit in green when the data is being sent to PLC Lit in green when the data is being received from PLC ERROR Lit or blinking depending on the status Can be selected among 1100 OPEN and 3300 set to OPEN by default 4 Connector for PLC communication D sub 9 pin male
40. GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the CF card storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended The version of each OS can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen Oe 1 05 12 40 SABR Explanation of OS version 01 00 00A ME a 1 4 L BootOS version AQBK Appears only when the property 02 01 05 12 4 of the BootOS is displayed IK Minor version 02 01 05 12 4 230K Qe O1 Ob 12 42 Major version Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation gt Section 13 2 OS Information 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Point Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate SSS i O Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating plate of GOT rear face gt a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD z a MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL z MODEL GT1155 QSBD E IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX OW SERIAL 540001 BC BC Sg E Bootos Sue MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION gerson OZ MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 80M1 IND CONT EQ UL US LISTED C 4 b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ lt GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA ES TE a MITSUBISHI ao
41. GT1150 QLBDA Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 5Nem 0 36 to 0 48Nem Enlarged view GT1155 QTBD GOT GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Mounting bracket Mounting screw GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Enlarged view Mounting bracket Mounting screw o GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA D A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment 6 7 Remove the film when the installation is completed 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING 1 WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER gt Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions s Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100Q or less which is used exclusively for the GOT 7 us Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction m VN Z Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal D O arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range 2 Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction z Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT o Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as c
42. Keyword setup List Monitor The keyword of MELSEC FX is operated Keyword screen and protection level When Keyword setup is selected with the MELSEC FX list editor the keyword screen is displayed Refer to the following manual for the procedure for Keyword operations lt Subsection 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Remark Keywords Refer to the following manual for details of Keyword lt gt Programming manual for the FX PLC used fP 14 114 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 15 Keywords 14 4 16 List monitor Z O a The status of contacts and coils in a sequence program is displayed 2 T i 2 Operation H gt List Monitor gt Ze gt Select List Monitor with 4 or v SY Aro zre ZWE O5 u Parameter setting O n Keyword setup List Monitor Q ZZ Op ZEZ TE N AOO When the list monitor is started on the FX list editor screen the step numbers displayed on the FX list editor screen is 6 gt 0 f feol displayed on the list monitor screen fy 2 Ee 3 ar 4 Bes 5 oak 6 aze 3 OXN 8 9 Q Z lt Point Starting list monitor with special function switches FX list monitor a l i wo With setting special function switches FX list monitor the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen r When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen the list editor cannot be used For how to set special functi
43. O O 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 5 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and communication cables so that they do not cross each other Noise interference that is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers NFB electromagnetic contactors MC relays RA solenoid valves and induction motors Refer to the section to follow for surge killers i 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment Uncrossed power lines and Crossing power lines and communication cables communication cables GOT connection cable GOT connection cable Terminal block Terminal block 7 2 2 Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference Power line Power line Connection gt SS i cable Connection cable Pullout hole Pullout hole Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100 mm away from each other If that is not possible the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interference Power line 100mm or more Signal line Power line Si
44. SET VAL Displays the Set value operation screen for T timers and C counters Displays the Present value operation screen for word devices VALUE 16 Data range 16 bit one word module Displays the Present value operation screen for word devices VALUE 32 Data range 32 bit two word module Displays the Present value operation screen for buffer memory BM VAL 16 Data range 16 bit one word module Displays the Present value operation screen for buffer memory BM VAL 32 Data range 32 bit two word module CANCEL Terminates the test menu screen and displays each monitor screen 14 44 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen Z O The information and set items on the setting key window screen to be used for each test are described below z 5 1 Information displayed on each setting key window screen 5 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No xI 6 H NetNo tT oleT LFEIICPUNe S DEVICHT EN i SET 0 4 Sets on off 22 Screen for bit device on off operat ME a 4 zy creen for bit device on off operation y Y A v sir r F 5 Sets a device number cet 6 Sets a device name Q G Enter Del A 2 zg TE Displays whether decimal or Cay hexadecimal is selected D Decimal H Hexadecima
45. STIFF CPUNo 0 zZ O x Se Sco snf Sean Zz Data can be changed by test operation LON l 2ES For further information see the following ra Mow Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation aw Test example When turning ON MO When changing the present value of DO 9 ae x G e MetNo ni PTE te mie al H ee 0 lt n DEVICE EM RST 0 SET 1 DEVICE i LID Oak JZ YiYialLisjalvi Jj E jaly r POSS as LSet Z lt SSeS Pees A a O Enter Dell At E G Enter kl A 64 L O 1 Testing a bit device 14 A device specified by the user is turned on and off xX 2 Testing a word device i A specified value is written to a device specified by the user H LW 3 Testing a timer counter Specified values are written as the present and set values of a device specified by the user 4 Testing buffer memory A specified value is written to buffer memory specified by the user DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 3 The display format and device comment no comment display can be switched For further information see the following Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Test example When the entry monitor is displayed When the entry monitor is displayed comment display hexadecimal display Dae TES ENUF ORME SET Paes ea TES TM ENUF ORM NetNo O JST FFICPUNe 0 N
46. This section describes the error messages displayed when the system monitor function is executed and corrective action Error message Description Corrective action 1 Connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT disconnected or cut cables 2 Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU established with the PLC CPU 3 Refer to the following manual for confirming whether Communication could not be PLC communications error the error has occurred in network L gt GT11 User s Manual 14 50 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 30 Error messages and corrective actions 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor The MELSEC A list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the ACPU QCPU A mode This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing list editor for MELSEC A an Option OS from drawing software into the GOT you can edit the ACPU QCPU A mode PLC program The features of the MELSEC A list editor are described below Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain You can check or partly correct change or add PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT Example of changing sequence program commands LD xo Changed Dp xO OUT Y20 MOV DO D1 LD Xt B D x 6 Other stations are accessible You can edit the sequence program for other stations i
47. X Function to store NULL ee at the end 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O of input characters Standard monitor OS 02 02 Function to convert characters input in 2 18U Option OS x Kana into Kanji KANA KANJI JP 02 02 Alignment setting is added setting is added 223D 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 G Cun e for displaying an input value at the 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O input target object position is possible ASCII Display When Bit Trigger is not met whether to ASCII Input 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected The character display position during the 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 O ASCII input can be set to Left or Right Standard monitor OS 04 02 Supporting the Kana kanji conversion gt 90U Option OS enhanced version l KANA KANJI JPN Enhanced x Version 04 02 Enables setting the asterisk display 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 Jo o O Enables setting the TrueType Numerical Clock display 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O for the font When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Data List 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O Comment Display enable Hold Display can be selected The simple comment is added Ca TTF Standard monitor OS
48. acquisition function and then to the GOT the utility settings will also be copied After copying the OS and project data to the GOT check the utility settings and reconfigure the settings as necessary 2 Storage of other data on the CF card When using the GOT data package acquisition function do not store any other data to the memory card Other data on the memory card will become unusable 13 37 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK Z O E The GOT can display the screen for debugging or self checking 2 The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking function c fems Reference page 5 H Debug System monitor A list editor and FX list editor 14 1 Self check Memory check Drawing check Font check Touch panel check and I O check 14 118 System alarm GOT errors CPU errors 14 135 5 display Z lt GOT start time Time when the GOT was started 14 137 So siz 14 1 Deb H e ug OZD 14 1 1 Debug functions Sz The debug function includes functions for the PLC system status check and those for increasing the ES efficiency in troubleshooting ae The following items can be realized with the debug function aon Items Contents System monitor The device of PLC CPU or buffer memory of the intelligent function module can be monitored and tested y A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited ue FX li
49. connection Communication driver 2 90U TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini 04 02 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC connection JTEKT PLC connection Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC HITACHI IES PLC connection Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 04 02 Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H 04 02 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 04 02 Communication driver HITACHI PLC Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 90U 5 connection HITACHI S10mini S10V 04 02 Communication driver FUJI FA PLC connection Supporting connection to FUJI FA PLC FUJI MICREX F 04 02 Communication driver Supporting connection to PANASONIC PLC PANASONIC PLC MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 04 02 connection oe l Communication driver Communication driver name has been changed 2 96A PANASONIC MEWNET FP 04 04 Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 04 02 Ethernet YASKAWA 04 02 Supporting connection to HITACHI IES PLC 2 90U YASKAWA PLC connection Supporting connection to YASKAWA PLC 2 90U N N N N O O O O C C C Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 20 aa Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 2 90U STARDOM 04 02 Ethernet YOKOGAWA 04 02 MODBUS TCP 04 02 YOKOGAWA PLC connection
50. connection to Q172HCPU QU71E71 AJ71 Q E71 X Ei automatic system switching 2 30 Communication driver for QCPU redundant system l QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 00 x Supporting routing parameter setting with 2 43V Communication driver GT Designer2 l QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Ethernet Supporting connection toCNC C70 connection to Supporting connection toCNC C70 C70 Communication driver 2 63R QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC 03 07 x x x x connection Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit Supporting the redundant system with the remote I O station of the MELSECNET H network system The communication driver name is Communication driver x changed 2 73B QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 and CRnD 700 03 09 CRnD 700 x Communication driver Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU 2 77F QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC and Q26UDHCPU CRnD 700 03 12 Continued to next page App 2 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Item Ethernet connection OMRON PLC connection KEYENCE PLC connection KOYO EI PLC connection SHARP PLC connection TOSHIBA PLC connection TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC connection Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series
51. install CF card in the PC in which create a folder for the copy destination set the same character with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designer2 for the folder name When using GT Designer3 set the same character with GOT Type Setting in Common gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Install the CF card mentioned above to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card C Section 8 1 CF Card Open Project information and touch the drive of the file to be copied to select the drive and then touch the button The dialog for selecting a copy destination folder as shown left is displayed 4 Touch the folder display area to select a folder and then touch the button The dialog shown left is displayed 13 3 Project Information 13 18 13 3 4 Operation of project information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Me O LU ae O LL Lu U H O O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Sane named project data has already existed Do you want to overwrite Copy is completed Property display operation Touch button If there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder starts to cop
52. operation Quick test Display switching When the GOT is connected to an FXKCPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller Reference Direct CPU connection GOT multidrop connection Monitorning Present vanos by entering a23 ee eerie devices to be monitored in advance Monitoring th t val f ee acai ate ie ee i Ae Subsection 14 2 14 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m devices Subsection 14 2 17 from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memory of a Subsection 14 2 21 specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices bit devices be seman an N the present value of word A Xx devices and buffer memory Changing the present value of TC Subsection 14 2 24 possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing device values by performing 3 z Subsection 14 2 8 a quick test A ee Displaying word device and buffer Subsection 14 2 7 memory values in decimal or A hexadecimal 1 Set value of T C and contact coil cannot be monitored 2 Set value of T C contact coil and actual value cannot be monitored Use the TC monitor 3 V Z and A cannot be monitored or their present values cannot be changed 14 2 System Monitor 14 9 14 2 1 Specifications UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNIC
53. or the D drive Internal SRAM right after formatting contact your nearest sales office or FA Center If touch OK the screen returns to Internal Flush memory area the Memory check screen wr ite read error _ok 14 6 Memory Check 14 6 3 Memory check operation 14 7 Drawing Check Zz O S 14 7 1 Drawing check function gt a The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display 5 check move check among screens 14 7 2 Display operation of drawing check Z x Ow Z20 Main menu Debug amp self check Self check SEe lt gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Zur Main Menu Debug amp self check Debug self check Self check ozo Memory check 3 Q Display check ZZ oy 2ES ace Touch Debug amp self check Ont OON 09 Display check 9 amp cra checki Display check Gee NZD lt m gt 5 SE ste O lt Starting drawing check Drawing check Touching Drawing check in the a Display check displays the screen describing the drawing check operation z Touch the upper right of the description D screen to start a drawing check TA O LO x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O Point Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color Z 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn Ae according to the lay
54. with 4 or v x Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor Error message Detail Step 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 PLC diagnostics screen The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on screen key 1 Displayed contents Error message Detail Step 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 1 2 3 No Item Display contents Displays the error message I O configuration error PLC hardware error PC HPP 1 Error message communication error Serial communication error Parameter error Syntax error Circuit error Operation error 3 St Displays the step number in the sequence program at which the error occurred e j This is displayed only for a syntax error circuit error or operation error 14 108 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics Remark Error details For details on an FX PLC error refer to the manual below L Programming manual for the FX CPU used UTILITY FUNCTION 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PLC diagnostics screen COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Key Function x Exits the PLC diagnostics DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF C
55. z CZ 4 Remove the old USB environmental protection cover from the GOT to replace it with the new USB environmental protection cover USB environmental Fix the new USB environmental protection cover while fitting its protecugn ae projection to the hole in the GOT and mount the cover to the GOT using Projection 2 the mounting screws mt A Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48Nem for both mounting screws A and B SS Mounting screw A B Jy Mounting screw B lt M3 x 6 pan head screw aa a 09 Z Point Precautions when the USB environmental protection cover is opened Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is opened 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 11 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover 8 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 1 Applicable stand The following stand is applicable for GT11000 Product name GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Stand A9SGT 50STAND Stand for 5 7 8 2 Installing procedure Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting fitting of the stand A Put the GOT into the stand from the stand front side and fix it using the fixtures For how to mount the GOT refer to the following L Section 6 5 Installation Procedure For details of the stand refer to the following GT05 50STAND gt GOT1000 series User
56. 1 Time Setting and Display 12 5 12 1 3 Clock setting operations UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND J OPERATION N SETTINGS 7 Oz a FEA HES neo lt n O 5 Ode JZE Orgs FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL The display of OS project data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or CF card and the data transmission between GOT and CF card are possible The format of the CF card is also possible 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Drive name allocation For the Built in CF card Flash Memory Internal or Internal SRAM the following drive names A drive C drive and D drive are allocated Drive name Allocation A drive Built in CF card C drive Flash Memory Internal D drive Internal SRAM 13 1 2 Data type and storage location At system startup The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below E GOT main unit Install Download Project data To ieg ploa D drive C drive GT Designer2 Internal SRAM Flash Memory Internal Project data GT Designer3 Install Write Download Open a file BootOS BootOS O j OS S OS Project data OS Project data Project data Project data Os wD SS S o mr Q Q 09 Project data Project data Inserting Removi
57. 10 14 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Delete Registered keyword is deleted D Touching the key pops up a keyboard for keyword input When the correct keyword is input and the key is touched the keyword is deleted UTILITY FUNCTION keyword Please input keyword Z H L S Z S O O 0O LZ Hia Lu Fw AT DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword x1 FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 1 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd keyword CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 15 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Clear To access an FX PLC where a keyword has been registered keyword protection is cancelled ED Touching the key pops up a keyboard for keyword input 2 When the correct keyword is input and the key is touched the protection is cancelled keyword Please input keyword Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword or Customer Keyword to cancel the protection
58. 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation O Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in the Communication setting screen Communication Setting Standard I F Setting CNG Rte oT A MELSEC F4 J o wA S Ca Ho i d U 9 Host PG S CH Dr iver assign Definition of ChNe O None LFA device amp Barcode 4 PC The screen switches to the Communication Detail setting screen Set communication parameters from this screen Refer to the following for the setting change operation C Section 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Communication Detail setting MELSEC Fx Transmission Speed 36400 BPS Communication parameter keyword 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 9 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions UTILITY FUNCTION Z e H L S Z S O Ti Qo LZ Hia Lu Fw AT DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Point 7 Communication parameter setting using drawing software 1 Select System Environment Communication Settings from GT Designer2 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at Controller Setting of Common To change the communication parameter settin
59. 200 02 02 Microcomputer Supporting XON XOFF control EIR Communication driver A O connection Supporting interrupt extension Computer 03 00 MODBUS RTU z PE BOtee ser l JOBA Communication driver connection SRRI COLRERION MODBUS RTU 04 04 O MODBUS TCP l m l aE Communication driver ei Supporting MODBUS TCP connection MODBUS TCP 03 09 x Communication driver Supporting connection to OMRON i i i 2 18U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL O emperature controller Minors NEO 02 02 temperature The functions to automatically stop ee controller pa l Communication driver monitoring faulty stations and to connection 2 58L OMRON THERMAC INPANEL O disconnect communications with NEO 03 03 controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to SHINKO oe 2 43V Shinko Technos Controller O SHINKO indicating controller 03 01 indicating The functions to automatically sto controller ee j Communication driver connection MEAE eter ene 2 58L Shinko Technos Controller G disconnect communications with 03 03 controllers are added O Supporting connection to CHINO A Communication driver CHINO controller The functions to automatically stop T CHINO Controllers MODBUS connection monitoring faulty stations and to 103 03 disconnect communications with controllers are added Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 30 Continued to next
60. 50PSCW GT11 50PSCW GT10 50PSCW GT10 40PSCW GT10 30PSCW GT10 20PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSGW GT16 60PSGW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSGW GT11 50PSGW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSGW GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO GT15 UCOV GT11 50UCOV GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT16 80SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 VHNB GT11H 50ESCOV GT10 LDR GT10 50FMB GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 90XLTT GT16 60SLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 50ATT 85 GT15 80SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT15 60VLTT GT 15 A 19 m Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 GT Designer3 GT Simulator3 GT Works2 VersionO GT Designer2 VersionO GT Designer2 GT Converter2 GT Designer2 Classic GT Simulator2 GT SoftGOT1000 GT SoftGOT2 GX Developer GX Simulator2 GX Simulator Document Converter PX Developer MT Works2 MT Developer MR Configurator FR Configurator FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool RT ToolBox2 m License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License m License key for GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviations and generic terms License key License key FD Description Abbreviation of the SWLIDNC GTWK3 E and SWLIDNC GTWK3 EA Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simula
61. 58L BootOS 03 03 P O Communication e Enables installing the standard monitor OS with the communication driver at once when only BootOS is already installed on the GOT Enables installing OSs on the A drive with l 2 73B x x the OS boot drive set to the A drive Enables setting the maximum number of Preferences 2 63R O screens to be displayed on GT Designer2 Functions of the collection target Device list selection jump file output and others are 2 3B O added Continued to next page App 35 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series a Version of GT GT GT Soft Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 Q Z lt Enables displaying the direct input texts in Text list Pia j 2 90U H a list 2Z qO Z Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image iO Reading BMP or l m data reduced to a resolution of 2000 X 2 11F TO JPEG image data l sZ 1600 or less on GT Designer2 W O 7 A n A Added common settings object functions ae n o gt 1 For GT16 oleh rod pez W lt lt mate Version of GT l Item Description i Version of OS Designer2 All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or Common setting 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 earlier are available Supported Figure Supporting logo text Standard monitor OS 04 04 soon Standard font Supporting Chinese Traditional supporting Europe 2 91
62. 8 pins and cable expansion connection ee OVERVIEW For connecting FXCPU expansion board MINI DIN 8 pins and GOT Z H lt a gt S LL Z O LU ep gt 09 ep Peas MAAT GT01 C30R4 25P 3m z FXCPU Cable ree For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller irec l l L GOT 7 cable l pera ae For connecting FA CNV O CBL and GOT u ink j GT01 C200R4 25P 20m For connecting serial communication unit AJ71QC24 N R4 and GOT connection n GT01 C300R4 25P 30m cable lt H ad Computer ST09 C30R4 6C link GT09 C100R4 6C For connecting computer link unit serial connection GT09 C200R4 6C 2m communication unit and GOT QCPU D direct For connecting QCPU Motion controller CPU Q o l GT01 C30R2 6P 3m l connection series and GOT m cable FX expansion board 6 For connecting FXCPU expansion board D sub z connection l l 4 9pins special adapter D sub 9 pins and GOT z FX special 7 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m For connecting personal computer GT Z adaptor g RS 232 j Designer2 D sub 9 pins female and GOT Eanes connection APEE e D sub 9 pins female transfer cable FX special S For connecting FXCPU special adaptor D sub X adaptor GT01 C30R2 25P 3m 25 pins and GOT connection Computer l GT09 C30R2 9P 3m l l l l link For connecting computer link unit serial connection communication unit and GOT GT09 C30R2 25P 3m cable gt O 4 Description in parentheses indica
63. 9 3 LOUGH panel CNECICODECraAlIONS a2 ancacaiarteSicc eee Sashcal he sS a a enka ie a N celemedecss 14 131 eM IC TVS Cert eta rca atc cyte E det oud ctas atacand am etdaddeactntias 14 132 AY Add CNC TUNING MOM xc cers oath sane seteste E O N 14 132 14 10 2 Display operation OF VO CHECK aux cctencset ee hedeced etc dan ada rae Gade ana Sete ideale aaia 14 132 14 10 3 VO Check operati ON scrinia ttde a a aaa Se ead esatis 14 133 NAAT System Alarmi DISplay saric A 14 135 14 11 1 System alarm display function annaannannannannannannnannannnnnnnnnnrnnesnrrnrnnerrrrnrrnrennernernrrnrrnrrsnrnnene 14 135 14 11 2 Displaying the system alarm display ccc ceccc eee sececeeeceeeseeeeee cess eeseeeseeeeeeesseeeseeeseeeseeegaees 14 135 14 11 3 Operating the system alarm CISPIAY c ccc cecccc eee seeeceeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseesseeeseeeseeeeanes 14 136 UAE OEE gt ad e E S ONC E Cee eg a eR OO 14 137 1412 SOT Slat ime TUM CMON ssh tn55 ede cee Svein E N a 14 137 14 12 2 Display operation of GOT Start tiMe eee ceccc eee ceeeceeese cess esse esse eeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaees 14 137 t412 DISDlay Or GOI Star IMC Seas helencerce EAE yee ued E dene oees cuca EEE 14 138 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 1 dere i Gi 20s genet ene tte meee meee ere ek met Neen Cate een et eee nee emer Ate ae meee ere eee re mtr 15 1 15 1 1 Display operation Of CIOAN cccccccsccseecceeeeceeecee
64. Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 40 Item Key Window Device setting Communication settings Object rename Lamp Touch switch Touch switch EN Version of GT i GT GT Soft Description i Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 User defined key window display can be switched in synchronization with the 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 language switching device In the user defined key window input range maximum value and input range 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 minimum value are displayed The current value is displayed in the key P 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 window 65 or later station numbers in the MELSECNET G network system can be 2 63R Standard monitor OS 03 07 set with using Universal model QCPU as a relay station Enables reading or writing a device when pa 2 91V Standard monitor OS 04 03 the 32K block unit is splitted Enables setting multiple drivers for external devices including a bar code 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 x reader One driver can be set for one type of external device Function to allow setting of object name 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 aaa Stroke font Stroke font applicable 2 2a3v Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o e created as a part can be used to a 2
65. Boot 0Se fYAR ILP CT installed in the built in Flash memory I Now installing BootOS The CF card access LED is lit during installation Do not pull out the CF card or power off the GOT while the CF card access LED is lit GOT restarts automatically after installation GOT Hing o ge is completed Reboot When Standard monitor OS is already installed touch the button to reboot the GOT After confirming that GOT restarted normally switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT D Confirm the CF card access LED is extinguished remove the CF card from the CF interface of GOT 16 5 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility Zz O For details of program data control function refer to the following z C gt Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL gt Program data control is a function to install OS files from the CF card to GOT by the Utility operation 5 Point Precautions on executing program data control function n O When execute program data control function Standard monitor OS has to be Lu installed in GOT in advance Thus this function cannot be used for the initial 22 installation of Standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT Ze H Install Standard monitor OS by the following two methods O20 1 Method usi
66. Comments will not be displayed when the following PLC parameters PLC file settings are set e When the comment file is set to Not used e When the comment file is set to Use the same file name as the program e When a password is set to the comment file e When a comment file is stored in program memory e Displaying the comments of QCPUs QOOJCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Comments will not be displayed when the following PLC parameter PLC file setting is set e When the comment file MAIN does not exist in the program memory f Displaying the comments of QnACPUs With a QnACPU whose date on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B comments cannot be displayed Use a QnACPU whose date on the rating plate is 9707B or later Also comments will not be displayed when the following settings are made to the PLC parameter PLC file setting is set e When the comment file is not set Not used e When the comment file is set to Use the same file name as the program e When a keyword is entered for each memory 14 20 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices Z O 3 Z T Z E Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value
67. D LL gt Z O lt OM Z Sree Ste Szi When no devices e When devices are entered are entered TES THEMEN FORME SET H EE TES EN ORM NetNo GIST FFICPUNe 0 Q ZZ oe az eel ea FF your m m w PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM mija THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No DON N O gt 2 FEA TE oira X5 TEST FORM SET Sak Ze E OLV If necessary perform Quick test If necessary switch the screen display a Z operation C Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the gt Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test display format DEC HEX and lt a operation of monitor devices comment no comment display 2 Ta J0 LO If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices 1 Enter the initial device name and a device number you want to monitor gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation Section 14 2 24 Test operation x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 35 14 2 16 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters The TC monitor is a function to monitor only timers T and counters C This section describes how to operate the TC monitor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 18 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions 1 The informa
68. Enter the channel number from the keyboard and touch the key to settle the entered value Setting the channel number to 1 displays the name of the communication driver for which CH No 1 is assigned with drawing software in the driver display box Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Ch o ed T RA UnA OPU AJEA o Reese 9 Host PG S a Hosti PU CH Dr iver assign Definition of ChNo O None LFA device amp Barcode 4 PC Communication detail settings switching operation D If you touch the driver display BOX the screen switches to the Detailed setting screen of the related communication device gt Section 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 8 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions Function Contents Communication Set various communication parameters of communication devices parameters setting The settable parameters differ according to the communication device Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Keyword Delete For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted Keyword Clear For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled For the FX series PLCs with the 2nd keyword in use the cancelled program protection in the Keyword Protect PLC can be reactivated
69. FE Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER LED on z the GOT front face S 4 Spread the protective cover for oil so that it covers the rubber packing part on the GOT rear face For keeping liquids and others out of the control panel make sure that the rubber packing part is completely covered Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front 8 8 Protective cover for oil 8 13 8 8 1 Applicable protective cover for oil Mount the GOT onto the control panel When the control panel is dirty clean the control panel The panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are the same as those without the cover Panel cut Protectivecover dimensions for oil uss C Mounting metal fixture Control panel Point Precautions for protective cover for oil e The protective cover for oil is a consumable product Check the cover for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replacewith new one if necessary e Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover e Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches thinners organic solvents corrosive chemicals and others Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover e When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT do no
70. FG wire gt z GOT FG terminal b For other bus connection cables Ground the braided wire for grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw LI gt H T x m T INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 5 11 5 3 3 Grounding the cable 6 INSTALLATION MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS lt XDANGER Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option function board on to from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board or battery or operating the reset switch wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity The static electricity can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfun
71. For RS 232 connection Connector selection switch for PLC 3 Terminating resistor selector oo Switch for selecting RS 422 or RS 232 set to RS 422 by default communication For connecting to a personal computer for changing the USB port aa i communication driver 7 Connector for PLC communication D sub 9 pin female For RS 422 connection 8 Protective cover Protect unused D sub connector USB port and switches Terminal block for the serial multi drop Terminal block 5 pin with a protective cover M3 Tightening torque communication 0 5 to 0 6N m 24VDC power supply connector insertion point A dedicated cable is 10 Power supply connector O included 11 Slider for installing the DIN rail 12 Mode selection switch Do not operate Set to right by default When set to left the module Slide switch does not operate normally 8 16 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit 8 9 4 Installation m Installed with DIN rail LU Install the multi drop connection module with its hook 1 place using the DIN rail 6 e Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 width 35mm Install the DIN rail with screws at intervals of 150mm 6 x l Directly installed to panel me Zz Install the multi drop connection module to the panel using 4 5mm holes 2 places gt 9 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive Z lt O Programmable logic controllers are open type dev
72. Function Enables setting the station No switching devices for the overlap windows 3 4 and 2 96A x 5 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 Jo x lt Language switching device can be used 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 pp O Language Switching Device Enables setting the column No of the comments to be displayed when the 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O device value is out of range l Password can be set for the connection of Password Setting S 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x lt O motion controller and servo amplifier System information of report function and 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 print are added D drive automatic recovery status 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 System notification signal is added x x information System information regarding B drive has 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 x been added The system The system signal 2 3 is added 2 3 is added 2 29A Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 04 04 04 x lt D a name Password is changed to 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 xX Security in the system environment Enables setting the operator TA Extended function OS authentication l Operator authentication 03 03 x Extended function OS Operator authentication 04 03 x RFID 04 03 Extended function OS Operator authentication 04 03 x Supporting the external authentication RFID for the
73. GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Section 3 1 3 2 3 3 8 8 10 2 Appendix 4 Mar 2009 JY997D17501 H SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Chapter 2 3 Section 4 2 8 4 17 4 Appendix 1 Appendix 4 Additions Section 8 9 8 10 Jul 2009 JY997D17501 J Section 2 1 3 3 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 8 9 8 10 Oct 2009 JY997D17501 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Chapter 1 Section 2 2 3 2 4 1 8 3 8 9 Chapter 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 Appendix 2 Adaitions zm 14 2 14 3 14 4 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum OUTLINE PRECAUTIONS e This manual provides information for the use of the graphic operation terminal The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the pro
74. GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA STN monochrome black Type TFT color liquid crystal Color liquid crystal white liquid crystal 5 7 Screensize size Display size size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format 16 dot standard font 20 characters x 15 lines 12 dot standard font 26 characters x Display character l l 20 lines Horizontal format Monochrome black white Display Display color 256 colors l section 16 scales 4 Left right 70 degrees Top Left right 55 degrees Top Left right 45 degrees Top Display angle 70 degrees Bottom 50 65 degrees Bottom 70 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format Contrast adjustment a 16 level adjustment only Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels 8 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h at operating ambient temperature of 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube irreplaceable by the user backlight detection function is Backlight included Backlight screen saving time can be set Approx 54 000 hours or longer The time takes to reduce to 50 of the backlight luminance at the Approx 75 000 hours or longer The time takes to Life 2 reduce to 50 of the backlight luminance at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Number of touch keys 300 keys screen Matrix of 15 lines x 20 columns a Minimum 16 x 16 dots per key
75. H The functions that can be used with the MELSEC FX list editor depend on the keyword protection level O Available X Unavailable Keyword protection level Function All operation protect Read incorect write Incorrect write Keyword not Reference T All on line operation PIO eN protect Write registered keyword ZO 9 Da protect 2 gt Oo protect protect protection canceled re Swi H l Displaying sequence Subsection OZ Reang programs 14 4 7 sequence Searching commands Subsection programs x x devices 14 4 8 Writ r Subsection 22 z iti riting commands Writing g x x x 14 4 9 a sequence ire Changing operands set Subsection miae programs OOM values 14 4 10 Subsection Inserting commands 14 4 9 y ONE Subsection azg Deleting commands x x x F igs 14 4 11 ies neo L Subsection sad Sequence program all clear x x x oak 14 4 12 IZ OLN Subsection PLC diagnostics ex 14 4 13 p t tti Subsection z arameter settin g x x x 14 4 14 gt a 1 When the 2nd keyword is set to an FX PLC that supports 2nd keyword it becomes X cannot be used ae 2 The names within the parentheses are for when a keyword 2nd keyword is set Ee LO x T I O LL in N H u DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 113 14 4 15 Keywords Operation gt Keyword setup Select Keyword setup with 4 or vy x Parameter setting
76. LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF Continued to next page INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 15 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices From previous page Device entry screen when the entry monitor Device entry screen when the batch monitor or TC monitor is selected BM monitor is selected 1 2 3 x x of OST FF CPUNO E 6b 30 32b 1 0 LFF JCPUNG JLH W 16b 0 32b 19 I O Nol Lj jajyv 7 38 BIFI DWI RI fol 4 5 AJEIMIJT C ajy E EJB 4H Enter KA 0 5 7 8 Netho fl OST Elm eth DEVIC Set 1 to 8 as shown in the table below and then touch the key For the operation of key windows see the following Subsection 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure Description of setting No Item CC Link connection Direct CPU Computer link Bus connection connection connection G4 2 1 Network No 0 FF When the host station is selected 0 When the master station 2 Station No FF e seleced 1 to 64 When a local station is selected 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUSs It is not Pi 3 CPU No necessary when the system is connected to another CPU 4 Data rande 1 Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module g 0 Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word modul
77. Mini HG MODBUS O connection disconnect communications with 03 03 controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to CB series 2 87R RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O 04 03 S i Ionio i T Communication driver upporting connection to inverter ey FREQROL 500 700 02 02 x x O Setting range for Timeout Time has been a Communication driver changed 2 43V O Inverter FREQROL 500 700 03 01 3 to 30 seconds gt 1 to 30 seconds connection Supporting connection to E700 series and Communication driver 2 63R x lt gt lt O V500 V500L series FREQROL 500 700 03 07 Communication driver Supporting connection to D700 series 2 91V x x O FREQROL 500 700 04 03 5 i ioni ifi ZOK Communication driver upporting connection to servo amplifier i pp j MELSERVO J2S M 01 02 x x O Supporting connection to MELSERVO J3 Communication driver 2 18U by x x d Servo amplifier series MELSERVO J3 J2S M 02 02 connection l l Communication driver Supporting connection to MR J3 T series 2 63R x x O MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 07 i iti 2 i Communication driver Supporting writing to the EPROM area in 9325 O parameter writing MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 Continued to next page App 31 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Version of GT11 a GT GT Soft Q Item Description GT Version of OS Z Desi 15 GOT1000 Bus Serial Ww esigner2 om Z Supporting the point ta
78. Oo ACH DEV MON PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM A THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No Z gt 4 Fue DEO lt 8 SE oe OLN Display format change menu screen NetNo GIST FFICPUNo 0 NetNo G ST FFICPUNe 0 m a aa O gt J0 LO x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O NetNo JST FFICPUNO 0 DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF CANCEL INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 25 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation 14 2 10 Entry monitor The device monitor is a function to enter devices to be monitored in advance and monitor only entered devices This section describes how to activate the entry monitor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen is described below For the key functions see the page that follows 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No DEVICE MONITOR MetNo O ST DEVICE MONITOR FF CPUNS 0 H 3 products units BG aaa Link status TST Froduct line B 200 o R T Comments displayed No comments displayed 4 Displays a comment 5 Displays a data range 6 Displays a word device value 7 Displays bit device on off 8 Displays a device No 9 Displays a device name 10 Displays a monitor display area For fur
79. PLC Memory cassette is write protected Check the memory cassette Cannot read write device protected by keyword Remove key word PLC cannot handle as requested Correct devices Action Q When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error T Z occurred in PLC CPU drive 0 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC z CPU drive s3 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the 4 specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC CPU LU lt x Ze yyy H SH gt xo wa wz U lt X lt j lt x drive file register name When you specify drive 0 execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name other peripherals carry out the process to the file register Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe function again Division 0 was generated by the data operational expression APPENDICES Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not become 0 The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower limit Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit gt Lower limit T
80. Setup in GOT Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version LJ Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Adjust the time of PLC CPU clock data to the clock data of GOT Broadcast Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 Same as setting in GOT Setup in GOT Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Adjust and Broadcast can be used appropriately Adjust Broadcast Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 Same as setting in GOT Setup in GOT Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals None No adjustment of clock data 12 2 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Time Setting amp disp meer D If touch the setup item the setup contents z Clock setting is changed LL Ww Kdosi broadel Adiusueicadease NoNe a GOT internal battery Norma ee o m voltage status S if touch button the setup contents is reflected CZ O x i i OK Ow ern en if touch button without touching om if you close the screen the changed button the dialogue box shown on the left sr value will be canceled P zW OK is displayed e
81. Ss 16 level adjustment e 350 cd m7 r Adjustable in 8 levels F 400 cd m Hardware version A B 220 cd m ENS OUECE OMY xdiustable in Sieve 380 cd m Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Hardware version C or later 2 Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment z Lif Approx 50 000h Time for display intensity to become 1 5 at operating ambient temperature ue of 25 C Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube irreplaceable by a user backlight shutoff detection function is g included Backlight off screen saving time can be set LL Approx 54 000h or longer Life Approx 75 000h or longer Time for display intensity Time for display intensity ue reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C reaches 50 at the operating Y ambient temperature of 25 C Number of touch keys 300 keys screen Matrix structure of 15 lines X 20 columns Minimum 16 X 16 dots per key ea Number of points pang touched Maximum of 2 points simultaneously 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max 2 Flash memory Internal for storing project data 3Mbytes and OS s Memory Life Number of 100 000 times write times i SRAM Internal 512kbyes battery backup Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data alarm history and recipe data Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable m Environmental protectiv
82. Stop the FX PLC before changing writing inserting deleting a sequence program or changing parameters Operation is not possible with the FX PLC running Sz LON zz 3 Ifyou press the key but the system does not proceed to the next operation for example a ae search B00 Check the input contents applied instruction number device value etc O z Z gt 4 When using list monitor Pan Only devices to be used for basic instructions can be monitored plese we The status of devices word bit to be used for application instructions cannot be monitored One OH Q Z lt z 7 O gt LU mle L O 14 lt T O H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 91 14 4 3 Precautions 14 4 4 Display Outline until the start This subsection describes an outline until the MELSEC FX list editor screen is displayed after List editor for MELSEC FX Option OS is installed in the GOT Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function switch MELSEC FX list editor set in the project data Starting from the utility Display the utility Touch the special function switch After the utility is displayed touch D If check Debug gt Rite x eens a ug Refer to the following manual for main menu how to set the special function switch For how to display the utility
83. Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA PLC Communication driver AB SLC500 AB 1 N 04 02 2 90U AB MicroLogix 04 02 AB Control CompactLogix 04 02 EtherNet IP AB 04 02 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Supporting connection to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC connection Communication driver 2 90U GE Fanuc Automation SNP X 04 02 GE FANUC PLC Supporting connection to GE FANUC PLC connection Communication driver 2 90U LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 04 02 SCHNEIDER PLC l l m 2 90U Communication driver eonneeion Supporting connection to the MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP 04 02 Communication driver 2 90U SIEMENS S7 300 400 04 02 SIEMENS S7 200 04 02 LS IS PLC connection Supporting connection to LS IS PLC SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS PLC connection Communication driver Computer 04 02 Microcomputer Supporting connection to a microcomputer 2 90U connection Communication driver MODBUS RTU 04 04 MODBUS RTU con nection Supporting MODBUS RTU connection 2 96A Communication driver MODBUS TCP 04 02 MODBUS TCP con nection Supporting connection to the MODBUS TCP 2 90U Communication driver 2 90U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO 04 02 OMRON temperature Supporting connection to OMRON temperature controller controller connection Communication driver 2 90U SHINKO TECHNOS CONTROLLER 04 02 SHINKO indicating Supporting connect
84. System Information YES function System Signal 1 is set NO YES GOT POWER LED blinks in orange green NO The possible cause is a GOT hardware fault Turn on the power supply of GOT Backlight OFF during screen saving is set The setting of screen saving can be set in the GOT utility menu 1 The bit of Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal may be ON Confirm the bit status When ON set the bit to OFF 2 Backlight bulb is blown To replace the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 For utility menu refer to the following Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 For the details of the forced screen saver enable signal refer to the following ea GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 18 10 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring 18 5 Starting GOT Q Z lt Lu oF 18 5 1 Power Off lt 0 a Zi Do not turn the GOT power OFF during the start up right after turning the GOT power on or during the z restart up after transferring each OS or project data and changing the setting on the utility screen 1 When Booting or Booting project data is displayed on the screen GOT is in start up mode or restart up mode lt When GOT standard monitor OS is V 01 02 01 or before gt
85. This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC FX list editor For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Controllers that can be edited with the MELSEC FX list editor Target controller FXCPU Connection forms O Available x Unavailable Function name Connection form between GOT and PLC CC Link Bus Direct CPU Computer link oae GOT multidrop connection connection connection fa connection G 41 Sequence program writing parameter MELSEC FX list editor setting PLC diagnostics and keyword x x x x registration etc Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Name Description Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are required Option OS OS memory space user area Option function board MELSEC FX list editor OKB GT11 50FNB 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS L GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area
86. Touch D Memory check 2A Touch Self check Pro mae NZD SAD J O lt Q Z lt lt D A gt LU O LO Internal SRAM x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O Select the memory to check and touch Check DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 6 Memory Check 14 119 14 6 1 Memory check function 14 6 3 Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory Point P When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following e CF card inserting removing method lt gt gt Section 8 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the CF card or Flash memory C drive For details of Flash memory contact your nearest sales office or FA Center The following example explains about Memory Check using Flash memory C drive For the standard CF card A drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as Flash memory Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen and touch the button If select the button the numeric keyboard window is displayed Internal Flush memory area wreite read check Execute now If select the button the screen returns to the initial menu Touch 5 9 2 o and then Enter The password is fixed to 5920
87. When END is input b When the command not available on the keyboard is input Ex When FOR K5 is input 14 64 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 10 Command input procedures SO YOLINOW GeVANVLS dNY SOLOOd S093109 dO NOILVTIVLSNI NOILOAS AV IdSIQ JO NINY4 10 rerni T yH aS L09 CNV AvJas d J714 aa AV IdSId SNLYLS A J3LLvda ANY SONILLAS MOOT9 SONILLAS NOILVasadO aNY AV 1dSId NOILONN 4 ALITILA ONILLAS AOVAYSLNI NOILVOINNNIWOO For command code and device 1 2 4 r DEVICE No GO 4 4 VICE r i es a pe 4 iCommand SP gt r ee ee Ex When LD XO is input LD X 0 GO For commands other than above 3 Input the key between the command and the device the source data and the destination data Ex 1 When FMOV K2 DO K5 is input F gt MOV gt K gt 2 gt SPa D gt 0 gt SP K M 5 M GO Ex 2 When OUT T1 K10 is input OUT gt T gt 1 gt SP gt Km 1m 0 P 14 65 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 10 Command input procedures Ex 3 hen MC N3 M5 is input m S
88. and 1 2 below If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems connect the ground cable to the panel also If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 1 2 m Lu gt Connection cable Connection cable 2 Ground cable from the panel that houses control Z Ground cable from equipment the panel that Use the thickest Y houses control cable possible o equipment T VN Z Use the thickest D O cable possible Panel grounding Remedy 1 1 i Remedy 1 2 7 P O If taking Remedy 1 worsens noise interference taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it q L O e Remedy 2 Refer to the figures Remedy 2 1 and 2 2 below a Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times approx 3 times if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 Lu lt zZ H Connection cable Connection cable w A Ground cable from the panel that houses control Ground cable from equipment a th that Sefa pean Use the thickest equipment cable possible D Use the thickest T cable possible Panel grounding Tf Remedy 2 1 Remedy 2 2 i zZ O q ep Z Z O
89. and files displayed L7 Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Z O O 5 The display operation of alarm information x E E Alarm information screen If touch a drive of Select drive the a oram Data J Alarm information information in the first folder of the touched pelect drive drive is displayed 7 A Built in CF card 2 2 If touch a folder name the information of Sw the touched folder is displayed Siz C i Flash Memory aan ED If touch a folder of the information of zi Do Internal S5RAM i the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed Q if touch A button of the scrollbar the lt 8 screen scrolls up down by one line ae LU If touch 4 button the screen scrolls Doi up down by one screen Alarm information Storage file folder display screen G If touch a file name the touched file name 9 gt is selected and inverted Rea jeo Refer to the following for delete copy 58 operations az Delete ieee gt this section P 1 COPY C n LF this section z gt o If touch button the screen is closed a LL Me O LU ae O LL Lu U H O O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 4 Alarm Information 13 26 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Deletion operation Deletes selected files D Touch and select the fi
90. and information about the data using other user areas lt gt GT Designer2 Version Q Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 3 Option function board For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual L Section 8 3 Option Function Board 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 89 14 4 1 Specifications UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Functions list and monitor conditions The following shows the memory that can be monitored by the MELSEC FX list editor and the FX PLC status conditions Can be monitored A Can be monitored under certain conditions x Cannot be monitored Memory that can be monitored 2 EEPROM R memory Function Built in RAM memory cassette flash memory cassette memory cassette l Displaying sequence Reading programs sequence i Searching commands programs devices Writing Writing commands sequence Changing operands set programs values Inserting commands Deleting commands Sequence program all clear PLC diagnostics Display Parameter settin Keyword The operation is available only when the protect switch is OFF 2 The available memory differs de
91. angle of 75 Lng pez W lt lt 254 10 0 A 260 10 24 o im O Q Z Qi A A lt x Unit mm inch AYGT 50STAND 4 87 254 10 0 156 6 15 262 10 32 220 8 67 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 4 External diamentions of serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M e Protective cover is installed e Protective cover is removed a GT01 RS4 M MITSUBISHI GT01 RS4 M RS 232 O POWER O POWER ORD a ia O ERROR O ERROR io an 102 N 7hrs 232 Ts 0 OPEN E my Ua OIN OIN 65 2 56 i 57 2 25 i 80 3 15 Unit mm inch External diamentions of connector conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S MITSUBISHI GT10 9PT5S 48 1 89 Waa Unit mm inch App 5 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of communication cable GT01 C30R4 25P eG Us z 16 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 om 0 63 3 Zo d 22 9 E i z x 3 o O lt x Da Lu GT01 C OOO R4 25P 20 16 50 1 97 L Zoe 0 63 Wie QT a CO 0 28 ap a aL N m Z Ww A a Value of OOO Length L mm inch 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300 30000 1181 1 GT01 C DOU R4 8P 16 50 1 97 L 40 1 58 013 35 1 38 Value of OOO Length L mm inch 10 1000 39 37 30 3000 118 11 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300 30000 1181 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 6
92. appear if the Standard monitor OS is already installed on the GOT D Ma Boot OS has been already installed Existing 05 Ver 01 00 A Expected 05 Ver 01 00 A Existing basic OS and other OS and s project data will be deleted O Do you want to install T H O Z O LO O Touching the button will start the installation Qo gt q Touching the button will stop the installation lt a oO 1 ap of Zz TO Ooz ZEO OS OTa za Jg IOs ED D 5K ZOV 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 8 2 Regardless of the types of data as described in section a and b above on the CF card or whether the version of the OS to be installed is the same as the current one or newer a window that has the version information and a message that asks whether to continue installation will appear Boot OS has been already installed Existing 05 Ver 01 00 A Expected 05 Ver 01 00 A Existing basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install 7 lt The GOT screen that appears when the Boot OS was installed from the CF card gt Touching the button will start the installation Touching the button will stop the installation Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match When the installation process is disc
93. below T a m Operation example D Display the keyword input request CZ O KEYWORD lt Bs Cz Sree sre E OZ o Stop operation of ACPU Set the target ACPU to the stop status Operation of PC memory all clear a LON uw uw gt H HO Input ALLCLR and press the key 432 Baty QON R 9 l Z gt 4 Display of PC memory all clear process Fuig free f f saa O When the GOT starts clearing the process the display in the left appears column and the total T i O number of bytes change sequentially Opa OXN ALL CLEAR Bs Z kkkkkkkkkk lt maximum 10 per process is displayed according to the memory capacity to be cleared As the clearing process proceeds each is deleted a One shows 10 of memory capacity ae LU 0 The memory capacity total number of bytes to be cleared is displayed in kbytes nS As the clearing process proceeds 1 kbyte is decreased 1 4 xX T Completion of PC memory all clear process T When the GOT completes the clearing process the screen in the left appears m i 09 status before the mode selection E MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM Z PRESS MODE KEY OO LL 2 gt zg If necessary start the next operation ng OA INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 75 14 3 19 PLC memory all clear 14 3 20 List of operation procedures 14 3 21 Common operation Basic operation Command input o
94. card to memory card Type II 8 2 2 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card adaptor Fit the CF card in the memory card adaptor LS 2 LILY CF card Memory card adaptor 8 4 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor 8 3 Option Function Board GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD a To use the optional functions the option function board is necessary i For GI11 with hardware version C or later option function can be used without mounting the option o function board Refer to the following for the functions requiring the option function board O L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual q GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual o ae os Point Checking method of hardware version Confim the hardware version with the products rating plate 7 6 H sa MITSUBISHI S GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL Q MODEL GT1155 QSBD D IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SERIAL 540001 BC BC L Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A Lu UD wiser CE z GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA The above models of GOTs have built in option functions and do not require the option function board gt O W r oc 8 3 1 Applicable option function board i The table below shows the type of option function board that can be used with GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD Model Con
95. change of the security level is displayed g gt When the password does not match an Rea error message is displayed dei a gt Sa 4 If button is touched it returns tothe 8 amp 2 password input screen again Password error a Z lt x 2 7 O gt WA O LO yZ D as O If X button is touched it returns to m security setting screen 9 z 6 Remark About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily ms lt n Lu When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return Z gt the security level to the original level a oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 4 Security Level Change 11 15 11 4 3 Security level change operation 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified The key position can be specified by one point or two points of 4 corners on the screen When the key position is specified by one point the time to switch to the utility when the key position is kept pressing can be set For default setting the upper left and upper right corners are specified Point Operation settings by drawing software Set the utility call key at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designerz2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Environmental Setting When change a part of
96. comments are displayed aE OW QON a Scrolls information upward by a line v Scrolls information downward by a line N ONE o FEA uio DEO lt 8 SE oe OLN Q Z lt z A 0 Q gt Wo 0 L O x O T 2 im Tp H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 27 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key functions 14 28 3 No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 10 displayed Description of setting CC Link Item Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection connection G4 Network No 0 F When the host station is selected 0 When the Station No FF master station is selected 1 to 64 When a local station is selected CPUN 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary O when the system is connected to another CPU Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format switching screen Da DW Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module ata range Nothing displayed Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module Decimal number 16 bit one word mo
97. display setting and GOT setup OfH screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button GOT B restarts and reflects the setting contents z O gt WA i LO we im 1E O T H O Z O wk On On Sz 55 oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 9 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The items which can be set are described below OFF SHORT LONG Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed lt At factory shipment SHORT gt ON OFF lt At factory shipment ON gt Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window Window move buzzer volume setting can be selected Security level change screen can be displayed gt Section 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed Utility call key screen change gt Section 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting The sensitivity of touch panel when GOT screen is Key sensitivity setting 1to38 touched can be set 1 Relationship between the key sensitivity setting and the key reaction speed Security setting screen change The relationship between key sensitivity and key reaction speed is shown in the table below eDecreasing the key sensitivity value will soeed up the key reaction speed Increasing the ke
98. driver connection OMRON SYSMAC 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 73B Communication driver EVENS eee KEYENCE KV 700 1000 01 00 connection Communication driver Supporting connection to KV 3000 and KV 5000 2 11F KEYENCE KV700 1000 01 03 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 52 oye Version of GT GT GT Item Description i Version of OS Designer2 1030 1020 TOSHIBA Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE o MACHINE PLC aie 2 77F TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini connection 01 03 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Communication driver Supporting connection to PANASONIC PLC 2 3B MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP PANASONIC 01 00 PLC connection Standard monitor OS 01 12 ae Communication driver Communication driver name has been changed 2 96A Panasonic MEWNET FP 01 07 ore Supporting connection to CP9200SH MP900 ITE Standard monitor OS 01 07 i Communication driver connection a Supporting connection to MP2000 MP900 series 2 73B YASKAWA MP 01 00 Standard monitor OS 01 07 LS IS PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2 90U connection LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 01 05 Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to MicroLogix 1000 1200 oe Reon ean 2 08L Communication driver s series ABLE AB MicroLogix 01 00 BRA
99. e EMC DIRECTIVE Z O x x H N Z WIRING OPTION GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ 6 3 GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA A 152 5 99 Type B 1 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ 40 1 57 GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA 40 1 57 BATTERY GT1150 QLBDA Unit mm inch No Name 1 Bus cable 2 PC cable barcode cable RFID cable 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions Make holes in the panel according to the dimensions list below i Lu Also ensure 10mm of space in upper and lower parts of the panel for mounting fixtures gt Horizontal format If the vertical format is selected the dimension must be rotated 90 degrees O 0 08 153 5 6 03 5 r 10 0 4 or more 6 x S o se Me 26 D O ep CZ O lt O m O a 10 0 4 D a a ormore Unit mm inch 9 S When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be maintained from other structures and devices m The below diagram represents a horizontal installation The same clearances must be maintained when rotating the GOT 90 degrees clockwise for a vertical installation gt Installation Environment When the a When the CF E card is not used card is used T A In the presence of radiated noise or 50 mm 1 97 80 mm 3 14 50 mm 1 97 100 mm 3 93 heat generating equipment nearby or more or more or more
100. e a 4 Rating plate nameplate gt 5 Lit CF card accessed Not lit CF card not accessed z Switch for prohibiting access to CF card before removing the CF card from o CF card access switch ON OCF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited 7 5 OFF No access to CF card CF card removal possible DO 7 CF card cover Open or close when inserting or removing the CF card 8 Option function board option Connect when using optional functions a 9 Option function board cover Remove when using the option function board 10 Reset switch Hardware reset switch Use an isolated rod to operate 11 Battery cover Open or close when replacing the battery i 12 Power terminal Ra and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and 13 Power terminal cover Open or close when connecting a power terminal Color transparent 14 CF card interface Interface for installing the CF card to GOT 15 CF card eject button Button for removing the CF card LW lt x Z x A GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history and recipe data 16 Battery The project data is stored in the built in flash memory Terminating resistor selector of RS422 485 17 Terminating resistor selector switch 330Q OPEN 110 At factory shipment 330 EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 2 Back Panel 4 3 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA
101. error occurred in PLC Confirm file register Action The monitored device No is set out of the permissible range of the targeted PLC CPU or the data length for a device dedicated to 32 bits is set other than 32 bits 1 Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings 2 AB L device S7 200 HC device OMPON temperature controller Set the data length of C0 C1 and C3 devices to 32 bits Available memory of the memory card is insufficient Check the available memory of the memory card on the Drive Information of drawing software lt gt GT Designer2 Versiong Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals The memory card is uninstalled or access switch is OFF in drive 1 Install the memory card in the specified drive 2 Turn ON the access switch Memory card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly Format the memory card Memory card is faulty Replace the memory card The BCD BIN conversion disabled data is being displayed input 1 Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value 2 Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal 1 Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the memory card 2 Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the memory card format Failed to generate recipe file Reboot the GOT after installing the memory car
102. file x fe pot x o i ong Deleting project file Poa Peteina precited x fT Pe oes the of projeol file oe EE Proctfiedstacneck Jof xlo Deletingalamiogfle x Se E S O GiA CSV conversion Conversion of alarm file from G1A to CSV G1A TXT conversion Conversion of alarm file from G1A to TEXT ms Historical graph Historical graph display of alarm file x display Total graph Total graph display of alarm file x display X X X o m O m Z m Q o lt X X X IXIXIX X IXIXIXIXIX Alarm information JA Program data control G1P CSV conversion Conversion of advanced recipe file from G1P to CSV ere A G1P TXT conversion Conversion of advanced recipe file from G1P to CSV jeff A CEE Changing advanced recipe folder name so 1 Se p Creating a new advanced recipe file or er o x toneco SST CT Bast deveevate ox x Continued to next page Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 12 O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not requireds GiL CSV conversion Conversion of logging file from G1L to CSV po x x m GiL TXT conversion Conversion of logging file from G1L to TXT po x x Displaying the name data size and creating date of file or folder Special data Deleting special data file or folder information Special data file check Downloading special data of A drive Standard X x x x x X x x x x x saad Deleti
103. for test Section 14 10 I O Check 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 co Zz O Z LL gt Z COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens for each utility the main menu must displayed first The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited Main Menu l Communication setting iki GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data control E Debug amp self check Main Menu 1 Main menu The menu items that can be selected from the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms When touching the button the Select Language screen is displayed select Language O Touch the button of a language to be displayed and then button and the language is selected 3 The gt mark moves 9 4 9 3 Utility Display Lo a Touching the button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one 14 Only selectable languages are displayed The
104. from K10 to K100 Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt 7 Select the Write mode Read the 4th step that changes TI the setting value A Move the cursor to setting value K10 of TO t v 0 PO U The setting value of timer TO was changed from K10 to K100 14 70 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 15 Changing Overwriting commands 14 3 16 Adding Inserting commands Z O The example shown below is used to describe how to add sequence program commands z T gt Before addition gt f 7 P K80 K5 D20 B 14 END 5 P K80 K5 D20 command ZQo After addition Mov b20k2vo18 Sre fs 2 __7 P_K80 K5 D20_ 14 MOV D20 K2Y018 Add the MOV 19 END command Q ZZ eg H I lt Z Operation example a Oa ty QON ep gt Z gt 5 FEA lt Key operation gt lt Display gt is QO Select the Insert mode 4 OUT TO E 4 K100 CAE INSERT 5 gt LD TO a 6 ANI M Read the 14th step to insert the command A 2 gt lt D Input the MOV D20 K2Y0018 14 D20 T 14 K2Y0018 9 19 gt END 20 NOP 14 Uy x T The command of MOV D20 K2Y0018 was I added to Step 14 s T 09 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 71 14 3 16 Adding Inserting commands 14 3 17 Deleting commands The example shown below is
105. gt 1 gt 2 gt Y gt Top I O gt SP number of unit B Buffer memory gt GO gt 4 4 K address gt 4 gt OTHER gt 3 gt 1 gt 3 OTHER gt 3 gt 2 gt lco gt 4 Go GO 3 2 3 gt t gt lco 3 gt 1 1 2 3 SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 4 gt 3 PC No GO Network No gt Station No gt OTHER gt 3 gt 3 gt 2 Ly gt E p CO OTHER gt oO ly e p CO Address _ gt hexadecimal MEJ E Address GO hexadecimal Machine _ To language code 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU connection If an error is detected with the MELSEC A list editor during operation of each mode an error message appears at the 4th line of the display Error messages display conditions and corrective actions are displayed below lf an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation ED Check the error message 2 Remove the cause of the error D Input the corresponding key The error me
106. gt GOT sas OS file BootOS or Standard ae write monitor OS installation vi OLN e When GOT is remote installed easily gt GOT using the CF card Install the CF A card in GOT Z GT Designer2 Cr tard lt GT Designer3 z 3 GOT CF card gt GOT a OS file BootOS Standard act Va upload monitor OS installation ye J0 GOT gt p GOT e Install OS from GOT to GOT using CF card LO Install the CF CF card card in GOT e a O Refer to the following for the installation which uses drawing software O L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual A i a ep GT Designer3 VersionL Screen Design Manual Fundamentals z l Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT KL gt Chapter 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 6 59 2 gt aa aZ mi OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 1 Utility Execution 9 1 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Item Functions overview Setting of channel number for the communication interface and assignment of communication driver Setting of communication parameter Sequence program protection key word setting When FX series PLC is connected Detail settings Sequence program protection key word deleting When FX series PLC is Communication setting L connected Sequence program protection status cancel When FX series PLC is co
107. in RS 422 el OVERVIEW Z Power type A 100 to 240VAC 2 D 24VDC ce L 5VDC a Panel color type B Black Fe l l T TFT color High intensity wide angle view Display device type N TFT color S STN color N STN monochrome 6 l lt Resolution X 1024 X 768 XGA S 800 X 600 SVGA O V 640 x 480 VCA Q 320 X 240 QVGA Blank less than 320 x 240 Display color type 5 65535 256 colors 2 16 colors Wu 0 Monochrome black and white 16 scales z Screen size type 9 45 0 z 8 12 1 7 10 4 6 8 4 5757 ui 3 4 5 2234 H QO GOT 1000 series GT15 GT11 GT10 1 For GT15 that can display 65536 colors refer to following lt GT15 User s Manual 2 Explanation of the option model name GT kk kkk lt lt A 90 15 0 80 12 1 75 Common for 10 4 8 4 70 Dedicated for 10 4 60 Dedicated for 8 4 50 Dedicated for 5 7 30 Dedicated for 4 5 S 20 Dedicated for 3 7 15 Dedicated for GT15 11 Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated for GT10 09 05 Common for GT15 GT11 01 O O 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 2 1 GOT GT11 Models with a built in serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GT1155 QTBD PRE ebin in battery built in serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GOT GT1155 QSBD l a acted in battery built in seri
108. input the pointer number NEn Subsection 14 4 9 2 Writing applied instructions 2 Input only when searching for commands requiring a device name and device number 3 After the search results are displayed you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the key Touching any key other than the key ends the search 2 Example Searching for LD M8000 Searcmcommand lt WRITE gt LD Lv ILe JLo JLo Le co Set the va READ gt READ mode 1 Select the command 1 1 to search for I Continue to search with the same conditions Point P Pointer P 1 searches For pointer searches only labels are searched Pointers specified as operands in applied instructions are not searched 14 100 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices Device search z 5 1 Operation Z T LL EEE E E gt MODE se peuh device name and _ 60 ao z Read mode A 7 1 After the search results are displayed you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the key Touching any key other than the key ends the search 2 O Su 2 Example Z20 LL Searching for LD M8000 Sre Obl O n Saarendavics lt WRITE gt M800 o ZZ Op asz MODE OE Ma wy QOV L READ mode 6 gt Zz gt s Ff W S gt ule Jo JLo JLo OE Continue to search with the Ome ook same conditions IZE OXN Q Z lt z A D mye A l Point Devices
109. lt Intelligence device station Communication driver 2 09K X Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK ID 01 02 Q173HCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to CC Link Ver 2 2 32J x x CC Link Ver2 ID 03 00 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU connection to Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver 2 63R 7 4 Supporting connection to CNC C70 connection to Supporting connection to CNC C70 C70 CC Link Ver2 ID 03 07 coc the redundant system with the redundant coc extension base unit CC Link Communication driver COMECON Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B Pe x x x Intelligent device CC Link Ver2 ID 03 09 station Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU Communication driver 2 77F x xX xX and Q26UDHCPU CC Link Ver2 ID 03 12 Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU 9 BOL Communication driver Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU CC Link Ver2 ID 03 13 x QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QOQOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU 2 91 Communication driver Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and l CC Link Ver2 ID 04 03 x Q20UDEHCPU S i tion to Q170MCPU TA Communication driver upporting connection to Pp i CC Link Ver2 ID 04 04 x x x O CC LINK G4 01 02 G4 _ connection to Q172HCPU _ 73HCPU a connection to CC Link Via CC Link Communication driver connec
110. monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their Zo O A iv comments are displayed asz Tra A Scrolls information upward by a line aon lv Scrolls information downward by a line N ONE o FEA HUD HES lt n Sa oe O lt Q Z lt z A 0 O gt Wo 0 L O x O m I LL l im Tp H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 33 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 10 displayed Description of setting CC Link No Item Computer link Bus connection Direct CPU connection P l connection connection G4 FF When the host station is selected 0 When the master 2 Station No FF station is selected 1 to 64 When a local station is selected 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when 3 CPU No the system is connected to another CPU ON O OFF Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters 5 Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format switching screen Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a di
111. not push OK button i X button is touched without touching if you close the screen the changed button the dialogue box shown on value will be canceled the left is displayed button The changed value is canceled and the screen OK is closed button The display setting screen is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 11 4 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Z O TET Z _ x D Setting item is changed if setting item is Te el touched ON OFF Z Opening screen time Sec j l P z e ti Min O N l E ee B Setting contents are defined if button Screen save backlight is touched Battery alarm display iyo gt Brightness contrast OK Su Szo i Szy i X button is touched without touching With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed button the dialogue mentioned left value will be canceled is displayed gt z OK lt Oy button The change contents are See H canceled and the screen Hn is closed Cancel button The display setting screen y is displayed a maa TE ao If close the display setting and GOT setup 226 screens after completing the setting of all ook items to change with X button GOT eae restarts and reflects the setting c
112. of the Property display 13 12 file Q Zhu Data check Data check of files is possible 13 13 0 T Ooh Point f Notes on installing OS If the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS is installed such data on the GOT as the 09 project data will be deleted a 3 z a i p22 fall After installing the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS reinstall download z 7 U necessary data lt 2 SE Oss OXN See Se NaN eee es AND BATTERY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 2 OS Information 13 6 13 2 1 Function of OS information 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen Main menu L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display S Communication setting il Time setting amp display Program data ggontro Program data control 13 7 13 2 OS Information Program data control OS information OS information Select drive A Built in CF card Co Flash Memory Select a drive and operate BootOS and D nternal SRAM OS Tiles 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen 13 2 3 Display example of OS information Z O OS information screen OS information screen Storage file folder display screen z Program OS information x T belect drive Z RoodNane 4 Size Date Time A Built in CF card 02 22 06 12 50 gt e e 15 15 i Co Flash Memory 6 lt Ow D nternal SRAM Zo Suir OEB OZN N in
113. operator Security authentication Enables notifying the login operator name 2 96A Supporting the GOT operator management information conversion tool Enables reading or writing a device when the 32K block unit Device setting 2 91V Standard monitor OS 04 03 is splitted Enables setting the multi channel Ethernet connection 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Enables setting multiple drivers for external devices Communication settings including a bar code reader One driver can be set for one 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 type of external device Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 36 B Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Standard monitor OS 04 02 2 90U Extended function OS Video RGB 04 02 Standard monitor OS 04 02 2 90U Extended function OS Multimedia 04 02 Enables using up to two channels when the GT16M R2 is RGB displa re used for the RGB input unit Function to display or record video images taken by a video camera connected to the multimedia unit and to play video files stored in a CF card Enables sending video files to the personal computer by using the Ethernet interface of the multimedia unit Multimedia function Enables recording a video image for approximately 1500 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 Extended function OS Multimedia
114. operator authentication Security 2 91V Supporting the fingerprint authentication for the operator authentication oo Fingerprint Authentication 04 03 Extended function OS Enables notifying the login operator name oo x Tr Operator authentication 04 04 Supporting the GOT operator x management information conversion tool In clock management both adjust and GOT Setup 2 pu Standard monitor OS 02 02 O broadcast can be set Continued to next page App 39 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Item GOT Setup Clock Setting Startup Logo Handy GOT Setting Dialog window Operation log Comment Part i Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Data save device of MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor data can be set at GT 2 18U x x lt Designer2 Automatic program read at the start of ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA x Priority Level Comment can be set MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Time setting for call key ON until the start up of utility can be set for 1 point i 02 x pressing Alarm can be set to be displayed in system language switching or battery i 04 O ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM drops Enables the backup restore setting eol xx x lt Enables the setting for monitoring local devices 2 58L x x Enables setting the drive for collectively x reading comment data Enables
115. read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method 2 During quick test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform Su significant operation for the system ZZO False output or malfunction can cause an accident Stir OZD The quick test operation procedure for monitor devices is described below The Entry Monitor screen is taken as an example to describe quick test operation when the system monitor function is executed The operation procedure is the same even if the batch monitor TC monitor or BM monitor is selected Example of quick test operation when the entry monitor is selected aan Au DEVICE MONITOR Agy 0 Euo Op oe OXN Q Z lt x z 7 A gt wA TO 1 OK x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O This indicates that Quick test operation is valid DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF Quick test of bit devices Quick test of word devices 1 To quick test of bit devices 2 To quick test of word devices INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 21 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices 1 Quick test of bit devices Operation example Change the status of bit device X001 from off O to on DEVICE MON TOR Netho OST FFICPUNo 0 Touch the bit device you want to switch its status to on or off NetNe O ST The device name and numb
116. refer to the user s manual of the GOT to L gt GT Designer2 Version O be used Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Functions When no keyword When a keyword is is registered in the registered in the connected FX PLC connected FX PLC Enter the keyword K gt Subsection 14 4 15 Keywords The MELSEC FX list editor is started End 14 92 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 4 Display Point f 1 How to display the utility gt For how to display the utility refer to the following lt a Section 9 3 Utility Display UTILITY FUNCTION 2 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The MELSEC FX list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 93 14 4 4 Display Change screens This section describes how to change the screen Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen OO JI DM O1F Who Error message Detail Step 1 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 Parameter setting Keyword setup x List Monitor Memory capacity Parameter File reg capacity 0 block setting Latch range M 500 M1
117. screen is closed button The utility call key setting screen is displayed 6 After finishing all the settings for items to be changed on the operation screen closing Operation and GOT setup screens with button restarts GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 17 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation Z O O Z 5 LL gt H D Z O r Ow Z Sree e H O5w OZO o ZZ TOn gt Zaz spas HANI OON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 18 Point 7 Setting another key position when there are two Make the setting after changing either one of the key positions from DO to Three of cannot be set at the same time Example When changing the two positions from the upper left and upper right corners to the upper left and lower left corners gt Change the upper right to Change the lower left to 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY The clock display setting items and the time when displayed the setting screen are displayed The voltage status of the built in battery is also displayed 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time sett
118. sequence gt 09K Option OS MELSEC A program saved from ACPU with list mode l List editor for MELSEC A 01 02 x O Function to display edit the sequence Option OS program read out from the FXCPU in the 2 18U List editor for MELSEC FX O 02 02 Extended function OS List editor for Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2 2 1D List editor for MELSEC FX O MELSEC FX list mode 02 04 Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Extended function OS List editor for MELSEC FX 02 04 Traditional German and Korean 2 97D GT11 supports display of Chinese l Simplified Traditional and Korean Continued to next page App 49 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Item Q motion monitor function Servo amplifier monitor function CNC monitor function Backup restore function CNC data I O function SFC monitor function Ladder editor Multi channel function Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series oe Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Q zZ Function to execute servo monitor and lt Option OS 5 parameter setting for motion controller 2 18U x 2 Z Q motion monitor 02 02 tO CPU Q series ZE H Parameter setting is enabled for Zo 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x 19 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU r Option OS Supporting connectio
119. sequence programs are easy to maintain You can check or partly correct change or add FX PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT Example of changing sequence program commands Changed LD X000 LD X000 OUT Y020 OUT Y030 LD X001 LD X001 5 5 Errors that occur during list editing can be checked easily Error messages error codes and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing Error message Detail Step 1 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 87 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Commands and devices can be searched and displayed Commands and devices used in sequence programs can be searched The correction position can be searched for cases such as when you want to correct a specific device Searched device M800 Search device M Displays the searched device LD M 800 OUT T 105 K 100 LD X 002 14 88 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 1 Specifications System configuration
120. starting with C b When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered Protection level is selected by Registration options 2 Applicability of monitoring for each keyword protection level The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows When keyword and 2nd keyword are When only keyword is registered y y registered Keyword I Read unregistered Setting items Erroneous Read rotection incorrect Write p Pe write All Protect Write cancelled een write ne Sere Protect prohibition j prohibition prohibition Pets s Device monitoring T C setting values and file register Device from D1000 change Other than the above When the T C set values are specified indirectly changing devices is available 3 Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition When All Protect is selected both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When All operation prohibition is selected device display and input are possible although operations by the programming tool are all prohibited When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for registration and the keyword input is completed the Customer Keyword registration screen is the displayed When the customer keyword is input and the key is touched registration is completed To set the customer keyword 8 digits from O to 9 or A to F must be used Keyword Please input Customer keyword
121. the GOT T 30 Section 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card Siz gt W e 13 7 2 Operating the GOT data package acquisition function Q ZZ LON zz ans Main menu Program data control SSH HZA ym one O eat D D Touch the GOT data Touch w ee J package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for Installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button eS eae es AND BATTERY x i O select Drive m Ao Euilt in CF card 2 W dp H O Copy zZ O H O 2 gt z aZ OQ INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 34 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GUT s Us project data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button elect Drive Oe 2 Ou a Ce card No Setting items Description Displays the drive to which the user can copy the OS and data 1 Drive selection A Standard CF Card will not appear if a CF card is not inserted 13 35 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisi
122. the cursor to the line on which the operand or set value is to be changed When starting to change an operand or a set value place the cursor on the line of the operand or set value to be changed the line on which the step number is not displayed aan If you place the cursor on the command line the input operation is not possible zz ame OW Command line Cannot SOD operate on this line Operand set value line Place the cursor on this line N ONE o FEA uio DEO Example ook OH Changing MOV DO D10 to MOV DO D123 Stop the FX PLC o l a T lt READ gt mA 0 LO moc 14 O Set the r lt WRITE gt WRITE O L mode 7 D O Move the cursor to the changed O location with a or DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 105 14 4 10 Changing operands set values 14 4 11 Deleting commands Deletes one command at a time from a sequence program Operation C D DELETE mode Point 7 When moving the cursor to the position where the command is to be deleted Place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot delete the command if the cursor is placed on the line of an operand or set value Command line Place the cursor on this line Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line Example Deleting OUT T10 K100 t Stop the FX PLC Set the lt
123. the following OZO 3 Subsection 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions Q b The expression a means touching keys from to in y H order nee Example of description Bo The example of description shown below indicates that must be touched first second 0 third and finally P 25 Faa 0 PLR Deo ep OSH Q Z lt x x Q gt LU mle L O 14 lt T I O 7 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 59 14 3 6 Operation methods 14 3 7 Display format of the display area The following describes the position and content of each data field in the MELSEC A list editor display area Current mode display Valid key display Step number device name and number Program list etc The 4th line displays data program name device name etc entered by the user 1 Mode and valid key display The following describes the mode and valid key display The mode display shows the MELSEC A list editor mode selected by the user The valid key display shows which of the two functions assigned to each key is currently available the function indicated at the upper part of the key or the function indicated at the lower part of the key Current mode display Display Mode Roe Read mode MN pteceeneegutaed Write mode EE Insert mode E EE A Delete mode P Parameter mode O Serre Other mo
124. the personal computer and data opened with GT Designer2 Enables copying of only characters in lamp display touch switch and comment y G Copy ON OFF display Copy OFF gt ON Enables copying of only comment No in bit lamp touch switch and comment O display bit Enables editing of the settings for advanced alarm observation advanced user alarm alarm history advanced O recipe function and recipe function in the Import Export CSV file format and other format Items that can be imported or exported with the advanced alarm observation and alarm history are added Device No comment No detail No and others Print Enables Enables printing of header and footer Enables printing of header and footer header and footer 2 2480 O Enables duplicating and consecutive Edit 2 90U O copying of figures and objects Enables changing of the settings for the Data View 2 18U O respective objects in grouped objects Enables global replacement of channel Batch Edit 2 18U x No Enables checking for security level Screen Preview switching and language switching in 2 18U O image after switching Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 34 Q ae Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Enables switching screens in the Screen Screen preview 2 96A O Preview window Wizard for s
125. the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation Main menu oo GOT setup Operation settings lt L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display gt h GOT setup ain Menu ommunicat i ing setu ime setting display Cora ebu self cha Touc i ion sett S Touch buttons to set for the utility call key 11 16 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation GOT setupi Menu call kev With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed Value will be canceled OK 1 Touch or displayed on the four corners of the setting screen The button repeats O __levery time it is pressed Change the part to be set as a key position to le 2 When the key position is specified by one point the time to switch to the utility when the key position is kept pressing can be set Touch the time area The keyboard is displayed if the input area is touched Input a setting time from the keyboard 4 Setting contents are defined by touching button i X button is touched without touching button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed button The changed value is canceled and the
126. transfer 03 09 write in the other device when the trigger 2 73B condition is satisfied Standard monitor OS 02 04 Option OS Recipe 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Option OS Recipe 02 04 Number of devices settable for one recipe in GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 8192 devices 2 27D Function to save recipe data of GT11 in CSV file format 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Option OS O Recipe 02 04 Function to save recipe data to the A drive standard CF card for GT11 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 44 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM o m O m Z m Q o lt oe Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Standard monitor OS 01 02 The extended function of the existing 2 09K Option OS X recipe function Advanced recipe 01 02 Sn E The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 x lt external control Advanced Recipe Standard monitor OS 03 03 2 58L Option OS x lt Advanced Recipe 03 03 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Report function Function to print the colleted data 2 27D Extended function OS x lt Report 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Compatible with the printer output 2 27D Extended func
127. window screen 2 Se 4 The setting key window screen appears O9 HEN m eea Display example set value operation screen of T timer and oS C counter 25 _ sf atv smn 85 For further infomation about each setting key window see the DS ee ee E LA following Ena hha CS Subsection 14 2 27 Information and set items a Fnter Del A displayed on each setting key window screen For further information about the test operation procedure see the following lt Subsection 14 2 28 Test operation procedure INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 43 14 2 24 Test operation 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions 1 Test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 BM VALIB BM VAL32 The table shown below describes the key functions Key Function Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor MENU function L gt Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX or comment no ORM comment display p Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display ET Switches the screen to the Device entry screen ep SET RST Displays the screen for bit device on off operation
128. with the GOT the PLC of with clamps refer to Section 5 3 3 MELSEC Q series MELSEC QnA series and GT1155 QTBDA Other bus connection cables modified as shown in MELSEC A series GT1155 QSBDA EX 4 GT1150 QLBDA Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the specified position and insert the braided wire for grounding into the ferrite core EX 2 Programmable l controller GOT units 360mm or less 360mm or less 14 17inch 1 57inch 1 57inch 14 17inch EX 3 Ferrite Core a ZCAT 3035 1330 N Programmable controller GA a ee eee GOT units GOT units 60mm or less Sila opp Nie 60mm or less Bae cae 280 11 0 inch che Bhs 2 36inch a 2 36inch 360mm or less 40mm 40mm 360mm or less 14 17inch 1 57inch 1 57inch 14 17inch 5 8 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 5 3 1 About the cable used EX 4 Ferrite Core ZCAT3035 1330 Programmable contoller GOT units Cable shield material 80mm 3 15inch Grounding braided wire 3 15inch 40mm or less 200mm 7 87 inch 40mm or less Grounding braided wire 1 57inch 50mm 1 97 inch 1 57inch 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 5 3 1 About the cable use
129. withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth 10MQ or larger as measured with the 500 VDC insulation resistance tester across Insulation resistance power supply terminals and earth Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mmZ Applicable solderless i na Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A ermina Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8 Nem screw P a fs 3 Remark Operation at momentary power failure The GOT continues to operate even when the instantaneous power failure occures within the permissible instantaneous power failure time The GOT stops operating if there is extended power failure or voltage drop while it automatically resumes operation as soon as the power is restored 3 4 Power Supply Specifications 4 PART NAME Lu gt 4 1 Front Panel GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT 1000 6 x s a 1 2 E m os 09 Z O lt 5 O Lu D A Lu lt x Z H No Specifications m ou 1 Display screen Displays the utility screen and the user creation screen 2 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility screen and the user creation screen l USB interface for connecting a personal computer gt 3 USB interface l l l OS installation project data download transparent z o USB environmental l l 4 Opens Closes when the UBS interface is used protection cover m Lit in gr
130. 0 11 FX List Monitor Operator Information Management Log in Log out Operator Authentication Password Change Operator Authentication and Backup MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Restore are added to Switch Action of 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 the special function switch The name Password is changed to Password Security Level in Switch Touch switch Action of the special function switch CNC Data Input Output is added to Switch Action of the special function 2 63R Standard monitor OS 03 07 O switch SFC Monitor is added to Switch Action 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 X lt O of the special function switch Ladder Editor and Operator Management are added to Switch 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 x x lt Action of the special function switch Setting to display input value when entering the value at input target object 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x lt position is possible Format String setting is possible 2 OO 2AN Standard monitor OS 03 01 Standard monitor OS 03 01 O Numerical Display oo When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Numerical input 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Enables setting the TrueType Numerical 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O for the font Enables setting the asterisk Enables setting the asterisk display 2 29A Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 04 04 04
131. 023 C 100 C 199 16bit S 500 999 C 220 C 255 32bit D 200 D 511 RUN terminal input Keyword The keyword of MELSEC FX is operated setup co Regist Delete Clear Protect 50 100 500 M 500 010 020 030 010 oo 1 e wn vo E 1 With setting special function switches FX list monitor the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen List Monitor 0 2 L 3 4 L 5 6 F 8 9 When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen the list editor cannot be used For how to set special function switches refer to the following manual C gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions 14 94 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 4 Display 14 4 5 Operation procedures Z O ase This section describes the contents of the MELSEC FX list editor and the key functions displayed on the 2 screen T gt D Key arrangement and a list of key functions The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC FX List Editor window are 6 described below Sul 50 sez Displayed contents SEE OZN lt Read gt 1 2 Sz x eg H Y ir A jp Ml VA u QON D J D 10 2 SLD M 10 Zea SOUT T 10 UEA K 100 lt 3 l2 LD A Oe 09K Is UR Ueu sears 14 AND M 100 ee 3 4 S lt x z a A wA J0 Displays a mode for MELSEC FX list editor lt gt Subsection 14 4 6 Select
132. 03 GT11 2 58L BootOS 03 03 P o m O m Z m Q o lt External I O device connection GT11 GT Soft Standard monitor OS 03 03 Communication driver GOT1000 Serial Bus Q 03 03 p lt x x Bus A QnA 03 03 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU gt 09K Communication driver Q173HCPU Bus Q 01 02 Bus connection x Communication driver Priority order of data load can be set 2 43V x Bus connection Q 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R x Supporting connection toQ17nDCPU connection to Supporting connection toQ17nDCPU Bus connection Q 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 connection to Supporting connection to CNC C70 C70 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 22 GT Soft Item GOT1000 Communication driver 2 73B Bus connection Q 03 09 Communication driver 2 77F Bus connection Q 03 12 Communication driver Bus connection Q 03 13 Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU Bus connection QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Communication driver Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Bus connection Q 04 03 Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A Bus connection Q 04 04 x Support
133. 03 12 Jo o O Continued to next page ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM o m O m Z m Q o lt Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 42 Item Advanced alarm popup display User alarm Alarm history Scrolling alarm display Advanced Alarm Parts Display Parts Movement Parts Display Parts Movement Panelmeter Level a Version of GT Description Version of OS Designer2 GT GT Soft 15 GOT1000 Enables setting whether to enable or z SAO 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 disable the display position switching Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 8192 alarms When Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 3072 alarms Function to save alarm history data to the A drive standard CF card for GT11 Function to display the cursor by touching an alarm and function to output the corresponding comment No to a device The comment The comment group application The comment group application The scrolling alarm display applicable Function for detecting alarm even at the fall of bit device with Advanced User Alarm Function to display a cursor by touching an alarm and to output the corresponding comment No to a device The binary format file outp
134. 04 04 minutes 200 video files Enables fast forwarding and playing videos in slow motion Supported Enables recording or playing video files with sound soon All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or Object function 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 earlier are available Batch Self Check USB Device Display and Multimedia are added to Switch Action of the special function switch 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 The go to screen switch is applicable to the overlap windows Touch switch 3 4 and 5 Ladder Editor and Operator Management are added to 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 Switch Action of the special function switch Numerical Display a Enables setting the asterisk display 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 Numerical input ASCII Display ASCII ear Enables setting the asterisk display 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 npu a Enables displaying logging data at the specified time on a Historical Trend Graph tand y 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 rend graph Supporting the dedicated protocol ICU 60S and ICU RFID function 215 Mifare manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp Extended function OS RFID 04 03 2 91V The file operation functions file_copy file_xcopy are Project Script dded 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 added Supporting the overlap windows 3 4 and 5 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Screen Script The file operation fun
135. 07 In searching multiple file programs the backward search display is possible Option OS With MELSEC QnA ladder monitor the 2 73B Ladder monitor for MELSEC lt currently displayed program automatically Q QnA 03 09 reflect the set value of TC changed in the test function Option OS Ea Supporting connection to CC Link IE Ladder monitoring 2 77F Ladder monitor for MELSEC x controller network function Q QnA 03 12 Supporting the safety function block Option OS display when using the QS001CPU Only o ae 2 82L Ladder monitor for MELSEC x the FB definition name is displayed in the Se ase 4 Q QnA 03 13 application instruction format Option OS The ranges of M and B devices that can 2 82L Ladder monitor for MELSEC x lt be monitored are expanded Q QnA 03 13 Function to monitor and change the data Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU L Option OS of intelligent function module buffer 2 18U Intelligent module monitor 02 02 memory using a dedicated screen Supporting connection to CC Link IE Option OS Intelligent module 2 17F x x lt controller network Intelligent module monitor 03 12 monitor function When using the QS001CPU the PC information monitor screen Operation Option OS Intelligent module monitor 03 13 2 82L details screen Error details screen is displayed List editor for Function for displaying editing
136. 2 When touching menu call key If you touch the menu call key while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or drawing software At factory shipment the GOT is set to Simultaneous 2 point presses on GOT screen upper right and upper left corners Menu call key Simultaneous 2 point touch Horizonal format Vertical format faye The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited S Communication setting rr GOT setup ey Time setting amp display o Program data control Debug amp self check Language 3 When touching special function switch utility If you touch the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed the main menu Is displayed The special function switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created screen by drawing software 3 i Communication setting Special function switch Utility Language For the details of the special function switch refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions 9 6 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu Lo Remark Lock the utility display by password en When a password is set on the GOT using drawing software a password dialog box is displayed when trying to access the main menu of
137. 2 100 mm 3 93 or more My In the absence of radiated noise or 20 mm 0 79 20mm 0 79 20mm 0 79 ar more 20 mm 0 79 6 heat generating equipment nearby or more or more or more or more 1 Vertical Format 50 mm 1 97 or more 2 Vertical Format 80 mm 3 14 or more Z O x x ke N Z E 2 x Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch 6 i O 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 4 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar fixture set the GOT display section as shown below Horizontal installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT display section Control panel etc e The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C Vertical installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 50 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT display section Control panel etc e The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C 6 5 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 5 Installation Procedure
138. 40 Contracted tube color Red Contracted tube color Green Ty 60 L Ferrite core Approx 32 x 16 Ferrite core Approx 035 x 40 Contracted tube color Green Contracted tube color Green BD acco 32 1 25 L 60 20 0 78 11 5 0 45 T ee Tesi Motion controller Ferrite core Approx 35 x 40 CPU side Contracted tube color Green 33 1 29 L 49 1 92 49 1 92 Ferrite core Approx 035 x 40 Contracted tube color Green Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 8 L PLC side i Ferrite core Approx 35 x 40 A7GT CNB side Contracted tube color Green 11 5 0 45 a basal oO 3 1 29 L FG wire l L Cable Approx 9 0 Ferrite core Approx 35 x 40 Contracted tube color Blue App 9 Appendix 1 External Dimensions apis 109 500 19 68 PLC side GOT side Cable Approx o 9 0 1000 39 37 32 1 25 11 5 0 45 AOJ2 PW side Cable Approx 8 0 Ferrite core Approx p35 x 40 GOT side Contracted tube color Green Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type Moreover there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
139. 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 amp Comment Group can be used 2 OO 2AN Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 03 01 01 Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 41Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 figure Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 DEREN Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o Figure created as a part can be used to a 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 touch switch Data change switch can be used 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Jo Comment Group can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Pp Adjust Text Size setting is possible 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o Auto repeat can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o The toutch switch on the ladder monitor 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 with device search function can be used PX Developer Function call is added to 2 472 Switch Action of the special function Standard monitor OS 03 02 switch Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 472 Standard monitor OS 03 02 figure 11 XIO JO X OJ O ogee x ee Oe Continued to next page App 41 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series i Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT100
140. 5 ABUS 2 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE 2 18U For communication drivers used in each connection use 02 02 or GT15 J71GP23 SX 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Standard monitor OS 04 03 Communication driver Multidrop Host 04 04 Multidrop Slave 04 04 Extended function OS Video RGB 04 02 Extended function OS Multimedia 04 02 Standard monitor OS 03 01 BootOS 03 01 M GT01 RS4 M 2 96A o m O O Z m Q o lt GT16M V4 GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 GT16M ROUT 2 90U GT16M MMR 2 90U GT15 CFCD 2 43V GT15 CFEX CO8SET 2 45X Standard monitor OS 03 02 Extended function OS Sound Output 03 03 Extended function OS GT15 SOUT 2 58L GT15 DIO 2 58L External I O Operation Panel 03 03 Extended function OS GT15 DIOR 2 90U External I O Operation Panel 04 02 Extended function OS Operator authentication 04 03 Fingerprint Authentication 04 03 GT15 80FPA 2 91V e Added connection types 1 For GT16 ee Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver 2 90U Bus Q 04 02 Bus A QnA 04 02 Supporting connection to BUS Bus connection Supporting connection to QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU QO01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20QUDEHCPU Communication driver Bus Q 04 03 2 91V Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GO
141. 5 will support the GOT multidrop connection soon o m O m Z m Q o lt Oo O JO x Key codes used for the Kana kanji conversion enhanced version are 2 90U added The key code for the historical trend graph Display position time specification jump 2 96A is added Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 46 Other functions added 1 For GT16 Item Other function Q motion monitor function abs Version of GT Description Version of OS Designer2 All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 earlier are available Option OS Supporting Q170MCPU 2 96A Q motion monitor 04 04 Enables setting the E drive for the storage location for the gt 90U Extended function OS backup data or backup setting l Backup Restore 04 02 Backup restore function l Extended function OS Supporting Q170MCPU 2 96A Backup Restore 04 04 Enables specifying the E drive for the target to input or gt 90U Extended function OS output the CNC data CNC Data I O 04 02 CNC data I O function Ladder editor l l Extended function OS Cycle monitor data can be input and output 2 96A CNC Data I O 04 04 Extended function OS GOT Platform Library 04 04 Function to edit the sequence program stored in the JOBA Option OS controller by using the GOT Ladder editor 04 04 GOT Function Expansi
142. ANDARD MONITOR OS 2 When connected to the local station Device ya number The control depends on whether there is an error at the Link card error Normal i i M9211 hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit for local station Error a l is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit Online o l The control depends on whether the local station itself is Offline station to M9240 Link status online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self station test or self loopback mode Check the mode switch loopback test Not executed Forward loop test eA The control depends on whether the local station itself is M9257 Loop test status and reverse loop executing the forward loop test or the reverse loop test test are being executed lf an error code not listed in the previous page is displayed contact the nearest of our system service centers agents and branch offices 14 86 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor The MELSEC FX list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the FX PLC This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing list editor for MELSEC FX an Option OS from drawing software into the GOT you can edit the FX PLC program The features of the MELSEC FX list editor are described below Parameters and
143. ATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 5 When the GOT is connected to a remote I O station of MELSECNET H system O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller CC Link Name Description es Diea Coli Suet Mink GOT multidrop Reference connection connection connection Ent Monitoring present values by a entering devices to be monitored Subsection 14 2 10 monitor in advance Monitoring th t val f Batch monitor a Aa a i Subsection 14 2 14 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set TC monitor value contact point and coil of m Subsection 14 2 17 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x devi i ified buff BM monitor E ara Subsection 14 2 21 of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the present value of Data word devices and buffer memory change by test Changing the present value of TC Subsection 14 2 24 operation possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Ch d b Quick test angna H ean Subsection 14 2 8 performing a quick test Displaying device comments Display switching Di playing word devige and Duler Subsection 14 2 7 me
144. ATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Section 4 1 Appendix 4 Additions Section 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 6 1 6 5 7 1 8 1 2 8 3 10 1 3 11 2 1 13 1 3 16 4 18 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 First edition Partial correcting ABOUT MANUALS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Chapter 1 Section 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 2 Chapter 6 7 Section 8 1 8 4 8 5 9 2 9 3 Chapter 10 11 12 13 Section 14 1 14 3 16 2 16 3 17 4 Chapter 18 Appendix2 Appendix 4 Additions Section 13 6 16 4 Partial correcting ABOUT MANUALS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Section 2 2 7 1 9 2 9 3 10 1 Chapter 11 Section 13 1 Chapter 14 Section 16 3 16 4 Appendix1 Appendix2 Appendix 4 Additions Section 7 2 13 7 14 8 14 9 Partial revisions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Appendix 4 Additions Section 2 2 Chapter 3 Section 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 6 1 6 5 7 1 8 1 8 3 8 4 10 1 11 2 1 13 1 14 7 16 4 Appendix 1 Nov 2007 JY997D17501 Jan 2008 JY997D17501 Partial revisions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Section 8 3 14 9 Appendix 4 Additions Chapter 2 Section 3 3 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 6 1 7 1 10 1 gt O The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Ver Revision Oct 2008 JY997D17501 G ABBREVIATIONS AND
145. C Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Half intermittent 9 to 150Hz 10 times each in X Y and Z Under StosHz 175mm directions continuous vibration 9 to 150Hz 4 9m s Compliant with JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Compliant with JIS Vibrationresistance B3502 and IEC61131 2 vibration Shock resistance Must be free of lamp black corrosive gas flammable gas or excessive amount of Operating atmosphere electroconductive dust particles and must be no direct sunlight Same as for saving Operating altitude 2000 m 6562 ft max Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category ll or less Pollution degree 2 or less Cooling method Self cooling 41 STN liquid crystal type to be stored at or below 39 C WBT 2 Do not use or store the GOT under pressures higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction When the air inside the control panel is purged by pressurization the surface sheet may be lifted by high pressure As a result the touch panel may be difficult to press and the sheet may be peeled off 3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery
146. CF card GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment status Standard monitor OS Required for display and System Screen Data operation of the user created screen and utility screen System Screen Information Not installed in GOT at factory Standard shipment Flash memory monitor TrueType numerical font OS Install it from drawing software C G1SYS 12 dot Standard Font Gothic or the CF card At installation select Mincho or 16 dot Standard Font Mincho Gothic for the 16 dot standard font 16 dot Standard Font Gothic 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 16 2 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION J CLEANING OF icp On Z TO Ooz ZEO ooz La Boe Js g IOs Os 2E ZOV 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS For the installation using GOT the CF card storing BootOS or Standard monitor OS is required For the method of writing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the CF card the following two methods are available 1 To Memory Card from drawing software GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version LI Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or Standard monitor OS has been installed gt Chapter 13 FILE D
147. Control number Year example 2005 Month example Apr 1 to 9 Jan to Sep last digit X Oct Y Nov Z Dec Z H a b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL Ww MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ IN 24VDC 5 POWER MAX 00W L Qc O O LL O17 2 0 1 L Date e g 1st 1 to 31 1st to 31st Year e g 2007 The last two digits x of the Western calendar year Month zl e g February 1 to 9 Jan to Sept S X Oct Y Nov Z Dec 2 Battery procurement The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 8 4 Battery 8 9 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure 8 5 Protective Sheet The protective sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated 8 5 1 Applicable protective sheet The following protective sheets are applicable for GT1100 Product name Contents GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB Protective sheet GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Protective sheet for 5 7 Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets 8 5 2 Installing procedure If the protective sheet has been already attached to the GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lower right corner If the protective sheet for transportation is attached to the GOT remove it too D Peel the relea
148. D Details Procedures key input sequence SHIFT DELETE gt Step number gt p gt Delete a command from the Delete a command from the program program did 4 gt Ly Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt 1 gt Specify the Delete the specified range of Specify the range of the in the Delete mode deletion start step the program program for deletion Specify the deletion gt end step Delete the whole NOP inthe Display the program gt HELP gt 1 2 program in the Delete mode Delete the whole NOP 14 78 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 24 Operation in insert mode I 14 3 26 Operation in parameter mode P Zz O z Details Procedures key input sequence T Return the parameters to the Z Clearing all parameters PARAM_ gt 1 gt gt gt y gt a ieee initial setting status 1 ki Go END D Parameter setting Set the parameters for the gt gt 1 for AOJ2HCPU AQJ2HCPU PARAM 2 Select the latch range from 2 Setting of latch range No latch 4 2 latch and all 1 i p gt 2 2 latch v Sa 220 LL l Se
149. D MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 41 14 2 22 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 14 2 23 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation Display example when devices are already entered Netho E 0 LO Nol EM EM EM PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM BM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No EM EM EM If necessary perform Quick test operation If necessary switch the screen display Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test L gt Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the operation of monitor devices display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices As shown below set a unit and buffer memory VONo I Set the initial device number of the buffer memory in decimal Set the first two digits of the three digit initial I O signal of the module Test operation lt 3 Susection 14 2 24 Test operation 14 42 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 23 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation 14 2 24 Test operation Z O O Z T Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor functin such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or s counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manua
150. D MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 19 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Nr Changing the comment or comment capacity of the controller If you change a comment or comment capacity of the controller after the system monitor function is activated the comment may not be properly displayed on each monitor screen After a comment or comment capacity is changed turn off the GOT and turn it on again Pointy 2 Switching the display format DEC HEX The present value of word devices and the present value and set value of timers counters will be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers 3 Switching comment no comment display The comments written to the target controller will be displayed or not be displayed Priority of comment display Extension comment gt Comment 4 Comment No comment display a The BM monitor does not display comments b Comments will not be displayed when any of the CPUs listed below is monitored e FXCPU e QnACPU or Q series motion controller CPU whose date on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B c Comments will not be displayed when any of the devices listed below is monitored e Internal device of the GOT GB GD GS e Host device X Y WW WR when a CC Link is connected d Displaying the comments of QCPUs QO2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QO2UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU
151. DLEY PLC aoniedion Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to SLC500 series 2 58L Communication driver AB SLC 500 01 00 Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 200 Se 2 58L Communication driver series SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7 200 01 00 connection Standard monitor OS 01 10 Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 300 400 2 90U Communication driver series SIEMENS 7 300 400 01 05 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Inverter en Supporting connection to inverter 2 73B Communication driver connection FREQROL 500 700 01 00 Standard monitor OS 01 12 Servo amplifier i ae Supporting connection to MR J2S CL 2 96A Communication driver connection MELSERVO J3 J2S M 01 07 Bar code reader Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O connection O O O O O App 53 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Added GT Designer2 functions GT KEN Version of GT GT GT Item Description Version of OS 1050 Designer2 1030 1020 10401 Library Enables setting the background color of the Te workspace figures in the Library Editor screen l MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Project data matching is available between data D Project data lt stored in the personal computer and data 2 96A O Ds matching l l air opened with GT Designer2 sh Enables s
152. Dimensions External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD 164 6 46 22 120 4 73 eu 23 0 91 4 40UNC Inch screw type M2 6 Metric screw type 135 5 32 MITSUBISHI 53 2 09 Unit mm inch 152 5 99 App 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ and GT1150 QLBDQ 167 6 57 o 28 5 110 4 33 i 1 12 21 0 83 ZZ Fw GOT 1000 eb j lt M2 C Metric screw type 5 F slo Q Co a o o T U ae ips D ws S gt 4 40UNC Zo slo Inch screw type ripe ea 2 7 CO n ao S MITSUBISHI 110 4 33 o im O Q Z Qi A A lt x Panel board thickness to be 5 mm 0 2 or less Unit mm inch 152 5 99 Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 2 External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA and GT1150 QLBDA 167 6 57 28 5 110 4 33 1 12 21 0 83 JUUUUUUU 135 5 32 4 40UNC Inch screw type Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc C JUUUUUU 4 ME 1 12 Unit mm inch App 3 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of memory board Q 0 1 46 Unit mm inch 37 0 1 46 6 1 0 25 inch lt Oz a O ZO SSS SE old So Oo e Njo Sz U External dimensions of stand z GT05 50STAND OT 0 Ky For
153. Displays the total number of the displayed files Refer to the following for the details of displayed folders and files L gt Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 3 Project Information 13 3 3 Display example of project information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Zz O O 5 Display operation of project information Project information screen Touch a drive in Select drive and the data Program Data Praject Information in the first folder contained in the touched pelect drive drive is displayed 2 A Built in CF card 2 If touch a folder name the data contained Sw in the touched folder is displayed Siz C Flash Memory aan a al SPAN ED If touch the folder with name the data zi a in the one higher hierarchy folder is displayed Q Touching the A button in the scrollbar 8 gt O scrolls up or down by 1 line 453z Oi Touching the 4 button scrolls up or Doi down by 1 screen Project information screen Storage file folder display screen G If touch a file name the file is selected and D Frogram Data Froject information a highl S4 the file name is highlighted E a size Date Time ORO Refer to the following for operation of Share delete copy property data check 5 download upload Delete n this section File COPY oo ccceceeeeen lt gt this section B Up load Property oa 3 this section EA Del Copy Property Data check Data check oo lt this secti
154. ED cccccccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaeeees 8 11 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection COVED cccccccceccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseesseueeseeeseueseueeseeeseeeees 8 11 0 0 2 Mstan Proceduro suar e ot neal eset ei ae ene a 8 11 FS SLAM NC EE E Se hate cin EAEE E vate pst emt Gane oan eG 8 12 G1 e PDDUCADIC Stan siana aaa e E a E a a 8 12 8 7 2 Installing procedure aanraai aa eE aan 8 12 6 9 Frotective COVER Tor Ollan A a RE 8 13 8 8 1 Applicable protective cover for Oll siirsi tiirsa aana aaant esses 8 13 8 02 IMStallla OM PFOCC GUC arnai a a a a i 8 13 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit ce cccseeceeeteeeseeeseeteeeseeeeeseeeteeeeseeeseteeeeas 8 15 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection UNIt ccccceccsseecseeeeeeeeseceaceceecasecaeeeseeecuecauesageecseesaeesesseueeseeenes 8 15 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop CONNECTION UNIt ec cceccceecceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeseeesaeeseueeseeesaes 8 16 2 Pw Ps PANAN re ee re re eve ere rer Me eo COE ene te een een eee ener Ter 8 16 20 AIMS Te AU OM siena a teed ee eh teed sae cent memset a odie chien vtec na ancaeeiw ie 8 17 A 10 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive cccccceccceececeeeeeeeeeeeee sees esse eeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeees 8 17 8 10 Connector Conversion Adapter ccccceccseeceeceeeeeeeteeeteeeeeteeeteeeseeeeeeteeseeeeaaeeees 8 18 8 10 1 Applicable connector conversion adapter
155. EEPROM is on The specified step number exceeded the Step number is out of a range Specify a step number below the maximum value maximum number Set other than EPROM for the memory to write to Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM The specified command cannot be Not found Proceed to the next operation found Not found The specified device cannot be found Proceed to the next operation Check the program memory space and delete commands Step cverfiow The program may exceed the available to keep it within the space space Writing is not executed L 3 Subsection 14 4 11 Deleting commands An invalid command non existent Command error i Input the correct command command was specified Point 7 How to erase an error message An error message is not erased even if the cause of the error is eliminated To erase an error message touch a key on the MELSEC FX list editor screen 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 117 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 5 Self Check 14 5 1 Self check function Carries out self check for the GOT hardware or memory etc The items that can be self checked are as follows tem Ref
156. ELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 16 List monitor 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input If an incorrect key is input cancel the input contents Operation 1 Before touching the key before reading writing the input contents Before touching the key touch the key 2 After touching the key after reading writing the input contents Write the command again gt Subsection 14 4 9 Writing commands Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised overwritten with the program writing 14 4 18 Error messages and corrective actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the MELSEC FX list editor is executed and corrective action Error Messeage Description Corrective action valiinetelspiay Wile Check the protected operation protected g j j iari ae Clear the keyword protection or delete the keyword Can not operate while or incorrect write protect keyword is set protected 3 Subsection 14 4 15 Keywords PLC parameter error An FX PLC parameter is defective Set correct parameters in the FX PLC Check the FX PLC cable and GOT for abnormality ee The communication with the FX PLC is PLC communications error defective Check whether the communication settings are correct or not A writing operation etc has been made PLC is running Stop the FX PLC while the FX PLC is running The memory to write to is EPROM Can not write The protect switch of the
157. GT11 SYSTEM AO OVERVIEW Z H lt a gt S LL Z O SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Battery Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Battery GT11 50BAT For storing clock data alarm history and recipe data 4 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit Bus extension connector box sold separately Product name Contents Bus extension Used for QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series bus A9GT QCNB l connector box connection when the cable is longer than 13 2 m Bus connector adapter box sold separately Product name Contents OEE Used for QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series bus connection u A7GT CNB when the cable is longer than 13 2 m For changing a large connector adapter box to a small connector Protective sheet Sold separately Product name Contents GT11 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT11 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet GT11 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT11 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets USB environmental protection cover Sold separately Product name Model name Contents USB environmental Replacement environmental protection cover for USB interface on GT11 50UCOV a protection cover the GOT main unit front side For complying IP67 5 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit Protective cover for oil Sold separately Product name Model na
158. GT15 DIOR 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 C08CF set GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75ABUS2L mw Option Abbreviations and generic terms Memory card Memory card adaptor Option function board Battery Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil USB environmental protection cover Stand Attachment Backlight Multi color display board Connector conversion box Emergency stop sw guard cover Memory loader Memory board GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 256MC Description GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC GT05 MEM ADPC GT16 MESB GT15 QFNB32M GT15 BAT For GT16 For GT15 For GT11 For GT 10 GT05 90PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 UCOV GT15 90STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 60ATT 87 GT16 90XLTT GT16 70SLTT GT15 70SLTT 60VLTN GT15 XHNB GT11H CNB 37S GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M GT11 50FNB GT11 50BAT GT16 90PSCB GT16 80PSCB GT16 70PSCB GT16 60PSCB GT15 90PSCB GT15 80PSCB GT15 70PSCB GT15 60PSCB GT15 50PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 40PSCB GT10 30PSCB GT10 20PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 80PSGB GT16 70PSGB GT16 60PSGB GT15 90PSGB GT15 80PSGB GT15 70PSGB GT15 60PSGB GT15 50PSGB GT11 50PSGB GT10 50PSGB GT10 40PSGB GT10 30PSGB GT10 20PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 80PSCW GT16 70PSCW GT16 60PSCW GT15 90PSCW GT15 80PSCW GT15 70PSCW GT15 60PSCW GT15
159. HITACHI PLC cable GT09 C200R41301 9S GT09 C300R41301 9S RS 232 For connecting Connector Conversion Box to HITACHI GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m a cable communication module Connection cables for FUJI FA PLCs Sold separately Product at Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41001 9S pom RS 422 GT09 C100R41001 9S For connecting Connector Conversion Box to FUJI FA RS cable GT09 C200R41001 9S 232C interface card RS 232C 485 interface capsule GT09 C300R41001 95 general purpose interface module RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m cable Connection cables for MATSUSHITA PLCs Sold separately Product Rate Model name Cable length Description name For connecting GOT to MATSUSHITA RS422 232C GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m l conversion adapter For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of GT09 C30R20902 9P 3m er l RS 232 MATSUSHITA PLC computer communication unit cable For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA GT09 C30R20903 9P 3m PLC For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA GT09 C30R20904 3C 3m PLC 2 2 Component List 2 8 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 LU 09 gt ep AO OVERVIEW Z e H lt a gt S LL Z O SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 9 Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40201 9P eS o o GT09 C100R40201 9P For conn
160. ICE MONITOR SET Ml aah MetNo O JST FFICPUNG 9 NetNo Olsi FF CPUNe 0 DEVICE MONITOR DEVICELME 1 wn AJ VAIL S aly ae BL FID WIR gt THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No AJZIVI TI C 4 gt E G Enter Del AC Enter the device name you want to delete in 1 Enter the device number you want to delete in 2 amp Touch the key 4 Touch the x key The window closes For further information about key window operation see lt gt Subsection 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure 14 30 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices 14 2 14 Batch monitor Z O The batch monitor is a function to specify the head device of any device range to perform monitoring z This section describes how to operate the batch monitor when the system monitor function is executed E 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 5 1 The information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen is described below 7 O Suu ZZO 1 Displays a network No zre 2 Displays a station No Set 3 Displays a CPU No Display example of bit devices BATCH MONITOR BATCH MONITOR os NetNo 0 ST FF CPUNe 0 LOn gt EO B F roduct A nee 0 Fr 3 d uct E OA ty D Product C zai D Resource i Re source B O Resource L D Cooling start 9 O Heating start Eya WEA No comments displayed Comments displayed Oe 4 Displays
161. INSERT Subsection 14 3 24 DELETE Switch the valid key with SHIFT Subsection 14 3 25 Subsection 14 3 9 Subsection 14 3 26 The key that specifies parameter or other mode Switch the upper and lower lines with SHIFT Subsection 14 3 27 2 Help key Subsection 14 3 18 Key that inputs K H at the input of command device name and constant input Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the s and SET keys 3 Command Device key Key that inputs the command device number and constant Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the Ka and SET keys Key that declares start of step number input or automatic scroll Switch key that makes the lower character valid on each key with dual functions Subsection 14 3 9 Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display Switch key that makes the upper character valid on each key with dual functions tion 14 3 SHIFT Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display SUDESNA JAAA When the Help function is used the screen returns to the display at the input of the HELP key In the Parameter mode the process is cancelled After restarting continue the operation CLEAR If the Clear key is pressed when the system is not in the Parameter mode Other mode or Help function the screen
162. ISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Point 7 Precautions on writing BootOS Standard monitor OS in CF card a When writing BootOS Standard monitor OS etc in the CF card be sure to execute by the utility of other GOT or drawing software The installation is not executed properly with the CF card to which uploaded from the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than drawing software Note the available capacity of the CF card The available capacity of BootOS and Standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of drawing software Communicate with Memory Card Memory car d write Boot OS write Core OS write GT11 Q 320 240 Capacity of data of OS to be transferred 16 3 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card There are the following two types for the BootOS Standard monitor OS installation using CF card UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on When the GOT is turned on all the OS and project data stored in the memory card are transferred to the GOT This installation method is valid for the following cases e When the utility of GOT cannot be displayed e When the standard monitor OS is not installed e To create a GOT with the same configuration as the copy source by using the GOT data package acquisition function COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SET
163. LBD2 GT1020 LBL 2 43V ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW 2 58L GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 2 58L GT1055 QSBD GT1050 QBBD 2 90U GT1045 QSBD GT1040 QBBD 2 90U o m O m Z m Q o lt Added connection types O Applicable x N A Applicable from the first version GT oe Version of GT GT GT Item Description Version of OS 105L Designer2 1030 1020 1040 Direct Standard monitor OS 01 10 connection to Supporting connection to FX3G series 2 90U Communication driver CPU MELSEC FX 01 06 Standard monitor OS 01 09 Computer link ee Supporting connection to A series PLC 2 82L Communication driver connection AJ71C24 UC24 01 04 CC Link Standard monitor OS 01 07 connection Via Supporting connection to CC Link Via G4 2 3B Communication driver G4 CC Link G4 01 00 Standard monitor OS 01 11 GOT multidrop Communication driver Supporting the GOT multidrop connection 2 96A connection Multidrop Host 01 11 Multidrop Slave 01 11 Standard monitor OS 01 02 Microcomputer Supporting the data formats of Format 1 and on 2 472 Communication driver connection Format 2 Computer 01 02 MODBUS meek Standard monitor OS 01 12 RTU connection Supporting MODBUS RTU connection MODBUS RTU 01 07 Standard monitor OS 01 02 OMRON PLC Sc Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2 47Z Communication
164. MI gasket on the paint surface Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below a Provide an earthing point near the GOT Earth the power supply s FG terminal FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 18inch or shorter The FG terminal function is to pass the noise generated in the GOT to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency Electrical shock prevention In order to such as the operators from electric shocks the control box must have the following functions a The control cabinet must be equipped with a lock so that only skilled or qualified personnel b The control cabinet must be fitted with advice which automatically stops the power supply when the cabinet is opened Dustproof and waterproof features The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollution level 2 or better Pollutio
165. Memory information Display of free memory space in GOT GOT data package acquisition Copies the OS and project data to the memory card Device monitor of PLC Test function Present value change of the buffer memory System monitor l l monitor and the buffer memory of intelligent module Debu g A List editor Sequence program and parameter change of ACPU FX list editor Sequence program and parameter change of FX PLC A drive memory check Standard CF card Memory check C drive memory check Built in flash memory xX O oO 5 Drawing check Missing bits color draw display and overlap display check of liquid crystal D Font check Installed fonts check o Self check D Touch panel z 4 Touch panel operation check 2 checking Connected target confirmation I O check Self loopback check j Displaying GOT errors CPU errors network errors System alarm display Resetting GOT errors GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours Display the screen to clean the display section 1 Perform the following with the drawing software e Installing the communication driver e Downloading the project data with communication settings channel number and communication driver assignment 2 Selectable languages vary depending on the standard fonts that are installed Clean 3 Itis necessary to set the security level with drawing software 4 Itis necessary to install the RS 232 connector
166. N STEP NO MON MOV CLEAR END HELP MENU A D2 oy Reading MOV D20 K2Y0018 z 13 D20 of the 13th step 13 _K2Y0018 a gt LL OW 0 LO O 5020 13 gt MOV 14 13 D20 Message when the MOV NOT FOUND command is not present after the 13th step U Now reading the command with the Help function command specification is completed x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 73 14 3 18 Using the help function 2 Displaying comment The following example shows the procedure of displaying the comment in the Read mode Operation example lt Key operation gt Input the HELP key in the Read mode 2 Select 2 COMMENT DISPLAY select 1 YES D Move the cursor to the following step 14 74 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 18 Using the help function lt Display gt HELP MENU 1 READ 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END COMMENT DISP 1 YES 2 NO CLEAR END HELP MENU O gt LD X0000 Display the comment of 1 OUT Y0020 the device at the cursor position 2 LD X0000 Motor start limit 0 LD X0000 1 gt OUT Y0020 2 LD X0000 Motor start check 14 3 19 PLC memory all clear Z O l When input of a keyword is requested all parameters and sequence programs can be cleared together with z the keyword registered in the ACPU using the operation
167. NET H MELSECNET 10 etc l Network monitor 02 02 x x Network monitor Supporting display of Chinese Simplified E Option OS function Traditional German Korean l Network monitor 02 04 x x Enables monitoring the status of the CC Option OS 2 77F x x Link IE controller network Network monitor 03 12 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC A 01 02 Function for displaying sequence program 2 09K Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q loaded to CPU on GOT QnA 01 02 Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 01 02 Option OS Ladd itori Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q eet ord Supporting display of Chinese Simplified function oe 2 2 D QnA 02 04 Traditional German Korean Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 02 04 Supporting language switching Option OS Japanese Korean for displaying file 2 27D Ladder monitor for MELSEC name and title of the sequence program Q QnA 02 04 Option OS Supporting the read of programs 2 43V Ladder monitor for MELSEC comments Q QnA 03 01 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 48 Q Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Supporting reading comments from CF pp g g 2 58L Option OS v cards Ladder monitor for MELSEC Ladder monitoring Supporting monitoring local devices 2 58L Q QnA 03 03 X function Option OS 2 63R Ladder monitor for MELSEC x Q QnA 03
168. NITOR OS 9 3 Utility Display 9 9 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyboard operation D Touch the numerical value to be changed Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position changes by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Chilo Rode Pe None S Yo Ro2s2 g HosttPCI S 9 osttPCI S Cursor sfereto Del a 0 11213 4 Carcel Enter Keyboard 3 Input numeric with keyboard e o to 9 Key Input the numeric e Key Touching the key completes numeric input and closes the keyboard e Key Touching the Cancel key cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard gt lt P Key Moves the cursor left or right if there is an item that can be entered e Key key is used when canceling the input by 1 character key and the key which is not mentioned do not function i key is touched numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed 9 10 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION In Communication Setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers
169. OT The cable for connection to the QCPU motion controller CPU Q series does not have a FG wire that needs to be grounded To connect QnACPU ACPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT When using GT15 CLIFXSS 1 or GT15 CLIBS ground the FC wires as shown in the figure below 1 GT15 COEXSS 1 Fa a Sc n a a a a ai Leave unconnected 000000 2SQ wire to the FG terminals to be 28 cm or less E Ground the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the GOT 2 FG wires on GT15 CO BS must be 28 cm or less O Leave the FG ground wire on GT15 EXCNB unconnected 4 Connect the FG wire on GT15 CUOBS on the GOT side to the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the GOT Connect the FG wire on GT15 CO BS on the PLC side to the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the PLC 6 Connect the LG and FG terminals on the terminal block and provide a single grounding point for them 2 GT15 COBS For both GOTs provide the same grounding as described in the section 1 above to both GOTs 7 8 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS cable 8 OPTION 8 1 CF Card The CF card is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function Refer to the following for details gt Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 8 1 1 Applicable CF card The following CF cards are applicable for GT1500 M
170. OT if connected directly to the A QnA Q or FX series of the PLC CPU FA transparent function 1 1 Features 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown Start LU gt LLI gt O Refer to GT Designer2 Version L Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual _ Refer to GT Designer3 Version L Install GT Designer2 or GT Designers in the PC Screen Design Manual Fundamentals a Refer to GT Designer2 Version z Creat ject data AARE had Sc Screen Design Manual Refer to GT Designer3 Version O nS Screen Design Manual Functions 7 a or Help functions of GT Designer DO Wire for the GOT power supply Refer to Chapter 7 WIRING Attach the option function board Refer to Chapter 8 OPTION Only when necessary Z When transferring data via a cable When transferring data via the CF card S LL i Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable or RS 232 cable Insert the CF card in the PC p Install and download the OS program Write the OS project data installed j i i th T in the PC in the CF project data installed in the PC to the GO in the PC in the CF card Referte GT Bese Versioni x Ww 1 Install the standard monitor OS 1 Write the standard monitor OS Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual communication driver extended communication driver extended function Refer to GT Designer3 Version L Z functions OS option OS to GOT OS option OS in the CF c
171. POSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery deirective in EU member states refer to 17 4 TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regulated units Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on the Time setting amp display screen utilities screen In addition confirm that the adequate battery life remains on the rating plate Transporting the GOT with the low battery voltage or the battery the reached battery life may unstabilize the backup data unstable during transportation Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Ver Revision Mar 2005 JY997D17501 A Oct 2005 JY997D17501 Nov 2006 JY997D17501 May 2007 JY997D17501 Partial revisions ABBREVI
172. Performs TC monitoring in the TC Monitor window C MON l FOR ETATE Subsection 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters Performs buffer memory monitoring in the BM Monitor window BM MON Subsection 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory The system monitor function is deactivated and the screen returns to Main Menu of the utility If the system is activated from the User screen the screen returns to it F Z U 14 14 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 3 Operation procedure common to the system monitor screens 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Zz O ase This subsection describes how to specify network numbers monitor stations and monitor devices by taking 2 the Entry Monitor window as an example The procedure for specifying network numbers monitor stations and monitor devices is the same even if other items than the entry monitor s Example Entering a monitor device when the entry monitor is used zZ O i 7 Functional change menu screen Ow E SEO sre fs To MN _ By Touch tf DEV MON Q ZZ Op az EHE Onl When no device When devices are non is entered already entered 09 O gt Za Fro uio DEO lt 8 SE TER FRO yyy ae PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM OLH THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No Q Z lt x z A 2 Q gt LU 0 LO DEVICE MONITOR NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 x O Lu IL LL
173. RFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Me O LU ae O LL Lu U H O O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 29 Touch button Same named project data has already l existed If there is no file of the same name in the Do you want to overwrite copy destination folder starts to copy If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder If touch button starts to copy If touch button cancels to copy G When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch button closes the dialog Copy is completed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 5 1 Format function of memory card Formats the CF card or Internal SRAM 13 5 2 Display operation of memory card format Main menu Program Data control Program Data control Section 9 3 Utility Display Program data control Touch wW Memory card format Program data Belect Drive A i Built in CF card D Internal SRAM Select a drive and format it Point f Formatting the D drive Internal SRAM If the GOT is turned off and left in t
174. RR will be displayed NetNe ST FF CPUNe 0 gel Touch KEY WORD 1 Keyword Release screen SS lt Enter the password entered in the sequence program KEY WOR at 1 nae ea key Touch this key to enter alphabetic Lanse characters A to Z uppercase TPF otra OJ JAC Dell Enter j key Touch this key to enter numbers 1 to 9 key Use this key to delete an entered character key Use this key to delete all characters under the cursor 2 Entry is completed by touching the key and the keyboard closes 14 2 System Monitor 14 39 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory The BM monitor buffer memory monitor is a function to monitor the buffer memory of special function modules This section describes how to operate the BM monitor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 22 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the BM Monitor screen is described below 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No BM MOM TOR PUNo 4 Displays a word dev
175. S 01 11 Chinese Simplified supporting Europe Chinese Traditional supporting Europe TrueType numerical font 7 segment TrueType numerical font Gothic MELSEC FX list Function to display or edit a sequence program 9 90U editor function read from the FXCPU in the list mode l x x App 55 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series INDEX Al POISE COMO M oa a 14 1 B Backlight shutoff detection cceccseeeeeeeeeees 17 7 BarCode ainne a 2 1 2 12 Banery caa e a 4 3 8 8 17 4 BOOI Sae aa aa 9 1 13 2 16 2 Brightness contrast adjustment cceee 11 8 Brightness contrast adjustment of display 11 8 Buzzer volume Setting cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 11 10 C CF card Compact Flash card N A suet AE 2 10 8 1 9 1 13 2 16 1 Clean saan E 15 1 Cleaning of display ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeees 15 1 17 3 CIGEK setting Se mnsa aana 12 1 Communication settings screen ccceeeee 10 2 COMPONCNUIISE a iiawe ceed eels 2 2 Connector conversion adapter 668 2 1 8 18 D Daily inspection aie sised be sehateosdinteduieediidacete ae 17 2 Debug amp Self ChECK cccccccseecseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeaes 14 1 LIS DI AY oira A 14 138 Display of OS information cccceeceseeeeeeeeeees 13 6 Display of utility SCrEON eee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 Display settings sis tise wudaumabtaceg
176. S AND STANDARD MONITOR OS To execute the GOT utility BootOS or Standard monitor OS has to be installed in the C drive Flash memory This chapter explains the installation using GOT Drawing software CF card gt GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS installation teas the GT Designer2 CF card CF card in GOT GT Designer3 GOT gt CF card GOT BootOS ee 00 or Upload OS standard monitor OS file gt installation Install the CF card ae card in cor gt When GOT is remote installed easily using the CF card Install OS from GOT to GOT using the CF card For details of the installation using drawing software refer to the following lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Point CoreOS Section 16 1 to 16 4 of this chapter describes BootOS and Standard monitor OS only For CoreOS refer to the following L Section 16 5 CoreOS 16 1 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location Required for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT Installed at factory shipment Flash memory BootOS BootOS can be installed from drawing software or the CF card When installed C G1BOOT from drawing software or the
177. Start time A GOT Start Time 5 z x start Time gt Of 2 1 2008 FRI 15 35 22 a Current Time O gt Of 2 1 2006 FRI 16 12 09 G Operating hours 14 Oh 36m 45s x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 12 GOT Start Time 14 137 14 12 1 GOT start time function 14 12 3 Display of GOT start time fself checkistart time GOT Start Time Start Time OPf21 2006 FRI 15 35 22 07217 2006 FRI 16 12 09 Current Tine Operating hours Qn 36m 45s Item Description Start Ti Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation art Time communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Displays operating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared Operating hours Point 7 To display correct time Set the clock of GOT L7 Section 12 1 Time Setting and Display When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time Remark Time displayed at Operating hours p Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with
178. T setup screen the GOT will restart 49 After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected a If touch x the GOT restarts m and the changes are reflected O Z O whe On On Sz F oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 3 Operation Settings 11 11 11 3 2 Display operation of operation setting 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Buzzer volume window move buzzer GOT setup Operation Buzzer volume D Setting items are changed if setting item is touched Window move buzzer security setting Utility call key Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms Buzzer volume SHOR TONG ORE See ZTA Window move buzzer OFF gt ON Setting contents are defined if button is touched GOT setup Di splay Language English Opening screen time i button is touched without touching button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed button The operation setting screen is displayed Screen save time If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents Security setting Refer to the following for the security setti
179. T09 C300R40603 6T 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20601 15P 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C30R20602 15P For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs Sold separately Product ee Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40501 15P GT09 C100R40501 15P For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C200R40501 15P GT09 C300R40501 15P GT09 C30R40502 6C RS 422 GT09 C100R40502 6C 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C200R40502 6C GT09 C300R40502 6C 30m GT09 C30R40503 15P m GT09 C100R40503 15P 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C200R40503 15P GT09 C300R40503 15P 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20501 9P 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C30R20502 15P 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC 2 7 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product K Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40401 7T Ooo m O RS 422 GT09 C100R40401 7T For connecting GOT to HITACHI intelligent serial port module cable GT09 C200R40401 7T GT09 C300R40401 7T For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC intelligent serial port RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P 3m module cable GT09 C30R21103 3T For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product ae Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41301 9S Ooo m o RS 422 GT09 C100R41301 9S For connecting Connector Conversion Box to
180. T1000 Series App 18 oot Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver Bus connection Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A Bus Q 04 04 Communication driver Supporting the direct CPU connection 2 90U A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 02 MELSEC FX 04 02 Direct connection to Supporting connection to QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU CPU QO1UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 03 2 91V Communication driver A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 04 Communication driver A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 02 AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 04 02 AJ71C24 UC24 04 02 Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A Supporting the computer link connection 2 90U Computer link Supporting connection to QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU connection Communication driver QO01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 2 91V A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 03 and Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 04 Supporting connection to MELSECNET H PLC to PLC 2 90U Communication driver network l MELSECNET H 04 02 MELSECNET H Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU SS Communication driver connection PLC to PLC Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 2 91V MELSECNET H 04 03 network and Q20UDEHCPU i Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A MELSECNET H 04 04 Supporting conn
181. T1150 QLBDA For this product see note under and over the page 5 2 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive 5 1 2 Control cabinet The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel or cabinet It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 Control cabinet a Use a conductive control cabinet b When attaching the control cabinet s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the control cabinet mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area d Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies 22mm 2 wire or thicker is recommended e Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94inch diameter or less If the holes are 10cm 3 94inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an E
182. TING 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility By the operation of the utility the OS and project data stored in the memory card are selected and transferred to GOT DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Point f Notes on installing the Boot OS and Standard monitor OS 1 Installing both the Boot OS and Standard monitor OS Install the Boot OS first and then install the Standard monitor OS When the Boot OS is installed the built in flash memory on the GOT becomes initialized to the factory setting All OSs and project data will be deleted The Boot OS comes factory installed Installation of the Boot OS is not necessary unless upgrading the Boot OS version 2 Copying the project data using the CF card Download the project data after installing the Boot OS Standard monitor OS and other OSs Make sure that the version of the Standard monitor OS on the GOT and that of the Standard monitor OS that created the project data match dp Z Lu a we O O O AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY 3 When the OS and project data are on the CF card When drawing software is in use When the 2 point press installation function is used project data will be installed at the completion of the OS installation When installing the system using the utility screen install the OS and download the project data on their respective operation screens 4 The installation cannot be i
183. TOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Upload Transfers the project data from the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in CF card Upload Do you want to upload 7 The project data is already existed If Upload is done the project data is deleted Do you want to execute 7 Upload is completed 13 23 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Mount the CF card to GOT For the CF card installation removal method refer to the following L gt Section 8 1 CF Card G Touch A Standard CF card in the drive selection if touching button the screen shown on the left is displayed 4 If touching button the upload is executed If there is a project data of the same name in the A drive the screen shown on the left is displayed without starting the upload If touching button an overwrite upload is executed to the project data of the same name If touching button the upload is canceled O When the upload is completed the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed If touching button the dialogue box is closed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information The alarm log file held by the D drive Internal SRAM is displayed The functions below can be carried out for files Information display of files and fold Displays name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 25 13 26 olders Deletion Deletes file 13 27 Copy Copys file 13 28
184. The following message is displayed on GOT Qs The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT S4 l Install Core OS from the latest version of drawing software Fro Installation will be canceled ia Confirm the version of OS EGE O 09 OLN Q Z lt x x a YO O gt wA 0 LO x O m ae O LL m T H O Z O tee On Oo Sx linn ne 2 Oa ep or Z lt O LN Ooz ZEO ooz AOF am ae Js g IOs os 236 ZOV 16 5 CoreOS 16 14 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conducti
185. V Standard monitor OS 04 03 Window screen Supporting the overlap windows 3 4 and 5 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 The settable range of GS is extended to the range from GSO 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 to GS2047 For the GOT multidrop connection the device to store the Supported GOT internal device GOT station number is added soon The device to notify the RGB signal input status is added Standard Menton S ete 2 96A Devices for the MODBUS RTU connection are added Screen switching Enables setting the screen switching devices for the overlap 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 function windows 3 4 and 5 Station No Switching Enables setting the station No switching devices for the o m O m Z m Q o lt i 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Function overlap windows 3 4 and 5 System information regarding the overlap windows 3 4 and 5 is added 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 System information System information regarding the E drive is added 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 Extended function OS Operator authentication 04 03 RFID 04 03 Extended function OS Operator authentication 04 03 Fingerprint Authentication 04 03 Extended function OS Operator authentication 04 04 The system signal 2 3 is added Supporting the external authentication RFID for the operator authentication 2 91V Supporting the fingerprint authentication for the
186. aeduesavertetiemenctedtdes 14 119 14 6 1 Mem ry check TunttlOMeasndens esther teen eee end ek 14 119 14 6 2 Display operation Of memory CNECK cccccecccseccseeeceeeceeecnecueecueecaeecsueeaueeseeesseeeeeseeeenaees 14 119 14 6 3 Memory check ODCaAllON 2 esses ioe eee aidan bee eee 14 120 bf Drawing CMC CK oari ett adei alana Menaharcanie tna debeluemmatsl aut haedlenaathte 14 123 15 71 Drawing check TUNG HOM sirarite iran iat tam huteds eatuWisdriva tidied i a aaa 14 123 14 7 2 Display operation Of drawing check cccccccseccseecceeeeaeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeueeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeseeeesaees 14 123 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing CHECK cccceecceececececeeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeeseeseeseeesseeeseeeseeeeaees 14 124 14 8 Font CHECK tnccicasasanarnsiaceits sdeaaaneanceinasacadaasadebinauitiad canananspenneneaaadadngnancantanaaainasanass 14 128 TAB F nt cheek TUMCUOMN aa e a A a had dame aleute coum a a a a 14 128 14 8 2 Display operation of font CNOCK a5 seccc 2 sans ccczsesanad seccagscenasstennieats aascaecesaaieceanataieacscszaaentecectaancsens 14 128 148 3 4 ONL CHECK ODSA 3 55 53 he sadolints octacte Nese A a a edostelente tack ctowtas 14 129 1429 TOUCH Panel GHCCK arenan inna Ea 14 130 142951 TOUGH panel CHECK TUN CON gxiveiscnetdectns de nna a eta elas ale ako ees 14 130 14 9 2 Display operation of touch panel check cece cccccceccceeeceeeeceeeceeesaeeeeeeeseeeseueeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeesaaes 14 130 14
187. agnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance c Ground the power system and the control system separately Z O E A O 1 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Connect the power supply to the power terminals on the back panel of the GOT Use 0 75mm or thicker cables to avoid voltage drop and tighten the terminal screw with the specified torque securely GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 7 O H CF CARD lt RS 232 PC and external INPUT device connection D 24V DC cables FO cA pi RS 422 B r I I gt BATTERY I l VF iil eU iM Grounding 1009 or less as iol Ee GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA
188. aienceetevewenidunsweut looks 11 9 TES Operat S CUUIN OS 2s 52cacenged soared sactdgearnataateerancenadanaenmenediecimmssaenenutaskeasteosadaanacasterants 11 10 11 3 T Operation setting TUNCUON S ik Ss cece eg chavs a E EEEE 11 10 11 3 2 Display operation of Operation Setting cccccccccecccsecceeeceeeccueceuceceeecacecsueceueesseeceeesseeseeesaues 11 11 11 3 3 Setting Operation Of OPELAatiON cccccccccscccseecceecceeeceeeseecaueecseeceueceeecsueesaeecaeecseessueesuessseesnaes 11 12 ThA Securty Level Change mssins e oie game oanearined eae 11 14 11 4 1 Security level change functions nannoannannnnnennannnnnnnennennrrnrnnrnsnernrrnrrnrrnrrrrrsrrrnronrrnrrnernrernrene 11 14 11 4 2 Security change display operation cccccccsccceeeceecceeecceecceeeceecueeseeecaeecsuecsueecseecaeecseesueesaaes 11 14 11 4 3 Security level change OPErAatiOn ccccccscccseceeecceeeceeecceeccaeecseeceeceueecacecueecsuessueesusesueesanesaaes 11 15 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting Renee omen en 11 16 15 1 Uulit call key seting TUN GION sssri da ii 11 16 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation cccccccceeccceeeceecceeeceeeeceeecseecaueceueceueesaeeceeeseuessusesueesaeesaaes 11 16 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 0 n00n00nn0nnannannnannnnnnnnnnrnrenrnnnnnnernrrnrrsrrnnerrenrrrnrrnrrnrrsnrrnrrerene 11 17 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY
189. ain a a 14 1 T Third party PLC connection cable 0008 2 2 Time setting and display ccccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeees 12 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting in bus connection 18 7 U UTIILY FUNCUON St asrasa 9 2 W WINO ece a masa uneaetes 7 1 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Ran
190. al interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 GT1150 QLBD Saint ar ore scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in serial interface Models with a built in bus interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GT1155 QTBDQ oe ae in battery built in Q bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GT1155 QTBDA se sae in battery built in A bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GT1155 QSBDQ a ae in battery built in Q bus serial interface GOT 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GT1155 QSBDA ag aw in battery built in A bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 GT1150 QLBDQ R ae ove scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in Q bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 GT1150 QLBDA as a ak scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in A bus serial interface 2 3 2 2 Component List 2 2 1 GOT GT11 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 PLC connection cable Sold separately Product name Cable length Contents direct For oo FXCPU MINI DIN
191. ams or parameters in the PLC CPU from other peripheral equipment lf you change programs or parameters either reset the GOT main unit or set the PLC No again If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment including GOT the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may not be the same resulting in an unintended operation of the PLC CPU Writing sequence programs Sequence programs cannot be written when the target CPU is operating EEPROM 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 2 Access range 14 3 4 Display Zz O O 5 Outline until the start x This subsection describes an outline until the system monitor screen is displayed after List editor for n MELSEC A Option OS is installed in the GOT x Ow Turn on the power to the GOT 5zZ9 2x mja Q5 u Starting from the special function Of n switch MELSEC A List editor Starting from the utility set in the project data Display the utility Touch the special function switch Q Zz 7 Op az ar ASH After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Refer to the following manual for how to set the special Debug gt MELSEC A List editor from the Main Menu function switch For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design of the GOT to be used Manual Q GT Designer3 VersionL Scre
192. an button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Q button The time display and y setting screen is displayed 2 Aa Ow QON If touch X button GOT restarts After 12 restart GOT operates with the changed settings Point N O Z gt FEA me neo lt n OE Ojapere Ze OF dep 1 When connecting with an external device which does not have clock function If set to Adjust or Broadcast for Clock setting while the GOT is connected with external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the Q clock data will not be adjusted Z Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function z A N lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual O GOT1000 Series Connection Manual TO Mitsubishi Products Non Mitsubishi Products1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals we O 2 Clock setting and battery T If Broadcast or None is selected for Clock setting the battery status of the L Lu GOT is required to be normal 2 O Refer to Kf GOT internal battery voltage status to check the battery status 3 Operation setting by drawing software Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 Of When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Sz Environmental Setting a OO To change a part of the setting after downloading the proje
193. an cause a fire failure or malfunction WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Insert the bus cables for QnA ACPU and motion controller A series into the GOT s bus interface connectors until they click into the place Check for proper insertion to avoid malfunctions TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat bur
194. aphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Ce
195. ard Screen Design Manual Fundamentals z 2 SEA the project data created 2 o eo cr oe Refer to 16 INSTALLATION OF A ee fia ics ii core OS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS in this manual for the Install the CF card to GOT to install ka eet WI and download the standard monitor OS communication driver extended a function OS option OS project data x to the built in flash memory 5 Lu Check the communication settings CONNER ie Cael too ale eae cinauon Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Zz connector O H lt 3 Turn on the GOT power and the system of the lt connection destination S Start the monitor Display each screen Z E z Zz O H ai O 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Option function board Protective sheet Connector conversion adapter Serial multi drop connection unit O MITSUBISHI R5 232 Personal computer CF card Memory card adaptor e GT1 00 does not connect a printer 2 1 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 2 Component List 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT1155 x s A Communication Built in RS 232 Q Built in Q bus iene A Built in A bus Blank Built
196. are set Moreover in Communication Detail setting the communication interface details are set Communication parameters setting Z H L S Z S O Ti Qo LZ YE Lu Fw AT 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 1 Communication setting functions Zz LOW Function Contents zez a XF Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name Sa iy Channel no Ch No setting Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Communication parameters o ae Set communication parameters of communication devices 6 gt setting Z gt F maa me DEO s05 i r OO lt 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation SZ Main menu Communication setting a L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Z LAGS Communication Se i Standard F Setting ae LU Communication Rode TO setting PO None Reese Language PQ Host PE o F 9 Host PC i in 09 CH Driver assign 9 Definition of ChNo O None LFA device 8 Barcode o PC Z ne Om OW ng OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen Name of setting item and display item columns for Communication Setting Communication Setting Ro4e2 lt P0 None lt 4 Rozar lt B 3 9 Hosti Ph lt 4 S USB oy S F 3 HosttPl lt 4 Definiti
197. ary to stop the PLC 14 110 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 14 Parameter setting Parameter setting screen z l i l l l i E The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on O screen keys iL a 1 Displayed contents E 1 Memory capacity CZ 2 File reg capacity 0 block Ow 3 z0 C 100 C 19906bit 5zZ9 S 500 999 C 220 C 255 32bit Sie D 200 D 511 SEL OZN 4 RUN terminal input 5 Q lt 6 un Sets the memory space number of steps aE 1 Memory capacit 2A U J If you touch the section you can change the memory space AON Sets the memory space number of blocks allocated to the file register 2 File reg capacity Touch the LJ section and input the number of blocks o lt Sets the latch range power failure hold area Lya 3 Latch range HUA Touch the number display section and input the value WES Ly Sets whether or not to use one of the FX PLC input terminals for RUN input ome 4 RUN terminal input l l Ceres Touch the O section and set the device to be set for the RUN terminal Oh 5 Initializes the parameters S lt x Point f Memory space for kana comments after changing memory space file register space z g i A If the memory space is set smaller than the total of the file register space and kana L gt comment space the kana comment space is automatically reduced ae i i i i LO With the MELSEC FX list ed
198. as shown in the figure on the right 6 Pinch the lever with fingers and pull up it vertically to remove the option function board z S aie S Groove for reverse N installation 5 protection x O Point f Precautions for installing removing the option function board 1 Do not twist the lever when removing the option function board Otherwise the lever may be broken 2 Install the dummy cover when not using the option function board z Lu gt T oc QO O Lu Z O q x Z 8 3 Option Function Board 8 7 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board 8 4 Battery The battery backs up clock data alarm history and recipe data A battery is installed to Gl11110 when the GT11 is shipped from the factory 8 4 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT1100 Model Contents Battery for backup of clock data GT11 50BAT alarm history and recipe data 8 4 2 Battery specifications Item Specifications Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Storage life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Application For backup of clock data alarm history and recipe data g gt Remark For the battery directive in EU member states refer to 17 4 2 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States fP 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically at intervals of 4 to 5 y
199. at damage the screen saver function is effective For details on the screen saver function refer to the following MEg Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP Using the GOT Backlight OFF function can prolong the life of the backlight For details on the Backlight OFF function refer to the following MEg Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Not compliant when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications e GT1155 QTBD GI1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Specifications il Item GT1155 QSBD ee GT1155 QTBD S GT1150 QLBD O Z O lt at 2 6 HO OO A Z O H lt O O D Oo on e RS422 1ch e RS422 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps 9 600 4 800bps Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Use PLC communication Use PLC communication e RS422 485 1ch e RS422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 pee 38 400 19 200 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps 9 600 4 800bps Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Use PLC commu
200. available 0 4 Fue DEO lt 8 Sa ooz OXN Q Z lt x z A 2 O gt LL Q 0 LO lt O Lu I O LL l LW 09 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 5 14 2 1 Specifications Connection type 1 When the GOT is connected to a QCPU Q mode Q series motion controller CPU or QSCPU Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor Data change by test operation Quick test Display switching 14 6 O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller CC Link E Ec Direct eS Computerink GOT multidrop PECE Description connection connection connection s Monitoring connection 4 6 Monitoring itoring present values by entering devices to be monitored Subsection 14 2 10 in advance Monitoring the present yalue pi n Subsector Dad devices from a specified device the present value set value contact point and coil of m Subsection 14 2 17 devices fro Monitoring devices in specified buffer memory m a specified device the present value of x Ae A An A Subsection 14 2 21 of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices o x Changing the present value of 2 word devices and buffer memory A Changing the present value of TC Subsection 14 2 24 possible during TC monitoring Changing the set val
201. bishi GOT unit and FX2N GT1150 QLBD Programmable Controllers EX 1 F Ferrite core Ex NEC TOKIN ESD R 175 or similar 250mm 100mm 9 84inch 3 93inch GT01 C30R4 8P Programmable a l controller ele e r F JFE C A GOT units 140mm l 5 51inch Comes equipped Added by user Added by user 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 5 7 5 3 1 About the cable used OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME LI gt m m or m m INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 Bus connection cable The following products are used in the EMC specification compatibility test conducted by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation e ZCAT3035 1330 ferrite core manufactured by TDK corporation e AD 5CK type cable clamp manufactured by MITSUBISHI e Zipper tube SHNJ type manufactured by Zippertubing Japan Ltd GOT Unit Existing Cables User Made Cables GT15 QC I B GT15 QCL BS modified as shown in GT1155 QTBDQ EX 2 GT1155 QSBDQ Peel the sheath at both ends of the cable and expose GT1150 QLBDQ the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with clamps refer to Section 5 3 3 GT15 CL BS GT15 CL EXSS S1 modified as shown in EX 3 Peel the sheath at both ends of the cable and expose The cable need to be independently tested by the user to demonstrate EMC compatibility the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding when they are used
202. bit device on off 5 Displays a comment oak OLN Display example of word devices 16 bit E TES EN R SET E Z TES ENE R n NetNo OlST FFICPUNe 0 NetNo OJST FFICPUNe 0 Z 500 10 z S234 11 D i 12 ae 13 J0 14 15 16 1 li No comments displayed Comments displayed 6 Displays a word device value 7 Displays a device number x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O 8 Displays a device name DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 31 14 2 14 Batch monitor 14 32 Display example of word devices 32 bit BATCH MONITOR TESTMOMENLISFORMS BATCH MONITOR L GIST FFICPUNe 0 Neto Dial D 10 DW Inventory Did D 5 DIN Shipment A DW D DW Shipment B C ils DW Shipment C EE e 9 No comments displayed Comments displayed 9 Displays a data range 10 Monitor display area For further information about items 1 to 10 shown above see the page that follows Point P Number of devices displayed on a single screen The number of devices displayed on a single screen depends on the setting of the data range as shown below Word devices 16 bit 16 devices no comments displayed eight devices comments displayed Word devices 32 bit Eight devices no comments displayed four devices comments displayed Bit devices 16 devices no comments displayed eight devices comments
203. ble setting for MR Communication driver lt 2 2 32 x A O LUO J2S CP MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 TO Communication driver Z Supporting the test run mode 2 32J x x O MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 Servo amplifier Supporting settings for the number of Communication driver 2 73B x x oO wi connection retries the timeout time and delay time MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 09 Q u Communication driver Oa Enables setting the host station address 2 90U x x 3 Se MELSERVO J3 J2S M 04 02 os On S r tion to MR J28 CL 9 O6A Communication driver COs upporting connection to J2S ee MELSERVO J3 J2S M 04 04 x x 0 mie Communication driver Robot controller ii Supporting connection to robot controller 2 77F QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC xX xX connection CRnD 700 03 12 dp Communication driver E A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS Lu k a Supporting connection to CNC MELDAS rT Sl g C6 C64 series A QnAQJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 x 02 02 MELSECNET 10 02 02 CNC connection CC Link ID 02 02 MELDA oe Communication driver name has been Communication driver C64 2 43V 7 Nr x lt x O changed AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 03 01 Supporting settings for the number of Communication driver retries the timeout time and delay time AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 03 09 x x O oo 2 73B Communication driver Communication driver name has been QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC x changed CRnD 700 03 09 Communication dri
204. ble to the EMC Directive 6 The following table lists the modules compliant with the EMC Directive q a O Compliant with EMC Directive X Not compliant with EMC Directive Ds Item Hardware version 6 H GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD PO B 3 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ n a GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA oO Point f Please use the GOT whose hardware version is later than that described a Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate z Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo z lt A 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 5 Aa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX LI gt m m or m T SERIAL 540001 BC BC Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 80M1 IND CONT EQ C US LISTED Z O lt z 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1150 QSBDQ S GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA A MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ Vase DP O IN 2v o 2 o POWER MAX 0OW __ Hardware version X SERIAL 0000720 DROOOT A A i Conformed standard Z O a O 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable 5 5 5 2 1 About models applicable to the EMC Directive 5 2 2 Connection format Connection conditions where the GT11 is applicable to the EMC Direct
205. ccccecccssecseeceeeeceeeceeeceeeceeecueeceeesseeseeeseneeaeeeageess 8 18 S21O2Z Installing PROCS GUNG aes goatee ots to athuactaed aint JabchaaseiessalsacsudesinecdeawaaandasteR aeooeeeccdabedebeteveuareatacnesssendseatode de 8 18 9 UTILITY FUNCTION cccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 tO 9 10 IAT UUV iE KO CUTION erossa a E nian theuceeceee ETOR 9 1 SUU ECION EIS Uien E A E bir a seeadenadaiaes 9 2 9 3 Utility Display setae ne i a E E iD 9 4 9 3 1 Display operation of main Menu nansannennnnnennonnonrrrrnnnrrrrnrrnnrnnrrnernrrnrrsrrnnernerrronrrnrrnernrerrennrenerner 9 6 9 3 2 Uth basic Configura oN arera A E E E E AA 9 8 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change ssi tess easiersy 2555 cota acian hanna oes needed ties eats 9 9 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 to 10 16 10 1 COMMUNICATION SSTHING xasteestenivsteusdersterievecevectidentbedecotainbvanduudeusieusiecesteuendyluesetedenede 10 1 10 1 1 COMMUNICATION setting functions eax acracetece evvacaceche ooestand levees nadacneetbveeetacieesoeens lhe acheteticotareds 10 1 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation cccccecccecccececeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeseueeeeeeseeeseeeaeeees 10 1 10 1 3 Description of COMMUNICATION setting Screen cece ccceccceeeceeeeceeese ceca eeaeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeesaeetaeeeaes 10 2 10 1 4 Operation Of COMMUNICATION setting cccccccscccseeceeeccseeceeeceueceeece
206. ceeecaeeceuecseecsueesaessaeesauesaaes 14 60 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower FUNCTIONS cc ccccceeccceeeceeeeeeeceeeese cece eeseeeeeeesseeeaeeeseeeseeeanes 14 63 14 3 9 Selection and Operation Of modes ccccccccesccsseceececseecueeceeecaueccaeecaeecueceuecsueecaeeseeessessaeesaaes 14 63 14 3 10 Command input DFOCCOUNES xciselei cc Atosc eedeadacceci acl dche haddock ite nokedc encase ais Sheniaccect daddies 14 64 14 3 11 Action if an incorrect key is IN DUL sie secs nnctends cencssd ateeensedtaenae meet aaandulecsdacesetd snesnscnesaen aes meces 14 67 TA LISTO TUCO waitin ae atca sah ton ced adi eusaem a a a 14 68 TS Wd SIS OOD CI AON sehen ot does Sate ohne a tak Sates mmc a adc emt emcee ees 14 69 14 3 14 Reading SEQUENCE POCA ccccecccseccseecseecceeccueesueccecceecseeseueeceeesauesaueesaeesseeseeeseesenaaes 14 69 14 3 15 Changing Overwriting COMMANAS ccccecccseccseeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeaees 14 70 14 3 16 ACGING Inserting commands seisin ats vamcot A Davedtehsseureb vere sauce thlat 14 71 TES Wr CIO LING COMMIMAM OS lt a aceite st eect cage eat deere Raa eed cient cl Sit ee cr dal cathe alan eanet qamcey 14 72 14 18 USING the Nelp MUN CHOM set atads ecalesic ce leeloias ston a e a as lt cemnsiaene ncn ioscan semdocaameomnetece 14 73 VAS NO FPLC Me IMONY aul Cle al Se cued hse teat ts oe er tenet ia te as hese ates anther eN EEN 14 75 143 20 Listof operat
207. ck operation ED For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check Customer purchased shown in the diagram left in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins 4 and 6 pins respectively Set the interface channel setting for the self loopback check to none ChNo 0 by using Communication Settings of the GOT main unit Refer to the followings for the Communication Settings a If touch the button the hardware check for the RS 232 interface is carried out After selecting Seif the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback connector If data can not be received during data transmission the dialog shown left is displayed and the GOT restarts which notifies the self loopback connector failure self loopback connector communication error or RS 232 interface hardware failure 4 During check the dialog shown left is displayed E When all checks end normally the dialog shown left is displayed and the GOT restarts R939 communication check lf an error occurs the dialog is displayed at that point Verify A BYTE notifying the GOT has terminated abnormally and PEPEARE which byte the error occurred and then the GOT gt restarts H If a verification error occurs the RS 232 interface z hardware may be faulty 6 14 11 System Alarm Display Ow 5go E l ie 14 11 1 System alarm display f
208. creation software 3D 11C WINE Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P Description A9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module m Others Abbreviations and generic terms OMRON PLC KEYENCE PLC KOYO El PLC SHARP PLC JTEKT PLC TOSHIBA PLC TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC HITACHI IES PLC HITACHI PLC FUJI FA PLC PANASONIC PLC YASKAWA PLC YOKOGAWA PLC ALLEN BRADLEY PLC GE FANUC PLC LS IS PLC SCHNEIDER PLC SIEMENS PLC OMRON temperature controller SHINKO indicating controller CHINO controller FUJI SYS temperature Temperature controller controller YAMATAKE temperature controller YOKOGAWA temperature controller RKC temperature controller PC CPU module GOT server GOT client Windows font Intelligent function module MODBUS RTU MODBUS TCP Description Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components amp Syst
209. crosstalk shadow as an extension of the display may appear on the liquid crystal display panel Please note that it appears due to its characteristic When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle the display color seems like it has changed Please note that it is due to its characteristic Please note that the response time brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature When the same screen is displayed for a long time an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to heat damage and it may not disappear To prevent the heat damage the screen saver function is effective For details on the screen saver function refer to the following lt a Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP Using the GOT Backlight OFF function can prolong the life of the backlight For details on the Backlight OFF function refer to the following een Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Not compliant when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment 3 2 Performance Specifications e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Specifications Item GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ
210. ct data change the setting at the display setting of GOT lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 3 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Clock display 12 4 Carry out the display and setting of GOT clock data When setting the clock data change the clock data on the GOT and controller regardless of clock setting The setup methods of clock data are shown below Time Setting amp display If touch the clock display section the Clock setting keyboard for input is displayed and the Be 01 2005 12 34 56 TUE GOT internal battery Horma voltage status 567819 del lt clock update stops 2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below Input the scheduled time when the operation of is to be carried out since the input time is reflected at the 0 1 21314 Cancel Enter time of the operation of Key The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date Contents o to 9 Key Input numeric value in cursor position gt Key Key Key Key Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Key is touched while inputting year month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input
211. ction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Securely connect the option function board to the connector provided for the board When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT Mount the GOT onto the control panel while considering the following control panel inside dimensions Vertical installation of the GOT requires a space with the same dimensions as the horizontal installation turned 90 degrees clockwise seen from the display side Point f Applicable cable Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 30 1 19 ACCESSOFF ON CF CARD Unit mm inch No Name 1 PLC connection cable PC connection cable 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 2 OVERVIEW SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION PART NAME
212. ctions file_copy file_xcopy are 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 added The key code for the historical trend graph Display position Key Code Bethe 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 time specification jump is added 1 For the ASCII display or ASCII input the Kana kanji conversion is not available Only the Kana kanji conversion enhanced version is available 2 For GI15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT 11 E Version of GT GT GT Soft Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 JPEG file reading enabled 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Jo o raion omon esmas av oo Enables adjusting image qualities for Te Figure reading JPEG files l Supporting piping 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 00 Jo o Enables setting the coordinates and the T size using values l App 37 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page ae Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 m Z Supported lt Figure Supporting logo text Standard monitor OS 04 04 O 5 soon Z Ede Enables setting the coordinates and the fib Object 2 90U O Fu size using values ale Z Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Jo o O aS Text Stroke font applicable 243V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo oo x Enables specifyng of background color 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Jo oo O O
213. ctions added by version upgrade of the GI Designer2 Version2 96A For function comparisons among GOTs refer to the following lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual App3 2 List of Differences between the GOT1000 series and GOT 900 series functions For using the following functions use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later Applicable OS versions and communication drivers for GT16 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 are different from those for GT10 The added functions for GT10 are listed separately from those for GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 Point P How to use this table provides the versions of GI Designer2 and OS required for each GOT or communication unit and the following provides description for the functions added with the version upgrade and the versions of GI Designer2 and OS with which the function is compatible Regarding and the following there may be a case where the function is not supported by a particular type of GOT even when the function is compatible with the version In such a case check the version for the function and the version of the GOT and use GT Designer2 or OS of the later version Appendix 4 1 GI16 GI15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 Added GOT main unit Communication unit Version of GT Designer2 Target Models Version of OS GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02
214. ctric Corporation Himeji Works 840 Chiyoda machi Himeji Hyogo 670 8677 Japan e Manufactured at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works 1 14 Yada minami 5 Chome Higashi ku Nagoya 461 0048 Japan e Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME LI gt m m or m m INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The sections 5 1 1 through 5 3 2 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the GOT The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the requirements and the applicable standards control However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The method of conformance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery 5 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The following products have shown co
215. d Failed to write in the recipe file 1 Confirm the contents of the memory card 2 Do not pull out the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 1 Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating 2 Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the memory card Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register name 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Error code 357 358 359 360 370 402 403 406 410 411 412 448 Error message Error in specified PLC drive Confirm PLC drive PLC file access failure Confirm PLC drive Processing from another peripheral device Execute it after 0 divisor division error Confirm operation expression Upper and lower limit value error Confirm value setting Communication timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules SIO status error Confirm communication pathway or modules Specified station access is out of range Confirm station no Cannot perform operation because of PLC run mode stop the
216. d 5 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME LI gt H T x m T INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 2 Method to connect the power wire and ground wire 1 GI1155 QTBD GI1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD The GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD unit requires an additional ferrite filter to be attached to the 24V DC power supply cables The filter should be attached in a similar manner as shown in the figure opposite i e the power cables are wrapped around the filter However as with all EMC situations the more correctly applied precautions the better the systems Electro magnetic Compatibility The ferrite recommended is a TDK ZCAT3035 1330 or similar The ferrite should be placed as near to the 24V DC terminals of the GI1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GI1150 QLBD as possible which should be within 75mm of the GOT terminal 2 GI1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Twist the 24VDC cables to connect to the GI1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ and GT1150 QLBDA The ferrite filter is required for the 24VDC cables The filter should be attached in a similar manner as shown in the figure opposite i e the power cables are wrapped around the
217. d by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Version of GT11 SEN GT Soft Q Item Description GT Version of OS Z GOT1000 Bus Serial R Designer2 O 2 Z Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU a 2 Communication driver fit QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Em 2 91V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 o l l Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and 104 03 s3 Direct connection Q20UDEHCPU Uo to CPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O p 04 04 a Da Supporting connection to Q172HCPU 9 09K Communication driver Sh Q173HCPU l A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 O Sas ra a Communication driver rz Communication driver name has been U lt i P 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 03 01 O changed j AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU a Lu Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU connection to Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Semon nicevOn aiver Q 2 63R A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O Supporting connection to CNC C70 MELDASC6 03 07 a Supporting the redundant system with the lt redundant type extension base unit Communication driver Computer link Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O connection 03 09 Communication driver 2 73B A QnA QCPU QU71C24 Supporting settings for the number of 03 09 retries the timeout time and delay time AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 O 03 09 AJ71C24 UC24 03 09 Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU Communicati
218. de Valid key display This display is not always available With regard to keys framed in dotted lines in the figure shown at the left the valid key display indicates which READ INSERT n of the two functions assigned to each key is valid l o EJ icai ry i i i i i LA B C E Fi OTHER a Function indicated at the upper part of each key is available A E Veeder y Function indicated at the lower part of each key is available l l Dwoma Rgn Rica T U v J Lw UXx Y Z Example a key l l 1 LDI ANI ORI MCR LD AND OR MC T a Ce See s3 be 9 2 Ce Slee 5 A l l l Function indicated at the upper part of the key is C available FROM peg L L a Function indicated at the lower part of the key is r available Point To switch between two functions of keys functions indicated at upper and lower parts of the keys press the and keys Subsection 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions 14 60 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 7 Display format of the display area 2 The cursor appears Z The cursor appears W and is highlighted during data input 2 3 Indication of the selected line When a program list is displayed the line currently selected for editing is indicated by z appearing immediately after the step number The 3rd line in the display area is selected for editing Sy 220 You can use the and keys to move up and down
219. de the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices z EN Remark The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 6 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight For replacement of the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 1 Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT GOT set up Refer to the following for details Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm When the GOT detects a backlight shutoff the system information set with drawing software is turned on You can issue a backlight shutoff of the GOT from the PLC to external devices such as the lamp or buzzer usin
220. der 3 Name are not displayed file name 4 Path name 5 6 Date and time T Size of the drive 8 Operation switch 9 Number of files Remark Displayed folders and files AD Project information screen Storage file folder display screen Frosram Data Froject information Ci S kind Mame Size Date Time eT FAPROJECTT Pe pr 21 06 15 4a 36KB y Fie Contents The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is not connected A Built in CF card is not displayed Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Displays the name of file or folder saved in the selected drive or contained in the When the file or folder name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters If the displayed project data is a GOT monitoring target file mark precedes the If the displayed project data is currently selected to be displayed asterisk precedes the file name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name Displays the date and time when each file is installed Displays the size in use size of the drive selected in Select drive Displays the execution switch of functions download upload etc which can be carried out in Project information
221. devices such as GX Developer check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and based on the error message on the PLC CPU check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses APPENDICES 2 Error timing Check the timing of errors 1 An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU In this case because the faulty module may not be identified use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed the module may be causing the error 2 An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds The error may occur in the sequence program Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program 3 An error occurs when a specific device operates The mis operation may be caused by noise Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device If the line is too close to the device separate the line 100 mm or more from the device a Locating the module where an error occurs Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information locate a specific module where an error occurs By the method
222. displayed For further information about the setting of the data range see the following lt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the Batch Monitor screen Zz O Key switch Function z Activates the Quick test operation T TEST l l x C 3 Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the 5 MENU system monitor function L gt Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the 6 FORM Batch Monitor screen or comment no comment display T O L gt Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display S lt Q aS Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices aur i I l E i OZN Entering monitor devices lt 3 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and SET devices Test operation 3 Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not 0 currently displayed When five or more
223. duct Yp Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41101 5T OoOo m o RS 422 GT09 C100R41101 5T For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GTO09 C200R41101 5T GT09 C300R41101 5T GT09 C30R21101 6P For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 sable G 109 C30R21102 9S For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R21103 3T For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit 2 2 Component List 2 6 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 el OVERVIEW Z e H lt a gt S LL Z O LU ep gt 09 SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs Sold separately Product ae Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41201 6C 10 m i For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable GT09 C200R41201 6C 20 m GT09 C300R41201 6C 30 m RS 232 E GT09 C30R21201 25P 3m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC Connection cables for SHARP PLCs Sold separately Product ne Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40601 15P m GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C200R40601 15P GT09 C300R40601 15P 30m GT09 C30R40602 15P 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40602 15P 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C200R40602 15P 20m GT09 C300R40602 15P 30m GT09 C30R40603 6T 3m GT09 C100R40603 6T 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit GT09 C200R40603 6T G
224. duct associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles c
225. dule Six digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 123456789 Hexadecimal number Word device value 16 bit one word module Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are displayed Display example H ABCDE123 ON Bit device ON OFF O OFF Up to eight devices can be monitored with regard to each CPU station number For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered Device name GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals When no comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed Monitor display area When comments are displayed Up to four devices can be displayed 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key functions 14 2 12 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation Z O O Z D LL gt 2 ERE n EEEE pine Z O lt pone 25 Z Sree Ste E OZ When no devices are entered Display example when devices are already entered Q ZZ oe az ace mran Ma M jerma ow ia Precs Sel Ney e ai AO THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No N ONE o FEA HUA HES HE H TEST FORM ae ip OLN If necessary perform Quick t
226. e 5 Device name Set the name and number of the device to be monitored 6 1 Device number ra I O number When the initial I O signal of module is displayed with three digits specify the first two digits 8 1 PIUA UEVICE Set the initial device number of the buffer memory in decimal number _ For devices that can be set see the following GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 Point f Displaying the data range The Entry Monitor Batch Monitor TC Monitor and BM Monitor screens display the data range as shown below e DW 32 bit two word module e Nothing displayed 16 bit one word module Continued to next page 14 16 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices From previous page 6 5 f a DEVICE ENTRY 6 220 ZZ eto 0JST_ FF ICPUNo 0 DEVICE IN 16b 0 32b 1 0 Da iy XLVI ALL S a BI FID WIR aj 3 AJZIV TT C0 4 gt Gee mL E G Enter Del A S38 Pee TES MENU ORM z Met o OJST FFICPUNo 0 D SSS act 2147 483645 DW 48 1 x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O Point f 1 Retaining entered information If the system monitor function is reactivated without turning off the power
227. e Equivalent to IP67 JEM1030 front section when the USB environmental protective cover is Z structure 4 attached W164 6 46 x H135 5 32 x D56 2 21 mm inch ene maralmens lol Excluding USB environmental protective cover Horizontal format Panel cutting dimensions W153 6 03 X H121 4 77 mm inch Horizontal format Weight 0 7kg Excluding mounting fixtures GT Designer2 Version2 73B or later l Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1 or GT Designer2 Version2 or later GT Designer3 Version or later later O 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 3 a 2 3 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect Flickers and partial discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment However please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels When using multiple liquid crystal display panels please note that there is an individual difference between them A
228. e conversion function The file operation functions are added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Jo oo The file operation functions file_copy 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 file_ xcopy are added Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 200A Standard monitor OS 01 00 lol o screen m Standard monitor OS 02 02 lol o Word device values can be converted into data in the specified data type and the 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O Screen Script GOT can read or write the data Data type conversion function The file operation functions are added oare TF Standard monitor OS 03 12 Jo O The file operation functions file_copy 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 O file xcopy are added Function to execute scripts in unit of Option OS 2 18U xX object Object Script 02 02 Object Script width height and decimal_point are gt 90U Option OS added to the object property Object Script 04 02 Key codes for increment key and 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O decrement key are added Key code for historical trend graph is 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x lt added Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion aden 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x lt is adde Key codes for user ID ascending Key Code descending order movement of cursor are 227D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O added Standard monitor OS 04 02 lo x Standard monitor OS 04 04 o x The GT1
229. e file can be executed 13 20 Downloads the project data written in the A drive Built in CF card to C drive Flash Download 13 21 memory Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash memory to the A drive Built in Upload 13 23 CF card 13 3 2 Display operation of project information Main menu Section 9 3 Utility Display Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Program dataggontrol Touch Program data control Program Data control Program Data_ control m OS information m Alarm information TE Project information Memory card Form Tou ch Project information Project information Program Data Project information elect drive Built in CF card Flash Memory Internal SRAM Select the drive and operate project data file 13 3 Project Information 13 3 1 Function of project information Reference page 13 15 13 16 13 14 UTILITY FUNCTION DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee es AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 3 Display example of project information Project information screen Program Data Proaject information elect drive A Built in CF ecard Co Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Number Item 13 15 1 Select drive 2 Kind selected fol
230. e filled with yellow If returnes to the Self check screen by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 For a monochrome 16 scale GOT the part is displayed with a subtracted yellow color 14 9 Touch Panel Check 14 131 14 9 3 Touch panel check operations UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND COPY x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 10 I O Check 14 10 1 I O check function The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other If I O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardwares are normal To execute I O check the PLC communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from drawing software Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the PLC communication driver gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Point I O check function Controllers except MITSUBISHI PLC cannot be checked with the use of I O check function When checking the communication between GOT and controller follow Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring in GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual
231. e key This key is used when setting timers and counters writing applied commands etc Displays the list from a specified step No when the step No is input Moves the list display area bar up and down and switches the line being edited Determines the key operation Inputs commands device names etc The key contents depend on the input contents The commands that can be used differ depending on the target FX PLC Refer to the manual for the FX PLC to be used O O etc x Exits the MELSEC FX list editor Keyboard switching Touching the MORE button switches the command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2 When you touch the button for a keyboard function the optimum keyboard for input for that function is displayed automatically Command keyboard 1 Command keyboard 2 GG eee esl eo eel e S wje omeo n oe oe oe a oree oef s lt r ne eCG Se 14 96 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 5 Operation procedures 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes Zz O The MELSEC FX list editor has four modes READ WRITE INSERT and DELETE 2 Select an appropriate mode for the intended operation For more information on the mode to select refer to the function operations from subsection 14 4 7 onward 5 5 How to change modes Touch the MODE button 2 Each time you touch this button the mode changes 2 Ow Ze De Touch the button Z The current mode is displayed 1 Q ZZ ote 3 gt
232. e of changing timer counter set values e Only the main program can change the timer counter set values of ANNCPUs AnACPUs and AnUCPUS e When executing multiple programs with the QCPU Q mode and QnACPU setting values of timer counter can be changed only to the program scan execution type program set at the lowest number among them in parameter settings of GX Developer whose file name is displayed on the TC Monitor screen Note that a file to be displayed cannot be changed on the GOT 5 ZO of Q QnACPUs and Z0 and VO of ACPUs e ZO of Q QnACPUs and ZO and VO of ACPUs are displayed as Z and V respectively 14 12 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications 14 2 2 Display Zz O a a k This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to system monitor 2 display T gt Outline until starting the system monitor This subsection describes the flow until the system monitor function screen is displayed after System Se A Z monitor Extended function OS is installed in the GOT g Sw Z Sree Site Szi Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function 7 switch System Monitor set in the Starting from the utility project data Display the utility Touch the special function switch a Zz Op az b z mf A AOO After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Refer to the following manual for how
233. e the gateway function b GT Simulator 2 VersionL Operation Manual z Describes how to simulate the created project data with GT Simulator2 c GT Converter2 Version Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT Converter2 Z O O O 1 1 Features Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices e Multiple languages are displayed using the Unicode2 1 compatible fonts and beautiful characters are drawn using the TrueType and high quality fonts e Two types of display modes are provided 256 color display and monochrome display In the monochrome display 16 scales are used to improve the display e High speed monitoring through high speed serial communication at maximum tare of 115 2 kbps or through bus connection with the PLC e High speed display and high speed touch switch response More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works e The 3MB user memory is included as standard e CF card interface is included as standard e The USB connector is positioned on the GOT front This enables the system startup to be performed more efficiently using FA device setup tool and eliminates the indirect works opening and closing the control panel cable replacement cable rewiring in order to improve the working efficiency Enhanced support of FA setup tools e PLC program transfer and monitoring are possible via the personal computer that is connected to the G
234. e voltage low detection to battery replacement the clock data or D drive Internal SRAM data may become indefinite Adjust the clock and format the D drive Internal SRAM 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 4 7 2 3 Hint Example of alarm output to external device lamp buzzer etc The following describes an example of outputting the battery voltage low signal from a FX series PLC to an external device with system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 K4M20 Battery voltage low M32 Output to external device of PLC Activated the output upon battery voltage low detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected For details of system information refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states 1 Disposal precaut
235. ears as reference Turn the GOT power off D Open the back cover of the GOT D Remove the old battery from the holder 4 Disconnect the old battery connector and insert the new battery connector within 30s Insert the new battery into the holder and close the back cover Turn the GOT power on Check if the battery condition is normal with the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display Connector C Chapter 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 8 8 8 4 Battery 8 4 1 Applicable battery Point 1 Battery life The battery life is approximately 5 years The production date of the optional replacement battery can be confirmed by the lot No marked on the nameplate label affixed on the battery gt LU Nameplate 6 Model name Connector LOT 5 4 Year example 2005 J Month last digit example Apr AI cere rere ees 5 1 Jan to 9 Sep z X Oct Y Nov Z Dec x AE oe T The production date of the battery built in the purchased GOT can be confirmed oz by the production No serial No marked on the GOT main unit aS a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD U Aa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL x MODEL GT1155 QSBD O IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX L SERIAL 540001 BC i aoe E a TRIC CORPORATION N W ig CE 5i 4l lollo loi 14 L
236. eceneceueeaueeceuecaueceueceueesaeecsuecsuecsueesacecgeeeeessuesgas 15 1 1D V2 Operation OF ClO AN ic reget tert a a uc wace ates ple ee A eed 15 1 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS sciaeetercsreauassiaeesidesorscsueesapicianes 16 1 to 16 14 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation cccecceeceseee eens 16 2 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 16 3 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card eee ees 16 4 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned ON 0 cc cecc sec seeceeceeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeneees 16 5 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility ec eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 6 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 8 10 S 0 eer ese era ee ere On fe Ne 16 11 16 5 1 Installation Method Of COreOS 1 0 0 ccc ccc ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeueeeeeeeeaeensenseeaes 16 11 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed A N E o i 16 14 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 to 17 7 VA DANY NSPE CON enana a a T 17 2 ILF COGIC INS DECI OM ninio n n sete aaaainln dyin a sau ta aca tenes 17 2 To CICAMING MENOT osx cc35c tasdjcecnasnestecseetedn ipqenee EE E 17 3 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement ccccccceeeeeeeeee
237. ecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P Rs 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P cable GT09 C30R40202 14P GT09 C100R40202 14P For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C200R40202 14P GT09 C300R40202 14P GT09 C30R20201 9P GT09 C30R20202 15P RS 232 For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C30R20203 9P cable GT09 C30R20204 14P GT09 C30R20205 25P For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product ae Model name Cable length Description name roe caoaasoeT on For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA temperature controller For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m l conversion cable RS 232 ce GT09 C30R20302 9P For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m converter 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Connection cables for Allen Bradley PLCs Sold separately Product ares Model name Cable length Description name RS 232 l J GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley PLC cable Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately Product oe Model name Cable length Description name RS 232 J GT09 C30R20801 9S 3m For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter cable Connection cables for SHINKO indicating controller PLCs Sold separately Product EEE Model name Cable le
238. ection to MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC 2 90U Communication driver connection l MELSECNET H 04 02 MELSECNET 10 Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU PEA Communication driver connection PLC to PLC Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 2 91V MELSECNET H 04 03 network and Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver MELSECNET H 04 04 Communication driver 2 90U CC Link IE Controller Network 04 02 Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A Supporting connection to CC Link IE controller network Communication driver 2 91V CC Link IE Controller Network 04 03 Communication driver 2 96A CC Link IE Controller Network 04 04 Supporting connection to QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU QO01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20UDEHCPU CC Link IE controller network connection Supporting connection to Q170MCPU Supporting connection to CC Link Intelligence device Communication driver 2 90U station CC Link Ver2 ID 04 02 CC Link connection Supporting connection to QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU 7 Communication driver Intelligent device Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 2 91V CC Link Ver2 ID 04 03 station and Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A CC Link Ver2 ID 04 04 Continued to next page App 19 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Sra Version of GT Item Description i Version of OS Des
239. ed in step 2 Perform 1 2 and 3 with drawing software iV Use Communication Settings Standard F Settings CH No I F Driver Standard F 1 f1 MELSEC FX Detail Setting Standard F 2 E Host PC Standard F 3 Host PC Cancel For Communication Settings refer to the following manual gt GT Designer 2 VersionD Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals For installation of Communication driver OS and download of project data refer to the following manual GT Designer 2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer 3 VersionZ Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen 2 When Communication Settings has not been downloaded using drawing software GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD only When Communication Settings has not been downloaded the GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver as the RS422 interface When multiple communication drivers are installed the GOT automatically assigns the first installed communication driver to the RS422 interface To assign the communication driver to the RS 232 interface or to change the already assigned communication driver change the settings in the Communication Settings of the utility screen or in the Communication Settings of drawing software On the unit that only allows a bus con
240. ed to be set to be set D Not available for QnACPU ee Set the PLC number and change the station for The CPU at the list edit destination is QNACPU Set the PLC No access Set the PLC number and change the station for Z The keyword is not input The GO key was pressed without input of the keyword l O i list edit Or select the same station and input Set the PLC No on the keyword input screen q the keyword 26 lt O The PLC parameter was i l a The PLC parameter exceeding the file R Swit changed Restart the GOT system if required OF u register capacity was set Om Read the ladder monitor again The PLC parameter was o f i Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if changed The capacity of the file R register was set bsd required Restart the GOT system a A ZZ The PLC program was edited Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if LON Edit the PLC program l ZRS Read the ladder monitor again required JF Oat QON N O amp Z FEA a DEO lt n ae cpg OLN Q Z xt z a 0 O gt wA 0 LO O m I O LL D O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 83 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions PLC CPU error messages and troubleshooting When the error step read in other mode is performed the error message and the error step of the current error in the ACPU are displayed Error messages erro
241. eecaeeceueeeueesueeseuseeeesseeeseeeenas 10 6 10 2 Communication Detail Settings ccc cecccececeeeceeeeseeeeeeeseeesseeseeeeaeeseeeseeesaneenes 10 9 10 2 1 Communication detail settings FUNCTIONS cece ccccc eee ceeceee eee eeeeeeeseeeeaeeesaeeseeeeaeeeseeeaaeeseeeeges 10 9 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display OPEratiOn ccccceecesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeseneeseeeaeeess 10 9 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings ec cccccceececeeeceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaees 10 10 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP sauuewiapbidasecexwsuneslahenacieuuniewioiebinixeemeinecten a 1 LO Tio VAS DISDIAY OCUINGS tiunaat ei cer tasted alata E AS 11 1 11A Display seting TUNCHONMS sacs 2c sciceetiendseieeencccldi a one arnadh aA aden iecisdeseel Genes 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of display Setting sssrinin a gaa ea a A an E 11 3 11 13 Display setting operations scissioni aa a a a Ea i a Ea aa a ARE 11 4 11 2 Brightness Contrast AGJUStMENL cece eccceeeceeeeseeese esse eeseeeteeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeaes 11 8 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function cece ceeceeececeeeceeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeesseeeaeeesaeeees 11 8 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness CONTIAST ccc cccceecceeeceeeee cece ease eeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeseeseeeseeeseeees 11 8 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation 2322 28 ied evcien miiownsiedotddunwdeteiedoeedldounuteliuded
242. eeceeeceeeeseeeseeesaeeseeesaeesseeegeeeseeeseeeees 14 97 144 Seguente progran display srierair iasa aar ia a a ian a eee alae teers 14 98 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices ccccseccceeccce cece eeceeeceeeeseeeseueceueeseeeseeeseuseseeeseeesaeeeaeeeaaes 14 100 TAA SNUG lt COMIMANG S eaaa aa a a a a a A 14 102 14 4 10 Changing operands set values ccceccceccceeceeececeeeceeeeeeeeceeeseeeseueceeeseeeseueeseeeseeeeeeesnesanees 14 105 NAA Belting COMIN ANGS asaran AA a a E EAA 14 106 14 4 12 Sequence program all clear cccccccecccececeeceeeceueecueesaeecaueeceecaeecuecneceueesueesueesseesaesenaes 14 107 AAAS PLECA SCS aaiae a a a a a a a a ceetccn ces 14 108 14 4 14 Parameter SUING so siieceate ce acts ces seacesnesabeaas Saekbtccnaseebsescasndbeus aie Glaleicendcidd iesanciiaieds abe miesbicieednctsaeees 14 110 NAAR INGVWONOS doce ace oe a cutest ore einai chest eae eee eee ese eaten eeees 14 113 1AA TO RISE MOMMNON acronicu ERa once a a ae a aa ae aa 14 115 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key INPUtisfe eiecccixseHccnsescaniealentelcscives ee elds ave ld slice 14 117 14 4 18 Error messages and corrective ACTIONS cccccccceececeeeceeeeae cece eeseeeeseeeeeeeseeesaeesseeeseeeseeeeanes 14 117 Ne NE CSG aera tan casienece E cata guages asset Gasset a careeeaeines 14 118 V2 TiC GCMOCK NUM GUO Meas A ioaceseht acai a a 14 118 146 Memon CHECK stnasevorssnivenicumseotoeeltnnmsasweubioidinbaundedacosasiususeetnes
243. eee Penn O A 1 Bn A bd by oase A A OEE A 6 INTRODYG TION vcsssacs tas tooenesenegtenantas advaasertateiauahneignastsnatindgngphcuadae neck eoutauheaeabaeamaineawciae A 8 OUTLINE PRECAUTIONS lt csiasatadesaanansacienteenecomaabenciduanetemnantehansetatetamnanesandnaaamaei A 8 CONTENT S rrna A 9 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS wiccdisticeiirccivadeetuannvathsctivaieeitaniedanientenon A 17 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL sicimsorsinccarseoidrarnienaieava E OAO A 22 T 4 maa 4 ee ee ee ee nee eee ee nee 1 1 to 1 5 BEROU OS cree ee ee ee rT ee ene arn eee eee eee een a 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure cccccccecceseceeeceeeceeceeecaeeceeeceeceeesaeeceeeeeesagesaeees 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION cccceeeeeeenes 2 1 to 2 12 2 1 Overal GOMMOULAOMN roande aE EE E 2 1 ZZ COM DORMER EEN ran AE T AE EO A 2 2 PE I EO Bs Eo ia yf en eaa a a a o ee R 2 3 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT111 ec ecccceccceeeceeeseeeseeeceeeeaeeeseeeseeesaeeesaeeseeeeaeeseeeaeeeeses 2 4 SPECIFICATION S wessinniicictineisinnceectaseiceeenisioenain 3 1 to 3 9 3 1 General Specifications cee cccccecceeee sete eeceeeseeeueceeeeneeteeeeeetseeegeeegetsuetaeeseesesteetaeess 3 1 3 2 F CMOlManCe SDeCIICALIONS scceunctannetststcndecevatsaansaveniesageeanchanna nici band andoanetan vavesameuanenaes 3 2 320 BUNEININLEMACE Ss DECIICATONS anres A aden aul tanaadesas eared Meee 3 6 324 Power SUDDIVSPECINCATONS Swit suisinesuisvcaeid
244. eee tte Seine ae tee eer eee ere a eer oe acter eee 8 1 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card cccccccceecceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaueeseesaees 8 2 0 2 Memory Card AGADIOl cessen EO ESTRET ER 8 4 8 2 1T Applicable memory Card AG aDION asrnane aunan a ar a a a ak eases 8 4 8 2 2 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card AdaptOr cceccc cece eeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeees 8 4 93 ODUM FUNCION SON iisaiietuischatrcrasnincatectn cs tateina sau 8 5 6 321 ADDICADIS ODOM TUMCHON DOAN gcse eas Setecceccstet ie noes Lande saeea den E T ever Wee E 8 5 Do LRA MORN C Seat tad inct cas et heer ceatl a Rite gett age atone a ace at eae Peete Dia ea lcued eiaaeecey ete 8 5 8 3 3 How to install or remove the Option function DOAMIC ccccecccceeccececeeeceeeeee cece eesaeeseesseeseeeseeeaees 8 6 0A Balle ny arpei an Ai EOE aE 8 8 84 T Applicable Battery norria a daa e a a a E e a stata laced 8 8 8 42 Battery specM atloNS sei a a a aa aee aa R raeenwee 8 8 8 4 3 Battery replacement PrOCECUre ccccesccssccsscecseeceecceucecueeceeecseesaecsueeeueesueesueesueeesaeeseeesseeeseeesnaes 8 8 O15 PFOLE CIV CC beaut il wasn eea tant avand sale dean sane snatuect a a a 8 10 0 1 Applicable protective SNC silt ase caer ner ncss Hien a a E aS ailine Mawes 8 10 0 2 INS talillG Procedu G ips ea een eidasiers Adee cessaatelgeemialueegeced abe Beans ei ana a EN 8 10 8 6 USB Environmental Protection COV
245. eeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 6 2 6 2 Panel CUMING DIMENSIONS 2v scaccen doscerecesesrenseneiins enar AE E E 6 4 eo VI OUNCE OS IOI i ctctacisstns ceeeaaies ecto tethe seins E en 6 4 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle ccccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaes 6 5 GO INSTA ATIONN POCO iC aras a shania ane atendeawe ate eee eee eae 6 6 T aea N e p A to 1 8 Lal POWESl SUP DIV VV IMIG aise sci eres sienna seniecbd eden abe uevaris sol A snes e te 1 2 LATNING EXAMP Oaa ents ean tetas ia a a at tl ar ari 2nd un Pos ek Seated nate Pec al 1 2 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy ccccccceecceeecaeecaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeges 7 3 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the Pane l cccccccsccceeceeececeeeeeceeceeeceeecsessuesaeecseesansaees 7 6 CoZ FW WINNS dE tascecet ce te isthe See ent cee ne oa nied hie Rail oe ie Lisi weal Mak ete bebe 7 6 T22 OUUSICS TIS pahe ite eee oe dletent tine atu Seep etl siye ed de cas Sets cna a a 7 6 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment ccc eeccceecceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseueeeeeesaeeseeeseueseeeenees 7 7 7 24 Wiring he FG wire of the BUS cable apesi acs chccen duly e e eehaace edo ecnehaiesbheetdeeetes 7 8 8 OPTION oincidiedewsoasaiunwa e xia uathana Gaussian to 8 18 oh ogee OT Renee or nen treet eee tener E on Seo Ce ee ee nT E en are Re ee 8 1 2 ea Fad ty 3 16 ers 6 20h OCE CI amneerieee peace arte apie ir ee m
246. eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeesneees 14 29 14 2 13 Deleting entry EVI COS ites wwtarisatr insider idids umpdustcubuntidaunedaneidainn ASilinanh se Ube s en buadetnndiudiacbe ui iubialordeusee 14 30 WAZ tA AUGI AN OMINOM sat sires settee cela a e a a ueebee tect aes 14 31 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions cecceeeeeeeeeeees 14 31 14 2 16 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation ccccccseccseeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeesaeeenaes 14 35 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeseneeseeeesneens 14 36 14 2 18 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions ccc eee eeee eect eeeeee es 14 36 14 2 19 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation ccccecceseccceeeceeeceeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeaees 14 38 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywordS cccceccceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaees 14 39 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory ccccceeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeess 14 40 14 2 22 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key fUNCTIONS cceeceeeceeeeeeeeeenees 14 40 14 2 23 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation ccccceccceeccseeecececeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeenees 14 42 1A 224 OST ODETI O scccste shcu sa can neceutes a ee sesentca
247. een Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 5 POWER LED NS Blinking in orange green Blown backlight bulb Not lit Power is not supplied For the PC connection refer to the following lt op Zz gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Z x zZ Z O O O 4 1 Front Panel 4 1 4 2 Back Panel 4 ts A Remark Connecting the back panel For the connection to the controller PLC microcomputer board bar code reader RFID etc or PC refer to the following 1 GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD e Hardware version GT1155 QTBD A GT1155 QSBD A to D GT1150 QLBD Ato C Battery cover opened fom fom co oa ca Lj co 7 ca ca ca co Power supply terminal layout CY 2avdc FG Fy io R A ET 12 13 3 11 HO ON ee ead cover opened e Compatibility with the serial multi drop connection GT1155 QTBD C GT1155 QSBD F GT1150 QLBD F Battery cover opened CF card cover opened 4 2 4 2 Back Panel No Name Specifications For communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board bar code 1 RS 232 interface reader RFID etc or personal computer OS installation project data Po Name RSzc0inetace download transparent D sub 9 pin male z 2 TE e controller PLC microcomputer board etc 3
248. een appears blank CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option function board on to from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board or battery or operating the reset switch wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity The static electricity can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Securely connect the option fu
249. eens created within drawing software can be individually selected or overlapped for the display For details refer to the following lt gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 VersionL Screen Design Manual Utility Screen The utility screen is a factory drawn horizontal screen that cannot be edited Installing the BootOS or Standard monitor OS in the GOT from drawing software the utility screen is displayed The utility screen has options for Brightness contrast Memory check etc and the format is horizontal only For details refer to the following K gt Chapter 9 to Chapter 15 SYSTEM iu gt ma gi gt EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION About Manual The following manuals related to GOT 1000 series are available Refer to each manual in accordance with the intended use 1 Installation of the software programs Drawing Data transfer For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT refer to the following manuals GT Designer2 Version _ Basic Operation Data Transfer GT Designer2 Version _ Manual Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version _ GT Designer3 Version _ Screen Design Manual Screen Design Manual Functions Fundamentals Purpose ee Installing product on PC Detailed Creating projects Detailed
250. ems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of Allen Bradley PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by GE Fanuc Automation Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Schneider Electric SA Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Siemens AG Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co Ltd Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yamatake Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC INSTRUMENT INC Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2 Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that a
251. en UTILITY FUNCTION Check that the selected communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is assigned Z L S zZ S O W Qo LZ xE W Eu AT o Host PC After checking touch the OK button o eao ooo Q ZZ Touch the X button The GOT restarts lt 6 32 aE Definition of Che O None aoln LiFA device S Barcode 9PC Communication driver 9 z Point aan es EW 1 Multi channel function or GT11 can install up to 4 communication drivers Sok However multiple communication drivers cannot be used at the same time ane Multi channel function cannot be used 2 Display of communication driver z Communication drivers are displayed in the order of installation z To change the assigned communication driver to one that is not listed change the D A A Communication Settings of drawing software and download to the GOT ms Lo we O Lu 1E O LL Lu 09 H O Z O 59 2 gt Za Ho OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 1 Communication Setting 10 7 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting Channel number setting operation Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set Communication Setting Rote 56 7 8 9 bel lt gt OLN 213 4 Camel Enter D The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed Keyboard
252. en Design os Manual Functions Cus W S NTD SAD oe OLU Read the PLC and display the sequence program E OLLER wit e 2 AEE Eaka 2c pres Pen aee e f feer frees is a i W J0 LO When no keyword is entered When a keyword is entered 1 in the target PLC in the target PLC Enter the keyword Subsection 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input Initial information displayed in the display area MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O PRESS MODE KEY On On 1 H isplay the utili ne Point 7 1 How to display the utility 42 For how to display the utility refer to the following Section 9 3 Utility Display 2 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The A list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 55 14 3 4 Display 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input If a Keyword is registered in the ACPU when the connected ACPU or the ACPU PLC No No corresponding to the operation is changed the GOT requests for input of the registered keyword Input the keyword registered in the ACPU and press the key If a keyword is not registered in the ACPU this operation is not required Procedure for inputting the keyword for the MELSEC A list editor lt Display gt lt Key operation gt lt Desc
253. en the GOT and the PLC on GX 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 Developer Multiple GT 11 Connection with multiple GT11s 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 connection External I O Extended function OS Supporting connection to external I O device 2 58L External I O Operation Panel x x O devices connection 03 03 Supporting connection to the RFID Extended function OS RFID connection 2 73B x O controller RFID 03 09 1 The GT15 will support the GOT multidrop connection soon Added GT Designer2 functions 1 For GT16 are Version of GT i Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Function for GT All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Designer2 earlier are available Project data matching is available between data stored in Project data matching 2 96A the personal computer and data opened with GT Designer2 Screen preview Enables switching screens in the Screen Preview window 2 96A The setting to adjust the order of displaying objects on the Auxiliary setting GOT to that of the overlapped objects on GT Designer2 is 2 96A added 2 For GI15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT 11 a Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 GOT1000 11 Ethernet download Downloading the project data via Ethernet the Downloading the project data via Ethernet data via Ethernet 2 20K Standard monitor OS Sta
254. er The following connector conversion adapter is applicable Model Contents GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection 8 10 2 Installing procedure Q Turn the GOT power off 2 Connect the connection conversion adapter to the RS 422 485 interface on the GOT D Fix the connection conversion adapter to the GOT using the provided M3 tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 8 18 8 10 Connector Conversion Adapter 8 10 1 Applicable connector conversion adapter 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Lo Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and PLC screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc Zz O Z D LL gt E Refer to the following for the utility function list gt Section 9 2 Utility Function List CZ O lt OM Cz a a a Sree 9 1 Utility Execution ie OZN For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the C drive Flash memory Sz There are following three types for the installing Standard monitor OS methods 10y Zg RE 1 Drawing software GOT Soe Via USB interface or RS 232 interface e Installed directly from the drawing software ep O x gt Z gt GT Designer2 Fig GT Designer3 BootOS or Standard monitor OS installation aba 2 Drawing software CF card
255. er of the selected bit device are highlighted NetNo O ST 7133857 19 ier Sa BPE E a Cy Or TES TEMEN OR NetNo GJST FF CFUNo 0 The status of the selected bit device is switched from off to on 14 22 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices 2 Quick test of word devices Operation example Change the device value of word device W200 from 43 to 100 z Conditions Data range 16 bits device value display format decimal number 3 DEW ICE MONITOR CZ O lt Touch the device 25 SiO you want to change siz the device value aan OZN Q ZZ LON ZES hit ae aie a ICE 200 VLAD 100l Enter a new device value by operating Ont the key window 2 7 8 4 A B A In this example enter 100 For the operation of the key window 4 5 6 lt see the following Subsection O i 3 F F 4 pp 7 Subsection 14 2 6 Key window Fea setting columns and operation plese lt a 0 Enter Del AGL meere Som i ofo x Z Nei aS PEs 0 DEC DEVICE 200 100 A op Tb 9 Al Blaly oe LL OW 28 4 5 6 0 DI lt i gt MATAKA 0 44 Enter af x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DEVICE ENTRY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF Continued to next page INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 23 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices
256. er2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed Z O H When CoreOS cannot be installed check the following contents 2 5 When CoreOS cannot be installed even after the following contents are checked there may be a ke hardware problem Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center Description Action Z e Check that the CF card access switch of GOT is ON 2 The installation of CoreOS is not executed after the If it is OFF turn it ON Sui CF card is insreted to GOT e Memory card write from drawing software may not be normally completed S49 Execute memory card write from drawing software again ae Sw The following message is displayed on GOT GOT main unit is breakdown Sw GOT error Contact your local sales office Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center The following message is displayed on GOT CF card is broken CF card error Installation will be canceled Check e Format the CF card and execute the installation again Z whether the CF card can be used e Replace the CF card Aer gt EO Either the wrong type of GOT was selected for the Core OS write setting of the G2 The following message is displayed on GOT drawing software or the data on the CF card are broken Gila QO Wrong operation system Make sure that the correct type of GOT is selected and execute Core OS write i again
257. erence page Carries out write read check of the Built in CF card Flash memory and Internal Memory check SRAM 14 119 Password 5920 fixed Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 123 Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 14 128 Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit 16 dots x 16 dots Touch panel Check 14 130 Carries out RS 422 and RS 232 connecting target confirmation CPU communication check and the RS 232 self loopback check hardware check of 14 132 the RS 232 interface I O check 14 118 14 5 Self Check 14 5 1 Self check function 14 6 Memory Check Zz O 7 z 14 6 1 Memory check function gt z The memory check function carries out the write read check of the Standard CF card Flash memory and 5 Internal SRAM Function Contents O Checks whether the memory Standard CF card of the A drive can be read written E A drive memory check Ow normally 220 gt A C drive memory check Checks whether the memory Flash memory of the C drive can be read written normally Smi zW D drive memory check Checks whether the memory Internal SRAM of the D drive can be read written normally See 14 6 2 Display operation of memory check Zz LON Main menu Debug amp self check Self check zz gt Section 9 3 Utility Display mii Main Menu Debug amp self check Debug self check Self check OOM Memory check
258. es 17 4 TAS BACKIIGNE SNU CTC CUOM 5 2 8asinteetas oc sce auras sate caaarn econ tees cota eieaenat dane 17 7 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm ccccecccseccsececeeeceeeseeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeseeeaes 17 7 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM E EA E A T E E ERE 18 1 to 18 11 LOE OF Contents DISDIAY sirra O N EOE 18 1 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm ccccccceccceseceeeceeeeeueeceeeseeesaeeseeeseeeeseeesaues 18 3 18 3 Troubleshooting in BUS Connection eee eccceecceececeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeesees 18 7 183 Eocating SmMonpoSliON S ieseni e a a a a hora a aA 18 7 19 3 2 F nher locating error DOSINIONS isireriiaeiia ie aai a a a a e otai 18 8 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting c ccccseccceeeceeeceeeceecceeeeueecaeecacecaueceueesseecaeessuecseessueeaas 18 9 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring ccccccceccceecceeeeeeeeceeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeas 18 10 tSo otaning CGO Tenri a a a a ee a 18 11 TOVENAAR N E 18 11 18 5 2 Communication from drawing software to the GOT ccc cceccceecceeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeseeeseeeaeeeaees 18 11 APPENDICE Saririk App 1 to App 55 Appendix 1 Extemal DIMENSIONS senseri a E E App 1 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility FUNCtION ec cecc eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees App 10 Appendix 3 Transportation PreCautions cccccccccecceeceeceeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeseeeaeeees App 16 Appendi
259. es by touching the key 14 18 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display 6 O 5 This subsection describes how to switch the display format and comment no comment display gt The Entry Monitor window is taken here as an example to describe the specification of a monitor station and a monitor device when the system monitor function is executed The procedure for switching the display format DEC HEX and comment display when another item is selected Example of switching when the entry monitor is selected 6 Switching the display format from DEC to HEX T Switching no comment display to comment display Z20 DEVICE MONITOR Ze OF u OZV Q ZZ LON 2ES JAKE A jp ately Switching the display format from DEC to HEX Switching no comment display to comment display O z DEVICE MONITOR SETE DEWICE MONITOR Lya NetNo OlST FFICPUNo 0 NetNo 0 8T FF CPUNo 0 ma lt n Sa oe O lt Q Z lt x z 7 a gt LU 0 LO DEVICE MONITOR SETI DEVICE MONITOR 1 NetNo O ST FFICPUNe 0 NetNo Q ST FFICPUNe G J Touch a EXECUTE x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O NetNo GJST FFICPUNe 0 NetNo GIST FF CPUNe 0 DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF products units Le H pig AF SC Mel 135 R AG Link status w la G Product line E INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDAR
260. ess LED switch Make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be installed or removed even during the GOT power on 1 m ACCESS OFF ON CF card GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Push in the CF card eject button of the GOT to eject the CF card and then remove the CF card eject button Point 7 Precautions for removing the CF card 1 While the CF card access LED is on do not install remove the CF card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the CF card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card 8 1 CF Card 8 3 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card SYSTEM OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE Zz O x l x H o zZ 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor e The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card Type Il Install the memory card adaptor to a PC equipped with a PCMCIA interface to write the OS or project data on the CF card from the PC or load alarm history data from the CF card to the PC Refer to the following for the details related to CF card L Section 8 1 CF Card 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor The following memory card adaptor is applicable Model GT05 MEM ADPC Contents Adaptor converting from CF
261. est If necessary switch the screen display z operation C Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the z gt Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test display format DEC HEX and a operation of monitor devices comment no comment display Ay mle LO If necessary perform the following 1 Entering monitor devices Enter the name and number of the devices you want to monitor one by one L Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Deleting entry devices lt _ gt Subsection 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices Test operation lt gt Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O Point f If more than eight devices are registered 6 whe You can register up to eight entry devices On If more than eight devices are registered the oldest ones will be deleted one by Sz one and the eight latest entry devices will be monitored mi OO If necessary delete unnecessary entry devices and re enter ones you want to monitor INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 29 14 2 12 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices This subsection describes how to delete entry devices Deleting entry devices with the system monitor function executed is described below DEVICE MONITOR NetNe GO ST When specifying the device name you want to delete When deleting devices at a time DEV
262. etNo GIST FFICPUNe 0 16 ent lH ele products units k RE H 0064 H G4135F3C DW DN FJ Le Le Link status x 0 O e line E 1 Switching the display format Word device values are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers on the entry batch TC and BM monitors 2 Device comment display Comments written in the controller are displayed when a controller device is monitored Other stations can be monitored You can monitor other stations in the data link system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system For further information about the connection forms that can be monitored see the following gt gt Subsection 14 2 1 System configuration 14 4 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications Z O O 5 System configuration This subsection describes the controller names and the connection forms between the GOT and the controller that can be covered by the system monitor function For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following Z O GOT1000 Series Connection Manual T 30 Sree 7 St Target controller OF uw Controller QCPU Q mode Q series motion controller CPU Q QScPU bn O QnACPU asz Oy ACPU QCPU A mode A series motion controller CPU Bo FXCPU Remote 1 O station MELSECNET H system ep 1 The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU The test operation is not
263. etting the GOT type controller Wizard type and communication settings when 2 18U O creating a new project Settings on the Script Edit dialog are Screen script available for screen script and project 2 27D x project script script Setting of maintaining screen numbers of the screens being displayed System ie eh ibaa sige 2 27D O Information during screen switching is added Auxiliary setting The setting to adjust the order of displaying objects on the GOT to that of 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 O the overlapped objects on GT Designer2 is added Supports expansion reduction when 2 32J O multiple objects and shapes are selected E Supports automatically zooming in and xpansion Reduction out objects and figures suitable for the screen size when the GOT type is 2 73B O changed to a GOT type with different resolution Function for capturing the specified range Screen capture 2 43V O and loading to GT Designer2 e Interval of magnification specification has been changed e buttons have been added Zoom 2 43V O e Zoom in zoom out operations using the Ctrl key and Mouse wheel have been added Lines to align figures and objects are Guidelines displayed when arranging a placed figure 2 90U O or object Holds the previous downloaded drive OO 2A 47Z O e Enables updating BootOS without the standard monitor OS updated when only BootOS is already installed on the GOT a i 2
264. f CoreOS Z S seeen anar a o Write CoreOS from drawing software to the T ommunicate wit emory Car gt Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write CF ca rd Points of caution Sa For details on the operation method of 5 eee drawing software refer to the following Do not turn OFF or reset GOT during CoreDS installation to avoid failing ail of installation restart GOT after turning OFF m a n u a alaa PERRA E followings after GOT is restarted 5 Boome Required other 0S ES GT Designer2 Version a Basic 5 emeve al urls cornes to etendon et teloe CaS tion Operation Data Transfer Manual 22 LZ GT Designer3 Version O Screen Ste a Design Manual Fundamentals SZO Memory card Empty area size 1546144 kbyte Install Close a zz LON ES Check that the power of GOT main unit is ra No OFF and then mount the CF card to GOT OOM After mounting it turn ON the CF card access switch Op O x Zr E Turn ON the GOT power Fues AO CorelS Install Ver 02 07 00 6 After the power is turned on CoreOS Ee tE Q far m installation execution screen is Opa p O lt Corells automatically displayed after a brief RAE AEE y alsplay Lc Gi OF ae 4 ete eu eh Bit HUT a fa Z N YOU cut the CorelS installation The internal memory is initialized and return to x the state before factory shipment Turn off the T memory card access switch before installation 7p If You do not install the CoreJS turn off the GOT O
265. fied step number is a timer T or counter C set value or the operand of an applied instruction that command section is displayed at the head 14 98 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 7 Sequence program display Display scrolling one screen at a time 1 Operation mo 60 Read mode 2 Example Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time lt WRITE gt lt READ gt Set the READ mode Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 7 Sequence program display 14 99 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices Displays a command or device by searching it in sequence program from Step 0 Command search 1 Operation q 9 9 ae et a A a Wi i es ee ee dl MODE Select the command Input the device name and gt GO GCO 1 to search for l 1 device number GO GO Read mode te l l l l M M 1 If the command you want to search for is not on the keyboard touch the key to switch to the other keyboard When searching for an applied instruction touch the key and input the applied instruction number When searching for a label touch P or 1 and
266. filter However as with all EMC situations the more correctly applied precautions the better the systems Electro magnetic Compatibility The ferrite recommended is a TDK ZCAT3035 1330 or similar The ferrite should be placed as near to the 24V DC terminals of the GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ and GT1150 QLBDA as possible which should be within 75mm of the GOT terminal S INPUT me Up to 75mm D AAL 5 10 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 5 3 2 Method to connect the power wire and ground wire 5 3 3 Grounding the cable Use the bus connection cable to ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed m Lu gt 1 Ground the braided shield portion of the cable to the control panel 2 with the cable clamp AD75Ck Braided shield Z O x s 0 UW LL 26 D O Cable clamps For the cable clamp attaching details refer to AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual lt IB 68682 gt x O m im a For GT15 CLJEXSS 1 and GT15 CLJBS o Ground the ground wire to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section Bus connection cable Lu lt Z
267. for the keyword input of Y is displayed Select Keyword or Keyword and Customer keyword When the key is touched the selection is completed and the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed Registration Selection keyword Keyword and Customer keyword Selection Details When Keyword is selected Only keyword can be registered When Keyword and Customer Keyword is The Customer Keyword can be registered after registration of the keyword selected 1 For details on FX PLC compatible with customer keyword refer to the following Point The customer keyword allows the user to clear the protection set by a keyword However the protection cannot be deleted 10 12 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings O When the registration is selected or the Regist key is touched on a PLC not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed in a pop up window When the keyword is input and the key is touched registration is completed When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for the registration the UTILITY FUNCTION Customer Keyword entry screen of is displayed For the keyword 8 digits from 0 to 9 or A to F must be set keyword Please input keyword e Registration conclition a iii All Protect Z H L S Z S O Ti Qo LZ Hia Lu Fw AT Q Zz Op AL Ente
268. function PC Remote Operation 03 13 the GOT using the RGB display function Number of screens that can be called on Set overlay screen GI11 is extended to the same as GI15 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Up to 2047 screens Continued to next page The number of records that can be set is changed to 2000 Hard copy function Extended function OS RFID 04 03 App 45 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series i Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Q Z Screen calling setting with dragging is lt g g gging 243V O ui possible Zz ESS Specifying of placement position Front a5 Back for the basic and called screens is 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O ae Set overlay screen TA possible SZ Disable background colors of overlay screen when setting an overlay screen 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 O can be set O Function for changing device value with He Test function 2 09K Standard monitor OS 02 02 O wy displaying test window Be Oo Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 200A Standard monitor OS 01 00 H x COs W lt lt project file 8U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Jo o O Word device values can be converted into data in the specified data type and the 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O Project Script GOT can read or write the data Data typ
269. g Z gt 4 until the CPU communication check ends normally mee G2 Sa oe O lt Q Z lt x z CPU comunicati 7 C When the CPU communication check ends its result a CPU communication check D No error is notified by dialog Fhe If the CPU communication check ends normally the TO dialog notifying of the normal termination mentioned 1 left is displayed If touch the button in the dialog after lt pr confirming the result returns to I O check rm ok O LL l LU 09 If the dialog mentioned left is displayed after O SPU ication check CPU communication check i j i i Let selecting or during CPU communication check The following cause confirm the following Connection error H error l z parameter setting error e No misconnection with CPU O a itis ee lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual On e No hardware error ez qr _ok L GOT1000 Series Connection Manual ae e No missettings of parameter Section 10 2 Communication Detail Settings If touch the button in the dialog after confirming the result returns to I O check INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 10 I O Check 14 133 14 10 3 I O check operation Self loopback RS232 communication check rror The following cause Connection error H W error parameter setting error Restart CPU communication check Executing now CPU communication check No error Restart 14 134 14 10 I O Check 14 10 3 I O che
270. g after downloading project data change the setting at Communication Detail Setting described in this section For Communication Settings using drawing software refer to the following manual K gt GT Designer 2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Display items or setting items of communication detail settings depend on the type of communication driver installed in the GOT For the setting contents of each driver refer to the following K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals This section describes the items that can be set using only the utility screen 1 Detail setting of Host Modem On the communication detail setting screen of the Host Modem communication settings between GOT and modem and model operation can be executed Communication Detail setting PL connection type Transmission Speed BPS Data Bit BIT Stop Bit BIT Parity Init AT command Modem operation IE 10 10 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Item Description Setting range Select the connection method to the personal Host PC Host Modem computer lt Default Host PC gt Set the transmission speed when 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 communicating lt Default 115200 gt Data Bit Se
271. g system information To avoid any screen touch operation by the user who misunderstands it is in screen saving mode install an external alarm and interlock the loads that would cause danger For details of the system information refer to the following C gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 VersionO Screen Design Manual Fundamentals _ 2 3 Hint Example of alarm output to external devices such as lamp or buzzer The following provides an example of outputting the backlight shutoff detection signal from a FX Series PLC to an external device using system information Condition The Written Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b14 D36b14 Backlight shutoff detection System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a backlight shutoff Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 K4M20 Backlight shutoff detection M34 Output to external device of PLC Activated the output upon battery shutoff detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected Point Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 17 7 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM
272. ge 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuatio
273. git for a sign are displayed Display example 123456789 Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are displayed Display example H ABCDE123 T Up to 16 devices can be entered when the data range is word 16 bits Up to eight devices can be entered when the data range is two word 32 bits For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered 8 Device name GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version L Screen Design Manua Fundamentals 9 ata rano DW Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module z Nothing displayed Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module When no comments are displayed Up to 16 devices can be displayed at a time monitor module one word 4 Bit device ON OFF 6 Word device value Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time monitor module two word 10 Monitor display area i i i When comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time monitor module one word Up to four devices can be displayed at a time monitor module two word 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 34 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 14 2 16 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation Z O O Z
274. gnal line Wiring duct Separator Wiring the power line and communication cable inside the duct 7 6 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on off signals from certain control equipment referred to as load hereafter such as no fuse breakers electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and induction motors surge noise interference is suspected If this problem happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load i If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference O Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC inductive load z 7 Keep the ground cable and communication cable away a from each other nS MO L Load 09 Z O lt AC Place the surge killer near the load gt Output equipment such as PLC output unit Q D Remedy for DC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away w from each other z A z L Load gt DC Place the surge killer near the load Output equipment such as PLC output unit mt A O Lu Zz O q ep Z Z O E A O 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 1 7 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS cable To connect the QCPU motion controller CPU Q series and G
275. gt Opening screen time Figs set lt At factory shipment 5 seconds gt WO L 0 to 60 minutes sad The period from the user stops the touch panel oak a lt At factory shipment 0 minutes gt SIZE Screen save time operation till the screen save function starts can be OLnH When set to 0 the function becomes set invalid Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously ON OFF Q Screen save backlight Da 2 at the screen save function start can be specified lt At factory shipment OFF gt k Seii Japanese o O gt English uS E English mE Confirmation of the current language and switching PC Chi Simplified Language language can be performed regarding with the inese Simplified language displayed by utility and dialogue guag play y y g JET Korean m O Deutsch German H Factory setting User selected language H H i O Battery alarm display Wineiner to display system alarm when the volage of the lt At factory shipment OFF gt D GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified The brightness or contrast can be adjusted Brightness Contrast L gt Section 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 5 uH x O Invert colors I m Om Ch User creation screen and utility screen can be setto ON OFF 2 GT1150 be highlighted or not lt At factory shipment OFF gt Zo Ho Oa If setting O the title screen is not hidden The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on
276. gt and remove a CF card Wo J LO 4 After the CF card access switch is turned Corels nstal l ver 02 01 09 E off the installation of CoreOS is started S Lu ES a EEEL dE lran 2D RSL IT CTE EL 0 O 5 ton turn off the power supply E Don t push the reset button m H Cores A HIEP TT Q Installing Corels O Phase a ae Progress 6 H a JT Sa e TE 12 OO ap OF Zz TO OoOoz ZEOQ OS OTa LE Jg lt LO ED OSes ZOV 16 5 CoreOS 16 12 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS 16 13 Cores Instal ver 02 01 00 E T LEL Fee frie Re Bt U CFA PRR oT CEL Installation is completed Turn OFF GOT and remove CF card Phase Progress EROS f VARI L OE EE o Please install the Standard 0S Boot0S Version O2 017 00 E 16 5 CoreOS 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS When the installation is completed the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed Check that the message is displayed and turn the GOT power OFF When the installation is completed the power LED blinks Remove the CF card after turning the power OFF D If the power is turned on again the screen shown on the left is displayed The GOT goes into its factory shipped condition As necessary install each OS Standard monitor OS communication driver etc or download a project data For the installation method of each OS or the download method of project data refer to the following manual lt gt GT Design
277. gt WRITE or L INSERT mode With a or v move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command 14 102 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 9 Writing commands b Inputting LD X000 Z O T ae eee ee I E Stop the FX PLC 2 a in 5 LL lt READ gt D mone S co gt x E ea a Set the Sy L INSERT ija mode 9zW With 4 or x move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command Q ZZ LOW c Inputting OUT T100 K19 AA ae gH L aoln Stop the FX PLC 4 O gt Z gt 4 lt READ gt Find Lure OO lt m gt 5 OUT gt T gt 100 9 AE Sot OLN Set the lt WRITE gt WRITE or a L INSERT z mode z se K Ee gt amp O with a or v move the u cursor to the position to LO overwrite insert the command 4 x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 103 14 4 9 Writing commands Writing applied instructions 1 Operations os For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode I 1 Input the device name and gt e device number 4 D double word command and P pulse execution format command can also be input after the applied instruction number is input Inputting in the order P D is also possible 2 When a command specifies mult
278. he present val f a P o oe i Subsection 14 2 14 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m Subsection 14 2 17 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memor j P n i g Subsection 14 2 21 of a specified intelligent function module A A x x Changing the present value of yi word devices and buffer memory A Changing the present value of TC Subsection 14 2 24 Changing device values by 2 i j Subsection 14 2 8 performing a quick test A renee toes Displaying word device and buffer Subsection 14 2 7 hexadecimal 4 2 3 The present value of Z cannot be changed None of the connection forms supports V When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU whose date shown on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B device comments cannot be displayed Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 2 System Monitor 14 7 14 2 1 Specifications UTILITY FUNCTION INTERFACE COMMUNICATION SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND x O Lu I LL Lu o H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 3 When the GOT is connected to a ACPU QCPU A mode or A series motion controller CPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC
279. he status without a battery for 30s or longer the data in the D drive Internal SRAM becomes indefinite possibly disabling data writing If the GOT is left in the status without a battery for 30s or longer format the D drive Internal SRAM 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 5 1 Format function of memory card 13 30 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 5 3 Format operation of memory card Frogram data iMemory card format elect Drive A Built in CF card D Internal SRAM Programdata Memory card format Please Input password I Caution lf execute format operation all data on the CF card will be initialized Please do not remove CF card while formatting Format the CF card T Format now T 13 31 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 5 3 Format operation of memory card To format the CF card install the CF card to the GOT first For the CF card installation removal method refer to the following lt Section 8 1 CF Card D Touch and select the drive to format by Select Drive if touch button the password input screen is displayed Type 11 11 1 1 and touch the key The dialog box shown on the left will appear The passwo
280. he time out error occurred during communication 1 Confirm the cable omission and PLC status 2 Put COM instruction when A QnA or QCPU is connected and the PLC scanning is long Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received Confirm the cable omission status of the PLC and the transmission speed of the computer link 1 Station numbers other than master local station are specified at the CC Link connection via G4 2 Accessed PLC CPUs other than QCPU Confirm the station number of the monitor screen data The operation which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU was performed Stop the PLC CPU The memory cassette installed in PLC CPU is in the state protected with EPROM or E PROM Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU The key word is set in PLC CPU Cancel the key word The file register of QNACPU and the device beyond the outside range of buffer memory was specified Correct the monitor device by setting file register of PLC CPU 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 5 18 6 Error code 480 500 510 522 Error message Action One or more channel for PLC and host microcomputer connection Ch 1 Communication channel not set a to 5 is not allocated by drawing software or utility Set channel number on Utility gt Set the channel by drawing software or utility Warning Built i
281. hips and wire offcuts entering the GOT i Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting z and terminal screws in the specified torque range z Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction or Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit This chapter describes the wiring to the GOT power supply section 1 For the connection with a PLC refer to the following 2 lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual M QO 2 For the dimensional drawing of connection cables refer to the following 2 gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions Remark General preventive measures against noise gt E There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and z Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to lt the following 3 points S 1 Protecting against noise 7 a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high power drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electrom
282. ht refer to the following L Section 3 2 Performance Specifications 17 1 i 17 1 Daily Inspection Daily inspection items i Inspection E Inspection Item Method Action GOT mounting status Check for loose Securely mounted Retighten screws within the mounting screws specified torque range m Z lt Lu O Z lt Z m H lt x INSPECTION i LL Loose terminal screws pees Screw Not loose Retighten terminal screws 2 with screwdriver D Connection Proximate solderless wi 2 Visual check Proper intervals Correct Be status terminals Ons rod i ixi age screws D Dirt on protection sheet on Dirt on protection sheet sheet Visual check check Not Not outstanding Replace with new one sage 3 status Foreign material Visualcheck No eee matter Remove dean attachment sticking o O Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure a LL gt Section 8 5 Protective Sheet a 17 2 Periodic Inspection Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed Inspection Item Inspection Method Action i Display section 0 to 50 C Ambient Make measurement Display section 0 to 50 C temperature With thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C For use in control panel temperature inside control i a ah Ambient OAS 1 RH panel is ambient humidity Measu
283. ice value 5 Displays a device No 6 Displays a device name 7 Displays the initial I O signal of the module For further information about items 1 to 7 shown above see the page that follows 14 40 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the BM Monitor screen Zz O Key switch Function z Activates the Quick test operation 2 TEST i gt Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices Z Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system 5 MENU monitor function C 3 Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the BM Z FORM Monitor screen or comment no comment display Sa Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Z20 LZ Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices e ob Entering monitor devices Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and OZD devices Test operation lt gt Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered the
284. ices that must be installed and used within conductive z control boxes Please use the Multi Drop Connection Unit while installed in conductive shielded control a boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the Multi Drop Connection Unit LU lt x eZ z LL gt D or Q O LL Zz O z x Z 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 17 8 9 4 Installation 8 10 Connector Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S type connector conversion adapter enables an easy crossover wiring for the multi drop conncted GOTs For the wiring between the connector conversion adapter and the controller refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Point 1 GOTs supporting the connector conversion adapter The followings are the GOTs compatible with the connector conversion adapter GOT Hardware version GT1155 QTBD Hardware version C or later GT1155 QSBD GT1155 QLBD Hardware version F or later 2 Checking method of hardware version Confim the hardware version with the products rating plate se MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SERIAL 540001 BC B Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 8 10 1 Applicable connector conversion adapt
285. ied The 6 x 8 dot font 12 dot numerical HQ font 16 dot numerical HQ font are displayed as Standard monitor OS 2 The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data 3 Each folder is created automatically at installation download and upload of each file 4 The folder name and file name can be set at System Setting in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings by GOT Type Setting in Common GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 13 5 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 4 Display file 13 2 OS Information Z O mm s 13 2 1 Function of OS information gt a i i 7 ke Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS PC communication driver and Option D OS by which each drive A Built in CF card C Flash memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Ze H lt Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 8 13 9 on a ee All files written in the A drive Built in CF card can be installed in the C drive Flash 13 10 Sr nsta memory SER OZN All files in the C drive Flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in CF Upload 13 11 card Displays the property file name data size type version and creation date
286. ified object does not exist or out of range Station No for monitor device is wrong Q Z lt O ZO Z Em Action aT The number of objects of the screen to be displayed is too large and the 1 system work area cannot be secured Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the following K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual LU lt x Ze yyy H SH gt xo wa wz U lt X lt j lt x GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals When cycle is ON and when cycle is OFF the number of objects used exceeds 100 Decrease the number of objects The project data is not downloaded to the built in flash memory Download the project data to the built in flash memory APPENDICES The monitor device of the object is not set Set the monitor device of the object The comment file does not exist Create the comment file and download to GOT The error occurred when reading a continuous device Correct the device 1 Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project data 2 Specified base screen window screen is out of the permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum points 1024 points Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm hist
287. igner2 Q Z lt Communication driver E Supporting connection to CC Link Via G4 2 90U Za CC Link G4 04 02 lt 2 Supporting connection to QQOUJCPU QOOUCPU a Suit CC Link connection Via Communication driver ZA Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 2 91V T2 G4 CC Link G4 04 03 2s and Q2ZOUDEHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A CC Link G4 04 04 WI Communication driver Bs Supporting connection to the Ethernet 2 90U Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC we E x o gt CRnD 700 04 02 oig Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Communication driver aaa Ethernet connection Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20UDEHCPU 2 91V Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 03 Communication driver 2 96A Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 04 Supporting connection to Q170MCPU Communication driver OMRON PLC Supporting connection to OMRON PLC connection OMRON SYSMAC 04 02 KEYENCE PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 90U connection KEYENCE KV700 1000 04 02 KOYO El PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to KOYO El PLC 2 90U connection KOYO KOSTAC DL 04 02 Communication driver SHARP PLC connection Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2 90U SHARP JW 04 02 Communication driver 2 90U TOSHIBA PROSEC T V 04 02 o m O m Z m A Q lt TOSHIBA PLC Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC
288. ine the display on the 4th line only will shift by a single character position to the left each time the user touches a key Each character that goes out of the display area by the left shift operation is retained in the memory Lo The user has entered DMOVP K2147483647 D1000 You can move W in the specified direction right or left with the or key Display of an error message An error message will appear on the 4th line of the display area An error message on the display is cleared when you press any key Then the display resumes the state before the appearance of the error message When an error message is displayed take action according to the procedure described in the following section 3 Subsection 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 7 Display format of the display area 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions Z O Make valid the upper or lower function of keys available for two different purposes to operate the MELSEC A z list editor 1 Switching the upper and lower functions of mode keys z In general the upper functions of mode keys are valid i To make the lower function of a mode key valid touch the key and then the mode key During switching of the upper and lower functions of mode keys the mark on the valid keys z remains amp T Ze 2 Switching the upper and lower functions of command device keys zr Switch the upper and lower functions of c
289. ing connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K x x O Q173HCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 Communication driver Supporting connection to FX3U series 2 18U x O MELSEC FX 02 02 i PEEN Communication driver Supporting automatic system switching 2 32J A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 x O MELDAS C 03 00 for QCPU redundant system o Communication driver Communication driver name has been 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 x O changed 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 x Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELDASC6 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 Communication driver Direct connection Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 x O to CPU 03 09 2 73B Communication driver Supporting settings for the number of A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 retries the timeout time and delay time 03 09 x O MELSEC FX 03 09 Communication driver Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU 2 77F A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 x O and Q26UDHCPU 03 12 Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU AAO x Oo 2 82L A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 03 13 QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QS001CPU xlo fx x Communication driver Supporting connection to FX3G series 2 90U x lt O MELSEC FX 04 02 Continued to next page App 23 Appendix 4 List of Functions Adde
290. ings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible Reference Function Contents page Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock Clock setting 12 2 data of PLC CPU connected with GOT Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data 12 4 GOT internal battery voltage l l a Displays GOT internal battery voltage status 12 5 u 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting Main menu Time setting amp display Section 9 3 Utility Display Time Setting amp display Time setting amp display Set the Clock settings O2 07 2005 12 34 56 THUIN and Time settings GOT internal battery Morma voltage status 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Z O O Z 5 LL gt Z H D Z O z Ow Z Sree Zhe H OEB u OZV Q ZZ Op Zaz ate Oath QOV CLOCK SETTINGS gt 3 ro z H L a gt H m Z In FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of PLC CPU connected with GOT Setting Contents Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of PLC CPU Adjust Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designerz2 Same as setting in GOT
291. inietasdsoandindsdlndinagebieudwauntunsnioielendeauseiwereolsalonevents 3 8 APART NAM tticence dened nccadanescnenstnanevccassacuenmnensanenees 4 1 to 4 4 A FORMU ale ooon AE E 4 1 7s RGA me 2 PANG ee een Peer er nn T ee eee ee eee 4 2 SEMC DIRECTIVE re ee 5 1 to 5 11 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive cccccccceecseeceeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeteeees 5 2 5 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive ccc cecccececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaeesaueeeeeenaes 5 2 eZ OO AON Ura hevarisa shouts sat acteiiasc ararsissite Siva acetone rascals a duaose Tae cse neem a nastes eeu 5 3 DE e OL OUMGUII Gyas ices data aucss eu a aa E aa tatal nla Masta a aa 5 4 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 5 2 1 About models applicable to the EMC DIrective ccc ccccccceceeececeeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaes 5 5 52 Z COmNeEchon TOMA aaaea a E N I A 5 6 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives ccecceeeees 5 7 SO VAD DOUNE CIDE USE aaa r e a A A 5 7 5 3 2 Method to connect the power wire and ground wire ccccceccseeceeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeseeees 5 10 5 050 Grounding Me CaDlesseian a a a e E cede ton ees 5 11 6 INSTALLATION cccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeeeeeeessO 1 tO 6 7 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT ccccccceecceeeeeee
292. ion PFOCCO UES asninn atic lice to E e a 14 76 lAs 21 ComM OPSrallON een T a T 14 76 14 3 22 Operation in write mode VV i odsciss ccchinonigenibidiedd cnwans bnone ciknsdabaolacnis wwatcamedideedsanwenigansedecmbindaasantdanbhes 14 77 1453 23 Operation NN FEAG Mode FR isunei sade dive ate daiasmeceu E E 14 77 143 24 Operation ininsert mode I scsi tutewenicalcvharaissccteintadunielinl vance uataduminlindlas vacanlaladwaiecalanvacd Vatadveuelal lat 14 78 14 3 25 Operation in delete mode D ccccccccescecsecesseeeceececseeeceecesseeeceusecsecensesecseeeseseeseestseessansens 14 78 14 3 26 Operation in parameter mode P ccccesceceseeceeeeceeeeceeeceseeceaeeeeaeeeceeesseeessusessusensesensaeeess 14 79 1453 27 Operation irothei Mode O arae e a mare asipeinded esauetenateeasce 14 80 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective ACTIONS ccecccceeeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeceaeeeseeeeseeeeseneeseeeeseeeegas 14 81 144A MELOE C AISLE GIION asiar O tienes 14 87 tA MS DS CHICATIOINS ascent te Gaitet ta etait east e a saatende Seamed a E sgeatandves es ime bigcastao bentuees 14 89 1442 ACCESS TANE anaa ea sateen e saesadacw hence aaa 14 90 144 3 PFO CAULONS asset ioe oils ie E emcee cia Vb a Ul Aa aA veeecenn a 14 91 1AA Aa NG IAW annaa a a R a sus dosetasaesucbosgsse se siete EE RNA 14 92 14 45 Operation procedure Soari a a adaseal bewelceetovele 14 95 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes cece cecccceecceecceeeeceeece
293. ion and operation of Be 1 Mode modes 1 Monitor is displayed when the list monitor is executed Subsection 14 4 16 List monitor x Displays the contents of errors that occur with the MELSEC FX list editor T 2 Error message O L gt Subsection 14 4 18 Error messages and corrective actions m N o Displays the sequence program in list format 12 digits on 3 List display area ee D The position line that can be edited is displayed with a bar O 4 Displays the keys that can be used with the MELSEC FX list editor Z O 59 OV Sx IT M a Oa wd aye ZS tO ke Nz OZ EO oe oS OZ Oe O SH INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 95 14 4 5 Operation procedures Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the MELSEC FX list editor screen Key Function Selects a mode for MELSEC FX list editor gt Subsection 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes Displays the PLC diagnostics parameter setting and keyword selection menu Switches between command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2 AN Keyboard switching in this section When inputting commands Cancels the key input when only part of the command has been input gt Subsection 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input When option menu is displayed Closes the option menu Commands cannot be deleted with this key _ 5 Subsection 14 4 11 Deleting commands Spac
294. ion driver Ethernet YASKAWA 03 12 x x Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM 03 00 Communication driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA 03 02 Communication driver MODBUS TCP 03 09 O EJEA O O O O O O O O x O O el x X O x x x Continued to next page App 29 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Version of Item Description GT Designer2 Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000 2 18 Communication driver 1200 1500 series l AB MicroLogix 02 02 ALLEN Communication driver Supporting connection to Control BRADLEY PLC 2 58L AB Control CompactLogix CompactLogix connection 03 03 x px fx O O MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Communication driver O Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 63R lt L EtherNet IP AB 03 07 ne im o r O O Zo me z W lt L lt L Communication driver LS IS PLC i l Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2 90U LS Industrial Systems connection MASTER K 04 02 Communication driver GE FANUC PLC l i Supporting connection to GE FANUC PLC 2 82L GE Fanuc Automation SNP X connection 03 13 SCHNEIDER Supporting connection to the 950 Communication driver ui PLC connection MODBUS TCP l MODBUS TCP 03 09 x m im SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 Communication driver A l l 2 18U x x O lt x connection 200 series SIEMENS S7
295. ion driver Ei Supporting connection to MR J2S CL 2 96A Za MELSERVO J3 J2S M 04 04 s3 Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 04 02 CNC connection MELSECNET H 04 02 Lu Supporting connection to CNC MELDAS C6 C64 series 2 90U MELDAS C6 C64 CC Link Ver2 ID 04 02 Ds Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC ui CRnD 700 04 02 x gt s l Communication driver voq GOT multidrop Supported wate Supporting the GOT multidrop connection Multidrop Host 04 04 connection soon Multidrop Slave 04 04 Barcode reader Extended function OS Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 90U connection Barcode 04 02 Extended function OS Printer connection Supporting connection to printer 2 90U Printer 04 02 Supporting the FA transparent function via USB 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 FA transparent Supporting the Ethernet connection between the GOT and 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 the PLC on GX Developer Extended function OS Supporting connection to external I O devices 2 90U External I O Operation Panel 04 02 Extended function OS RFID connection Supporting connection to the RFID controller 2 90U RFID 04 02 2 For GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT 11 Version of GT Item Description GT Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver 2 04E Bus Q 01 00 Bus A QnA 01 00 GT15 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 Supporting connection to BUS Bus A QnA 03
296. ion to SHINKO indicating controller controller connection Communication driver 2 90U CHINO Controllers MODBUS 04 02 FUJI SYS temperature Communication driver Supporting connection to FUJI SYS temperature controller 2 90U controller connection FUJI PXR PXG PXH 04 02 YAMATAKE temperature Communication driver Supporting connection to YAMATAKE temperature controller 2 90U controller connection YAMATAKE SDC DMC 04 02 YOKOGAWA Communication driver temperature controller 2 90U YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 connection UT2000 04 02 RKC temperature Communication driver Supporting connection to RKC temperature controller 2 90U o controller connection RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 04 02 Communication driver Inverter connection Supporting connection to inverter 2 90U FREQROL 500 700 04 02 Communication driver 2 90U QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 02 CHINO controller Supporting connection to CHINO controller connection Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA temperature controller Robot controller Supporting connection to robot controller connection Continued to next page App 21 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series a Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Q Z xt 7 Communication driver E Supporting connection to servo amplifier 2 90U zz Servo amplifier MELSERVO J3 J2S M 04 02 lt 2 connection l l Communicat
297. ions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT Symbol Point f This symbol is for EU member states only __ The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes 17 5 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 7 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states fa Z lt Lu O Z lt Z m H lt Z e To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging e To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products a Z a Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to m EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in 1 on the GOT Bs or their packaging we b Explaining the symbol in the manuals Sog To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states nga on September 26 2008 or later provi
298. iple devices for operations input the key followed by the device name and device number Point 7 1 Moving the cursor to the position to write the command 2 When starting to write a command place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot write a command with the cursor on any other line Command line Place the cursor on this line Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line 2 Commands using a text string constant for a command operand such as ASC command With the MELSEC FX list editor text string constants cannot be written as operands such as ASC commands Use GX Developer for writing such commands Example Input DMOVP DO D2 MODE i E anaa E Set the 14 104 lt WRITE WRITE or L INSERT mode With 4 or Lv move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command o o N p D gt 1 The MOV command is FNC12 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 9 Writing commands 14 4 10 Changing operands set values Z O eS Changes the operand section of an applied instruction and OUT T C command set value 2 T i Operation 5 Stop the FX PLC gt ModE se input the device name and device number 3 Go Read mode CZ O H 1 For decimal numbers input K then the number Sui For hexadecimal numbers input H then the number 5zZ9 SF 3zi Point 7 Moving
299. isplayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is hexadecimal 9 Initial I O signal of module Set the first two digits of the three digit initial I O signal of the module 10 Initial device number of buffer memory Set the number in a decimal number 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 46 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 14 2 28 Test operation procedure Z O Test operation takes place by setting on the setting key window screen the name and number of a device z initial device number of the buffer memory and the initial I O of the module or entering change values c This subsection takes a change of set values as an example to describe the test operation procedure E Touch the key on the test menu screen gt The setting key window screen appears CZ 2 Using the and gt keys move the cursor to the item you want to set 2 lt x The keyboard displayed depends on the position of the cursor as shown below O siz ZWE x S24 The position of the cursor displayed r i OJT FFI CPUNe 0 YLID Keyboard displayed when the cursor is Y p Q placed in the device name box ie a ae gt ali Au Na it QON N O gt xI aa NetNo _ 1ST FF CPUNo 0 ere DEVICEL TI EE VLD ET ome Ode Keyboard displayed when the cursor is Can placed in the device number box Q Z lt x z O gt LU 0 LO lf necessary enter
300. itle display Please select keys Pressing time is effective only in case one point 2 Close Return button The screen title name is displayed in title display part As the screen is composed of multiple layers the title including these layers is displayed If the title overflows the title display area the middle section is omitted and is displayed at the section When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen Al lt lt gt Scroll one line column A EF lt gt Scroll window 9 8 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration Lo 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Change of setting value GUT setup Operation Buzzer volume OFF Window move buzzer Z O Z D LL gt E Security setting 6 lt Utility call key 26 aie Key sensitivilty Snir Key reaction Epeed SzH Setting item Select button Setting item Select button Q ED Touch the select button setting point on the screen a F i O Key It is a key for selecting the set
301. itor the kana comment space is not displayed L Note that if any setting as described below is made the kana comment space is 14 reduced x Settings that reduce kana comment space and the kana comment space after Sa O setting change L LW Settings resulting in Nm lt Nf x 500 Nk x 500 500 a Nm Nf x 500 500 Kana comment space steps after setting change 500 Nm Memory space after change steps Z Nf File register space after change blocks 59 Nk Comment space before change blocks rat OO Remark Settable range and default value fP The settable range and the default value depend on the FX PLC type Refer to the following manual for details of the settable range and the default value L gt Programming manual for the FX PLC used INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 111 14 4 14 Parameter setting 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the parameter setting screen Function Completes the changed setting contents Key Default Initializes the parameters x Ends parameter setting 14 112 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 14 Parameter setting 14 4 15 Keywords Zz O Registers deletes releases protection for and sets protection for the FX PLC keywords z T gt Function usability of the MELSEC FX list editor for keyword protection levels
302. ive are shown below 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Connection format CPU direct connection RS 422 Point f If connecting to a PLC not from this company MELSEC FX2n series refer to the _ _ manual of the connected device PLC microcomputer for information about the applicability of the EMC Directive 2 GI1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1150 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GI1150 QLBDA Connection format Bus connection 5 6 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable 5 2 2 Connection format 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives Connect and wire GOT equipment as instructed below If the GOT equipment is configured in a way that differs from the following instructions then the system will not comply with EMC directives 5 3 1 About the cable used 1 Serial connection cable Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables The GOT units identified on the previous page are compliant with the EMC requirement when the following communication cables are used GOT Unit Existing Cables User Made Cables GT1155 QTBD Those cables need to be independently tested by the user to demonstrate EMC compatibility when T01 C30R4 8P modif h EX GENO eee SA Cece MOR E Sowell they are used with Mitsu
303. l 6 gt eet mai E Zz gt DEW CEI 7 Sets a T C set value Emio nA Set value operation screen for timers and counters i r i a A kd L Oo Fe a ee ee Q Enter Del A z D E lt A gt a n H 10 VALUE 32 DEVICE IE 8 Sets the present mi Present value operation screen for word devices A value of a word 1 4 16 bit one word module 32 bit two word module l T Yv device x O DIMI RI lt gt AlZIVi TIC 4 gt H E 6 Enter Dell A 9 Sets the initial I O signal of a module 10 Sets the initial device number of the buffer memory o a GO HEX E 32 1 0 NOC ebt foneawordy module2 nt twosword moauey IA A T ql B al v 4 5 6 0 Di lt gt Al2 3 el Fl al gt O Enter Del A 14 2 System Monitor 14 45 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 2 Set items on the setting key window screen The table shown below describes details of the set items mentioned on the preceding page Description of setting CC Link No Item Direct CPU Computer link Bus connection l l connection connection connection G4 1 FF When the host station is selected 0 When the 2 Station number FF TE station is selected 1 to 64 When a local station is selected 3 CPUN 0 to 4 This item must be set
304. l carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system 6 False output or malfunction can cause an accident T Szo You can specify and test any station and device that can be monitored during monitoring by the system Sir monitor function This section describes how to test the bit or word devices of the controller or the buffer SzH memory of the intelligent function unit 14 2 25 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen Oo Soe This subsection describes how to display the test menu screen and the setting key window screen Zz A jp Mow PEA SE TES TRMENUI ORM NetNo OIST FFICPUNo 0 amp Touch l Sa Ea Touch When performing test operation from the Entry Monitor screen N O O RE Zya 68378428 Cug W S NTD X5 SE oe OXN A Touch G lt x HIEHIHIEHIEIENIEEE EEE r EE EESE ESSES EEES z 7 WA 0 Ha LO 1 Test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR SETH D The test menu screen appears NetNo O ST FF ICPUNo 0 Touch SET RST SET VAL VALUE 16 VALUE 32 BM VAL 16 OF BM VAL 32 Operation example touch SET VAL For a detailed description of each key function see the following lt gt Subsection 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O menu screen and key functions Setting key
305. l stage GOT Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT If an error does not occur the final stage GOT may be faulty Turn on the power of the GOT If an error does not occur the final stage GOT and the bus connection cable before the final stage may be faulty Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions Point f Notes on narrowing the error part range 1 When disconnecting the extension base units in order use only an END instruction for the sequence program and any error resulting from the sequence program will not occur and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained easily 2 When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low check the error by taking a rather long time with the modules disconnected The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis operation is caused by noise 18 8 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 3 2 Further locating error positions 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting Q Z i Taking the following system as an example troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred When Oz QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used Se PLC ze main base unit GOT 1 GOT 2 2 1 Extension cable Bus connection Bus connection cable cable LU lt x Ze yyy LU SH gt xo ao xz Eg ma lt j lt
306. lay Lamp Display Comment Group can be used 2 11F Standard monitor OS 01 08 dlo O Auto repeat can be used 2 3B Standard monitor OS 01 07 qo O Comment Group can be used 2 11F Standard monitor OS 01 08 qo O TOUGSWIGN The device monitor and debug function can be set for the action setting of the special function 2 82L Standard monitor OS 01 09 O switch and the multi action switch The statistics bar graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 Pe O Graph The statistics pie graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 e Enables selecting whether to set the scrolling Alarm history comment display suitable for the message 2 63R Standard monitor OS 01 06 O display display area Comment group can be used 2 3B Standard monitor OS 01 07 qlo O Scrolling alarm disol The scrolling alarm display applicable 2 3B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O isplay Other functions added GT S Version of GT GT GT Item Description Version of OS 1050 Designer2 1030 1020 1040 Enables installing the OS without the OS Installing OS 2 11F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O installation screen of the GOT Enables installing or uploading the OS communication drivers project data and others with the GT10 LDR Enables installing the OS for the GT10 LDR Installing Supporting the following fonts when the OS is uploading with installed GT10 LDR Japanese a Standard monitor O
307. layed Touching closes the dialog Upload is completed 13 11 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Property display operation S Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder z gt if touch button after selecting the 5 property displaying target folder the 5 Version ojze Property screen shown left is displayed 06 10 04 14 21 m the Pepe screen the Drowing B Standard monitor OS information is displayed for each file Basic 02 01 50 1015K selected by ED Ow GIF IBSTG FUN O6 10 O4 14 2 a Z209 l dot Standard Gothic Font Item Contents Sre Basic Eyam ee BOOK Ob GIF 12876 FON 6 10 04 14 21 Name Displays the file name OZN ledot Standard Font Displays the following items according Basic e400 ADK to the file type Boot BootOS Kind Standard Standard monitor OS Communication Communication driver 28 Option Option OS nee Extend Extended function OS Bo Displays the version of BootOS and Version OS Displays the date and time of the file Date Time gt creation a TRG Size Displays the file size D Jok oo if touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen D Touching button returns the screen to the previous screen display eS eae es AND BATTERY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF
308. le to delete If touch button the dialog mentioned Delete Tile name TEE AL ARMHST cy left is displayed Delete now Confirm deletion targeted file is specified correctly If touch button the file is deleted If touch button the deletion is led cancele siete deel When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch button the dialog is closed 13 27 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Copy operation Copies the selected file Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive Program Data Ala Select drive Built in CF ca C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select a destination rm information rd Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder Program Data Alarm information Please select a destination Copy Tile name ALARMHST CS Copy destination i Copy now ED Touch and select the file to copy 2 If touch button the message Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen Touch the drive name display area to select a drive and then touch the button The dialog for selecting a copy destination folder is displayed as shown left a Touch the folder display area to select a folder and then touch the button The confirmation dialog shown left is displayed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 28 13 4 4 Alarm information operation UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTE
309. led A Built in CF card is not displayed Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name held by the selected drive or folder Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding Path name Date and time 8 Operation switch Q gt lt 9 Number of files characters the 21th character and after are not displayed Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name Displays the date and time when each file has been created Drive size Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive selected by Select drive Displays the execution switch of each function Delete copy which can be executed on the alarm information screen Displays the total number of the displayed files Point 7 Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed 4 Dy tS Remark fPD 13 25 13 4 Alarm Information Folders and files displayed Refer to the following for the details of folders
310. leron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company and product names herein may be either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Toog GT11 User s Manual GT11 U E 09R815 JY997D17501K a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications are subject to change without notice
311. ly in order it is normal For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale ro Pater Pattern 1 b Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visually in order it is normal For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale ro ater 3 ad Pattern 2 14 126 14 7 Drawing Check 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check c Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlaped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed 6 If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed O visually in order it is normal x For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale 5 H f D D ql i ql 7 a ail To Pattern 4 6 A 220 Szy Q ZZ LON 2ES JAKE A jp alel d Pattern 4 Shape Check By The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals aa If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal HEG WY If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check screen one JZ OLV O66 ESOESCS gt 668660666626 6669 To Display check ote COPY J FILE DISPLAY AND x III mt T I 68 Le
312. mally INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 2 13 1 2 Data type and storage location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and Standard monitor OS When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 13 3 1 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installation so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed When installing from the standard CF card the dialog is displayed by the main unit When installing from drawing software via USB or RS 232 the dialog is displayed by the drawing software When install Standard monitor OS communication driver Option OS When Standard monitor OS communication driver or Option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs Standard monitor OS communication driver and Option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled When download project data
313. me Contents Protective cover for oil GT05 50PCO 5 7 protective cover for oil Drawing software Sold separately Product name Contents SW O DS5C GTD2 E GT Designer2 Drawing software for GOT1000 GOT900 series Cl indicates the version l SW O DNC GTD3 E l l GT Designer3 o l Drawing software for GOT1000 series O indicates the version 6 The is assigned with an integer 2 or more 2 11 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Cable length Description For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 9S 3m 5 and PC D sub 9 pin female Proiect dat For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female R GT01 C30R2 25P 3m PAA transfer cable and PC D sub 25 pin male GT01 C20USB 5P For connecting GOT USB mini and PC 7 Connector shape on the cable is shown in Bar code reader Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Bar code reader Commercially available bar code reader 8 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series separately available T10 0039 The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb home page http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp melfansweb english index_e htm RFID controlle
314. monitor BM monitor Data change by test operation Quick test Display switching 14 8 Function Connection type between GOT and controller B Di CP fae CC Link Description ia Pee it al i connection SST erOD connection connection connection connection Ga Monitoring present values by entering devices to be monitored in advance An Monitoring the present value of n Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x a KK KO devices in specified buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices bit devices ro x x l word devices and buffer memory A Changing the present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring l performing a quick test A Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal 1 These items cannot be monitored when an A motion controller CPU is monitored 2 V 2Z and A cannot be monitored or their present values cannot be changed 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications Reference Subsection 14 2 10 Subsection 14 2 14 Subsection 14 2 17 Subsection 14 2 21 Subsection 14 2 24 Subsection 14 2 8 Subsection 14 2 7 4 Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor Data change by test
315. mory values in decimal or hexadecimal The present value of V and Z cannot be changed 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 When a QCPU redundant system is used data of the set value cannot be changed connection 14 10 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications Required Extended function OS Z 1 The Extended function OS shown in the table below is required z Extended function OS Option function board gt System monitor OKB Not required z 2 Install the Extended function OS Install System monitor Extended function OS in the GOT z For a detailed installation procedure see the following Sa 30 GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Sg i Su GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Oig Devices that can be monitored r For further information about the monitor device names that can be monitored and the scope lt 5 see the following See Gat L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual AOD GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Eig 6 Access range PEO we When the GOT is connected to the remote I O station in MELSECNET H network system One only the master station can be monitored SEd The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range z L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual z GOT1000 Series Connec
316. mpliance through direct testing to the identified standards and design analysis forming a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Standard Remark Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EN61131 2 2003 Radiated Emissions Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirement and tests EMS ESD RF electromagnetic field EFTB Surge RF conducted disturbances and Power frequency magnetic field Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from April 1st 2005 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD For this product see note under and over the page Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from October 1st 2007 GT1155 QTBD For this product see note under and over the page Standard Remark EMI Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EN61131 2 2007 Radiated Emissions Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirement and tests EMS_ ESD RF electromagnetic field EFTB Surge RF conducted disturbances and Power frequency magnetic field Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from January 7th 2008 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ G
317. n GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL _GT1155 QTBDQ IN 24VDC POWER MAX 0OW 6 gt SERIAL _00007201DP00001 A o Z gt 4 DP pug N md QO MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC _ MADE IN JAPAN E BootOS lt 2 version oap JZ OLV m z lt L Z l A ie a LL we O Lu 1E O LL Lu ep H O Z O H On 2y 25 Wigs Hs OO x2 25 2125 SO TE 285 E oF 23h 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 4 13 1 3 OS version confirmation 13 1 4 Display file The files that can be displayed in each screen are as follows Display Storage location Contents screen Drive name folder name Built in flash memory C G1 BOOT Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor function 1 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters Os 12 dot numerical HQ font honain a 16 dot numerical HQ font Scen Built in flash memory C G1SYS TrueType numerical font 12 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Extended function OS Option OS Communication driver BootOS Standard monitor OS Project data User created screen data Project Comment data ow 344 l information Built in flash memory C PROJECT1 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic screen 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic TrueType Mincho Gothic Alarm Resource l l Standard CF card A Advanced alarm log file CSV file information S data With drawing software any folder name or file name can be specif
318. n OS can SE Unlimited WO be operated up to 21 zu installation of TO Conventionally both of above OSs can S extended function 2 18U BootOS 02 02 E a be installed and operated up to 9 The OSs and option oo Os extended function OS data size is twice as S large as other OS data The logging OS data size is three times as large as other Ds OS data agui H Unlimited Extended function OS and option OS can Sas installation of be operated up to 32 voq W lt L lt L extended function The extended function OS data size is l 2 73B BootOS 03 09 S OSs and option twice as large as other OS data The OSs logging OS data size is three times as large as other OS data Built in option o BootOS 03 03 P GT15 FNB built in the GOT is enabled 2 58L function board Standard monitor OS 03 03 Function for monitoring testing device of PLC CPU or buffer memory of intelligent 2 09K function module pa Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2970 Extended function OS Sy etermmeniionag Traditional German Korean l System monitor 02 04 x APPENDICES Extended function OS System monitor 01 02 O function Supporting connection to Universal model Extended function OS 2 63R xX o QCPU System monitor 03 07 Supporting connection to CC Link IE Extended function OS 2 77F x x controller network System monitor 03 12 Function to monitor the network status of Sac Option OS MELSEC
319. n battery voltage The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased is low Replace the GOT built in battery The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range In this case the input value is not accepted Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again Clock data input out of range Cancelled the file of different contents and created a new file Note that the old file is cancelled and the new file is created if the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files Unnecessary file deleted to create new file 524 Device writing error When writing in the device error occurred Correct device Correct the device 595 Unable to read write alarm log Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project files under different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file 535 536 550 570 571 e No CF card is installed in the drive or the access switch is turned on 1 Install a recording medium in the specified drive Cannot open image file 2 Turn the access switch on e The specified file is not found in the card 3 Add the image file or change the image file name to a correct one There is an error in the image file data or the image file format is not supported Change to the correct image file Image file error or invalid file format The key code input execution trigge
320. n level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control box equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 3 5 1 2 Control cabinet OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME im gt H O D or m T INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment 5 1 3 Grounding It is necessary to use the GOT grounding terminal only when it is in the grounded condition Be sure to ground the grounding for the safety reasons and EMC Directives Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance Point P Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 1 3 Grounding 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable m Connection conditions and models where the EMC Directive is applicable are shown below Available April ia 2005 6 5 2 1 About models applica
321. n of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the gr
322. n the data link system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system Help function A convenient help function is supported which enables you to read write insert and delete data as you select menus Comment for each device can be displayed Comment of the device at the cursor position can be displayed W 9 OUT M50 2 10 MOV 10 gt D1 Current value Comment of D1 is displayed 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 51 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 1 Specifications System configuration This subsection describes the PLC CPU series names and the connection forms between the GOT and the PLC for which the MELSEC A list editor is available For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Targeted PLC PLC ACPU QCPU A mode 12 1 Motion controller CPUs cannot be connected The message MOTION CONTROLLER NOT SUPPORTED will be displayed when the MELSEC A list editor function is activated 2 When the PLC is A2USH S1 it operates within the range of A3U when the PLC is the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH or A1SJH it operates within the range of A3N Connecti
323. n to Q17nDCPU 2 63R x Q motion monitor 03 07 LW Enables clearing the SFC error history Option OS 2 2 63R gt x Os Universal model QCPU only Q motion monitor 03 07 uu sk Supporting connection to CC Link IE Option OS eos 2 77F Xx x Or controller network Q motion monitor 03 12 voq W lt lt Option OS Supporting Q170MCPU 2 96A Q motion monitor 04 04 Function to monitor the servo amplifier Option OS Servo amplifier monitor 02 02 and also to change parameters execute 2 18U test run etc Function to monitor the MELDAS that is gt 18 Option OS connected to the GOT l CNC monitor 02 02 Option OS Supporting connection to CNC C70 2 63R CNC monitor 03 07 Function to back up setting data for APPENDICES Extended function OS controllers and to restore the data to the 2 58L Backup Restore 03 07 controllers Supporting Backup Data Conversion Tool Backup Data Supporting Backup Data Conversion Tool Tool 2 2 63R D function OS Backup Restore 03 09 Supporting the trigger backup 2 3B Supporting Q170MCPU 2 96A Function to copy or delete data of the 2 63R CNC that is connected to the GOT l Cycle monitor data can be input and 2 96A output Function to display sequence programs written in the PLC CPU in the SFC diagram format on the GOT Extended function OS Backup Restore 04 04 Extended function OS CNC Data I O 03 07 Extended f
324. nce they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 17 3 17 3 Cleaning Method i 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement fa Z lt Lu O Z lt Z m H lt INSPECTION Low battery voltage detection and replacement The battery is used for backing up the clock data alarm history or recipe data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the following for the replacement procedure LC Section 8 4 Battery ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility screen and system alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility screen L gt Chapter 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT APPENDICES System alarm 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions Point Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for approximately a month after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that If it exceeds a month from th
325. nction board to the connector provided for the board When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so c
326. ndard monitor OS 01 02 02 x Copying comments in column unit on 2 09K O Basic Comment or Comment Group etc Basic comment Enables editing the comment group comment group directly in settings for lamps and touch 2 77F O switches Continued to next page App 33 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series a Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 o Z Improved library structure and added i 2 09K O O import function Z z lt Improved user library structure expanded Mo the user library registration capacity o y i i 2 18U O lt 2 copying the figure data to the user library etc Aiton orea rare fo paw fee ey Library workspace Enables setting the background color of DAT Bs the figures in the Library Editor screen l O we o gt one vzs W lt lt Enables sorting the figure data by subject or function and displaying different i 2 58L O shaped figures in the same color in the image list Real type data are added to the subject in l 2 63R d the library Project data matching is available between data stored in the GOT and data i i 02 O o m O m Z m Q o lt opened with GT Designer2 Project data matching is available Project data between the GOT and GT Designer2 even O matching if the minor versions are not matched Project data matching is available between data stored in
327. neaceacvediunduetsenevedvecss 11 1 DIS DIAV ING rarna E 14 135 E EOP IST cirea ele a eA e sien 18 3 Error message and SOIUtION ccccceeeeeee eee es 18 3 External dimensions cccecceeesseeeeeeeeseees App 1 F FEAE Sea eae ene ee eer A ae eee ee 1 4 G General specifications ccccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 3 1 GOT data package acquisition ccccceeee 13 34 GOTS EUD sachets ics E tar cet A tele 11 1 GOT otat TIME sirni aaa aa 14 137 I NUS CAMA OM m i tee a E ERa 6 1 NIVEL COIONS orrera une laate 11 7 L List of error code and error massage 18 3 M MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR ICV WONG S erroneo e E S 14 113 Parameter Setting cccccceccseeceeeeeeeeeeees 14 110 Message INGICATLOL cc cece eccecceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 18 3 O Operation Setting cccccccscecseeceeeseeeesseesaeees 11 11 OOO enea E NS 2 4 8 1 Option function board ccc ccecceeee eee eeeeeeeeee 2 1 8 5 OS TNE NISGrevsectcconcr cd eames acres 13 5 16 2 OS file storage location cceceeeeeeeeeee 13 1 16 2 OS INStallatlOMvisvcieaiiinetewtiaeedaticnetien 9 1 13 1 16 2 Overall configuration cccccccececeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 2 1 P Panel cutting GIMENSIONS ccecceeeceeeeeeeaeeeees 6 4 k O00 gt seco re orene terete ee ante gee ent eer ap 4 1 PASSWOTO utecsc pare ueeeesdel vee aee EREN ea aaan 9 7 PC connection CabIE
328. nection the installed bus communication driver is assigned to the bus interface a After automatic assignment UTILITY FUNCTION Z H lt S Z 5 O W Qo LZ KE Eu n If the button is clicked to store the settings in the GOT after automatic assignment the automatic assignment will not be executed from the next Q ZZ startup TO b Priority of Communication Settings of drawing software ee LU f f Mo u When Communication Settings is downloaded to the GOT from drawing AON software after automatic assignment the GOT will operate according to the Communication Settings of drawing software 7 ONE o FEA uio DEO lt 8 Sa oe OXN Q Z lt x z A 2 O gt WA 0 L O we O Lu 1E O LL Lu ep H O Z O H of 2 gt zs aZ mie OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 1 Communication Setting 10 5 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting Channel and driver assignment operation The operation method for the channel and communication driver assignment is described here In this section the case for changing the computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 to CPU direct connection Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is described In the present example Communication Settings is not downloaded 10 6 Point Before starting
329. ng Built in CF card when installed in GOT Built in CF card when installed in PC 13 1 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Drive name allocation At maintenance 5 5 Z D LL gt Mae Hi GOT main unit D Z O x Ow Ze D drive C drive See Sei OZN Internal SRAM Flash Memory Internal E GT Designer2 GT Designer3 Q Upload Aar Copy files gt EO on Windows ee aan QON Inserting Removing ecipe T gt Z gt 4 Cug Built in CF card Built in CF card m O when installed in GOT when installed in PC E 9 O opg OTN The data of the Flash Memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes eS ae NaN eee es AND BATTERY low Data type Storage location Standard monitor OS Extended function OS Option OS X T Project data Flash M Conan Project data Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup ash Memory drive L T N Alarm data Alarm log file E Internal SRAM D drive 2 4 The project data can be started only from the flash memory C drive It cannot be started from the built in CF card A drive 5 calles On On a z Point 7 Folder and file in memory card 9 Oa Multiple folders and files will be created when OS or project data is transferred to the memory card Do not delete or edit these folders and files since the GOT uses them If the folders or files are deleted or edited the GOT will not function nor
330. ng drawing software gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals aan zz 2 Installation method when turning the GOT power on iE AON L Section 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on 9 Operation procedure Rea ae Power OFF the GOT After CF card access one LED is off install the CF card in which oko BootOS Standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of A GOT a z Switch ON the CF card access switch of w gt GOT mt Lo Program Data 08 information muses ve Presents oe AEN screen Utility on the GOT and install size Date Time 02 01 05 13 31 BootOS Standard monitor OS from the CF T 02 01 05 14 42 p card to GOT L D H O EJ z 49KB 3056KE OF ile 2 aa Touch Install mes oO 16 ie 25 58 O85 ss LQZ O5 lt ZOV 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 6 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 16 7 Boot OS f A paR ST Now installing BootOS Install is completed Restart now The CF card access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card power OFF or reset the GOT while the CF card access card is lit O After the installation is finished the dialog box shown on the left is displayed amp Touch the button to reboot the GOT O After confirming that GOT restarted normall
331. ng logging file or folder ot x 1x x Changing logging file name EJE aa X Creating a new logging folder or file Po x x x G10 CSV conversion Conversion from G1L v O of operation log file to CSV G10 TXT conversion Conversion from G10 v O of logging file to TXT Deletion of a operation log file or folder elo x x naan B opying of an operation log file x x oving of an operation log file o Changing of an operation log file name x Creating of a new operation log folder eS x Displaying and searching of the list of X operation logs Hard copy Deleting hard copy file o x lt 4 information Copying hard copy file x x Memory card Formatting memory card x x format Memory l l Displaying the memory free space of GOT X information CF card to C drive Built in flash memory GOT data Copies OS special data and project data to the package x x memory card X acquisition App 13 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Debug Self check O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not required l GT Soft Drawing Changing the present value of the device System monitor of PLC the buffer memory monitor of monitor the test function and special memory and the A A buffer memory Ladder Displaying ladder monitor and executing hard x x x monitor copy Changing PLC program of ACPU and A list editor X X parameters FX list D List editing PLC program of FX PLC x x edi
332. ng motion controller CPU A series 2 5m basic base and GOT 1 2m For connecting motion controller CPU A series 2 5m basic base and A7GT CNB 10 6m For QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series to GOT long distance connection 20 6m For A7GT CNB to GOT long distance connection Combination of GT15 FXCNB and 30 6m GT15 COBS GT15 C100EXSS 1 Small CPU long connection cable GT15 C200EXSS 1 GT15 C300EXSS 1 on w oO oO 3 2 5 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Product name Cable length Description Long inter GOT l l GT15 C50BS For interconnecting GOTS connection cable AOJ2HCPU For connecting the power supply unit A0J2 l GT15 J2C10B connection cable PW to GOT aT Can be used as a GT15 CUOEXSS 1 when Buffer circuit cable GT15 EXCNB 0 5m used in combination with GT15 CLJBS Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Product E Model name Cable length Description name rop caoraororae J m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication module serial communication board RS 422 For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit cable communication board For connecting GOT to serial communication board For connecting ak i OMRON PEG serial a RS 232 module communication board serial communication board cable For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Pro
333. ng operation Section 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key Refer to the following for the utility call key operation gt Section 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 12 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Key sensitivity setting z 5 GUT setup peration a l TE E T a e o The keyboard is displayed if setting item is E 671 8 9 del lt gt meres j 4 d Cance Enter Enter the numerical value from the keyboard z Security setting z wea D The key reaction speed according to the 22 key sensitivity setting is displayed Sr Key sensitivity Max 8 J a a ZHE QZ Key reaction speed Standar dt 0 ms Setting contents are defined if button is touched 1 1 a Zz coe gt aes ace Oat QOV CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 3 Operation Settings 11 13 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in drawing software Security level setting lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual F
334. ng the input contents Ma Write the command again Subsection 14 4 9 Writing commands oo Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised overwritten with the program 14 writing Remark When the key is input in the parameter mode the GOT stops the process To continue the operation carry on the key input x O Lu IL LL Lu o H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 67 14 3 11 Action if an incorrect key is input 14 3 12 List of functions The table below shows the functions available for each mode Mode mode display Write W Read R Insert I Delete D Parameter P Others O Function Writes adds or modifies a program Changes a device used at the selected step in the program Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Declares the specified part of the program NOP Displays a comment for the specified device Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Reads a program after allowing the user to specify an instruction used Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a device used Automatically scrolls the display of a program that has been read up to a specified step Corresponds to prog
335. ng the master station the Perform the monitor setting again master station is reset EEPROM failure 34 Replace the EEPROM with a new one The EEPROM cannot be written due to EEPROM failure Detailed description of error No 25 If error number 25 appears the following causes are possible Check the details and the corrective actions 1 When connected to the master station Device Pe Description Details number The control depends on whether there is an error at the Link card error M9210 hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit for master station B i i is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit Online ear i The control depends on whether the master station itself is Offline station to M9224 Link status online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self station test or self loopback mode Check the mode switch loopback test Not executed Forward loop test ae The control depends on whether the master station itself is M9227 Loop test status and reverse loop executing the forward loop test or the reverse loop test test are being executed 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 85 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions UTILITY FUNCTION DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND GOT SELF CHECK A COPY DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND ST
336. ngth Description name RS 232 For connecting Connector Conversion Box to SHINKO GT09 C30R21401 4T 3m ae cable indicating controller CF card Sold separately Product name Model name Contents GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB CF card GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Commercially available CF card 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Memory card adaptor Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Option function board Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Option function board GT11 50FNB Option function board 3 Necessity of mounting the option function board may offer depending on the hardware version Refer to the following for detailes lt Section 8 3 Option Function Board Stand Sold separately Product name Model name Contents GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 A9YGT 50STAND Stand Common to A950OGOT Stand 2 2 Component List 2 10 2 2 2 Option Optional components for
337. nication Use PLC communication Terminating resistor 2 Open 1100 3300 Terminating resistor 2 Open 110 0 3300 Switched by terminating resistor selector Switched by terminating resistor selector ern switch At factory shipment 3300 switch At factory shipment 330 Interface Compatibility with the serial multi drop Compatibility with the serial multi drop connection Hardware version C or later connection Hardware version F or later Lu gt T CZ z RS232 1ch lt Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps RS 032 Connecter type D sub 9 pin male Use PLC communication barcode reader RFID connection PC T communication project data upload download OS installation transparent function mt USB Full Speed 12Mbps device ich z USB Use PC communication project data upload download OS i installation transparent function PCMCIA compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector type For TYPE only Z Use Data transmission and storage z Option function For mounting the option function board 1ch x board ip ZZ 1 Necessity of mounting the option function board may offer depending on the hardware version Refer to the following for details lt gt Section 8 3 Option Function Board 2 Set the terminating resistor selector switch of the GOT in accordance with the connection type when adopting GOT multidrop connection For details of GOT multidrop connection refer to the following
338. nitor stations and SET devices Test operation 2 Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Canceling keywords L gt Subsection 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their A M comments are displayed A Scrolls information upward by a line lv Scrolls information downward by a line 14 36 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 11 displayed Z O Description of setting z CC Link P No Item Direct CPU Computer link T Bus connection l l connection E connection connection i G4 1 E D gt 1 Network No FF When the host station is selected 0 ue the Su 2 Station No FF eae Zx9 station is zv selected ZE OFw 1 to 64 When a O local station is selected 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs 3 CPU No It is not necessary when the system is connected to another CPU Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters ZO 4 Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the AAS display format switching screen TE Oo Decimal number OOM 5 seivaie Fo
339. nitoring of the LED status display of the NETWK unit MELSECNET H communication unit and status display CC Link communication unit GT15 A J61BT13 Displaying GOT errors CPU errors System alarm x lt Ob network errors display x X X x x x x x X l X Debug Self check Self check Resetting GOT errors Displaying GOT start date and time current GOT start time time accumulated operating hours Displaying the screen to clean the display Tepe Screen cleaning l X section Backlight maintenance notification time setting A Display section maintenance notification Maintenance report time setting 7 Touch key maintenance notification count setting Maintenance report Built in flash memory maintenance notification count setting Function to reset the values of backlight maintenance notification time counted for Integrated value maintenance time repan Pepay section 7 maintenance notification time touch key x reset aoi ni maintenance notification count and built in flash memory maintenance notification count 14 Itis necessary to perform the followings by drawing software e Installation of communication driver e Assignment of channel No and communication driver 2 The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT 11 e Chinese Traditional cannot be displayed e Japanese and Chinese Simplified cannot be selected on the GOT screen Japanese and Chinese Simplified font
340. nlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect Flickers and partial discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment However please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels When using multiple liquid crystal display panels please note that there is an individual difference between them A crosstalk shadow as an extension of the display may appear on the liquid crystal display panel Please note that it appears due to its characteristic When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle the display color seems like it has changed Please note that it is due to its characteristic Please note that the response time brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature When the same screen is displayed for a long time an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to heat damage and it may not disappear To prevent the he
341. nnected Sequence program protection status reactivate When FX series PLC is connected Setting of opening screen time Setting of screen saving time Setting of screen saving back light ON OFF Switching message language Japanese English Chinese Simplified Korean Germany Setting of battery alarm display ON OFF Setting of Invert colors ON OFF Ch GT1150 GOT setup Liquid crystal intensity setting Liquid crystal contrast setting Setting of buzzer volume Security setting Security level change security password input of each object Utility call key Setting of the menu call key Key sensitivity Key sensitivity setting Key reaction Display of key reaction speed speed play y p Selection of base clock Display current time of clock Time setting amp displa cake Set current time of clock Display of battery status 9 2 9 2 Utility Function List Item Functions overview Installing OS Uploading OS OS information Property display of OS Kind version and date Data check of system file OS Downloading project file Uploading project file Project file deleting Project Information Copying project file A drive A drive Property display of project file Date version and screen title Program data control Data check of project file Deleting alarm log file Alarm information Copying alarm log file Memory card format Formatting of CF card and Internal SRAM
342. nnection to QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU x x Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU T Communication driver Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU l MELSECNET H 03 13 x x Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QS001CPU kof o x x Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU Communication driver 2 91V Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A x A MELSECNET H 04 04 Continued to next page MELSECNET H 04 03 App 25 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Version of GT11 Dae GT Soft Q Item Description GT Version of OS os leom Z Designer2 Bus Bus sera n Z JEET ZO Communication driver Supporting connection to CC Link IE LUC 2A7F CC Link IE Controller x x Fu controller network o Network 03 12 lt 2 Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU ey alicia ae x QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU eee Bs Sik Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU a Cae sh controller network oP Z conieco Supporting connection to QS001CPU x rog Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU oo ae Communication driver QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU 2 91V CC Link IE Controller x Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Network 04 03 Q20UDEHCPU N Communication driver A Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A CC Link IE Controller x m Network 04 04 at oO Supporting connection to CC Link
343. nseciseceaact oectauds Sal ines aici enca seb ares eeracti ela ealeaic aaate a eee 14 1 Me DV SIC MIN MONIO tt shinenatt latest stat yet aclaten acl atat meal allele tat Meta alte onneeot Glas cal alee toate actin 14 2 WAZ MSOC CHICANO ssr e a bindu nbtteding Mantiwiine a r 14 5 1422 DISHA LY pee RC E an Ree Meee cee 14 13 14 2 3 Operation procedure common to the system monitor screens cece ccceeeceeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeeeaees 14 14 14 2 4 Functional Change menu SCIEN cccccccscccseccececeeccceecaucecaeecseecaueceeessueecuessaeeseuesaeeesaeenaeenaaes 14 14 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices ccceccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 14 15 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation PrOCECUIe ccccccceccseeeceeeceeeceeeeseeeeesaeeeseeeaees 14 18 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display cc08e 14 19 14 2 8 Quick test Operation Of monitor CEVICES cccccccccecceeeeceeeeae cece eeseeeceeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeseueseeeesanes 14 21 14 2 9 Changing screens COMMON OPELatiON ccccecccceceecece cece eeceeeceeeseeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeetanes 14 25 TAZ VO EMUY MONON ean eaa e E detach nd snicetatacwos ientansepe R 14 26 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key fUNCTIONS cceceecceeeeeeeeeees 14 26 14 2 12 Procedure for entry monitor basic OPeEratiON ccccceeecseeeece
344. nt Check 14 8 1 Font check function 14 8 3 Font check operation Zz O Touching Font check in the Display check menu displays the screen describing the font check operation z Touching the upper right of the screen starts the font check T The character data of the installed font stored in the flash memory can be displayed on the screen one by one to confirm the font drawings visually Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Sw Font check Sg Touching the upper left part of the screen returns aan Upper left touch Upper right touch to the Display check screen position position Q ZZ Op asz au ately The installed font data is displayed by touching M the upper right part of the screen 2 gt 5 Cu TA Font data ook OSH Q Z lt x x O gt LU 0 LO 14 lt T I O 7 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 8 Font Check 14 129 14 8 3 Font check operation 14 9 Touch Panel Check 14 9 1 Touch panel check function Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit 16 dots x 16 dots 14 9 2 Display operation of touch panel check Main menu L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check Debug amp self check Debug self check Self check Memory check EJ Di
345. ntered z keyword by lt PLC memory all clear gt Note that lt PLC memory all clear gt clears user data including sequence programs as well z For further information about PLC memory all clear see the following E Ou 50 Subsection 14 3 19 PLC memory all clear Szo S e When you know the keyword and want to change it or add a new keyword aam see the following KL gt Subsection 14 3 21 Common operation Q ZZ LON 2ES JAKE A jp efel FEA X5 SE oe O lt Q Z lt z 7 O gt LU mle L O 14 lt T I O 7 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 57 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input 14 3 6 Operation methods Key arrangement and a list of key functions 1 The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC A List Editor window are described below Display area 4 Control keys 1 Mode keys NOW READING PLC PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT MOTION CONTROLLER NOT SUPPORTED FROM B T D Pine A B re D x f caAcL rReTtTio G H l J a 5 T R 2 Help key 4 Control key 3 Command Device keys Key name Summary of function Reference f Subsection 14 3 9 The key that specifies read or write mode READ Z MASSE Subsection 14 3 22 WRITE Switch the valid key with SHIFT Subsection 14 3 23 Subsection 14 3 9 The key that specifies insert or delete mode 1 Mode key
346. nterfaces have the following three types z BUS For communication with PLC RS232 For communication with PC drawing software and barcode reader RFID USB For communication with PC drawing software P A g CF CARD GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT 1000 O ACCESS OFF ON lt CF CARD Z H L S Z S O Ti Qo LZ xE Lu Fw AT BATTERY B E GOT rear face DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT front face a al Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface BUS interface Standard interface BUS for connection to QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series or BUS for connection to QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 1 Communication Setting 10 3 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen 10 4 3 Channel number specification menu BOX 0 Set when the communication interface is not used 1 Set when connecting to PLC or microcomputer Only one can be set among arbitrary communication interfaces 8 Set when connecting to a bar code reader RFID 9 Set when connecting to PC drawing soft
347. nterrupted The followings should not be performed during the installation of BootOS or standard monitor OS The installation may fail and GOT may not operate e Turning OFF the GOT power e Pressing the reset button of GOT e Turning OFF the CF card access switch e Removing the CF card When GOT does not operate due to the failure of the installation follow the procedures mentioned below e When the installation of BootOS is failed Install CoreOS Section 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS When the installation of standard monitor OS is failed Install BootOS L3 Section 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION J CLEANING OF N og Z TO Ooz ZEO OS ELAO Eee Js g IOs OS 28h S 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 4 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of Standard monitor OS When the screen requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen Operation procedure Power OFF GOT and CF card access switch Insert the CF card in which BootOS Standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT O Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT 3 Power ON the GOT touching the upper and lower left corners of the GOT screen BootOS and Standard monitor OS are
348. numbers or characters on the keyboard 14 xX key Use the key to delete an entered character i O key Use the key to delete all characters under the cursor 5 e The a w and the keys on which nothing is displayed are not available a e For further information about the setting ranges see the following K gt Subsection 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 4 Entry is completed by touching the key 6 whe On The keyboard closes by touching the key oS gt lt 55 oa INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 47 14 2 28 Test operation procedure Point P Operating the set values of timers and counters 1 Time up Count up status Even if a set value or present value is changed after a timer or counter is up the time up or count up status does not change The present status is retained 2 Changing an index qualifier Only the constant part of a T C set value with a qualifier can be changed The index qualifier cannot be changed Example Change the set value of T5 from 300 to 200 x NetNo IST FF CPUNe 0 DEC mela 5 vC DEVICE Change the set value of T5 from K300 to K200 Program before change Program after change Constant part The index qualifier cannot be changed 3 Operation when a password is entered for the controller When the target controller is a QCPU the Keyword Release screen appears Enter the password
349. o 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 2 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code displayed on the servo amplifier to a decimal number and adding 20000 to it For this reason to refer to the manual of the servo amplifier based on the error code displayed upon a system alarm caused to the GOT subtract the error code by 20000 and convert the lower three digits into a hexadecimal Example If the system alarm displayed at GOT is 20144 the error code of the servo amplifier is 20144 20000 144 BIN 90 HEX 18 1 Error Contents Display 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below Error code 303 304 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 315 316 321 Error message Set monitor points too large Decrease setting points Set trigger points too large Decrease setting points No project data Download screen data Monitor device not set No comment data Download comment Device reading error Correct device Project data does not exist or out of range No of alarm has exceeded upper limit Delete restored alarm No of sampling has exceeded upper limit Delete collected data Device writing error Correct device Cannot display or input operation value Review expression Spec
350. occurs while monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative as described below 1 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Become inoperative 2 PLC CPU shuts down and the GOT becomes inoperative For the system configuration with GOT assuming communication error ocurrs in the GOT the switches for critical operation to the system should be set in the device other than GOT False output or malfunciton may occur Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED flickers green orange and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor scr
351. odel Description GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Point The flash PC card of the GOT A900 series In the GT11 000 the flash PC card for GOT A900 series cannot be used Use the CF card which is described in the above 8 1 CF Card 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable CF card SYSTEM OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE Zz O x l z H o zZ 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF Installing D Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF and make sure CF card CF card access that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED access LED Switoh turns off the CF card can be installed even during the GOT power on 1 m ACCESS OFF ON CF card GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD CF card front face Q To install the CF card to the GOT insert the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside Push in the CF card until the CF card eject button snaps Turn the CF card access switch on After the CF card access switch is turned on the CF card can be used CF card eject button 8 2 8 1 CF Card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Removing CF card CF card access ED Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF acc
352. of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOTS800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series A 17 E Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Serial communication unit RS 422 conversion unit Ethernet communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit CC Link interface unit Interface converter unit Serial multi drop connection unit Connection Conversion Adapter GT15 QBUS GT15 75QBUSL GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 J71E71 100 GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 J71GP23 SX GT15 J61BT 13 GT11HS CCL GT15 75IF900 GT01 RS4 M GT10 9PT5S 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 AQ9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set mw Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Video input unit RGB input unit Video RGB input unit RGB output unit Video RGB unit Multimedia unit CF card unit CF card extension unit External I O unit Sound output unit Fingerprint unit GT15 PRN GT16M V4 GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 GT16M ROUT GT16M MMR GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET GT15 DlO GT15 SOUT GT15 80FPA Description GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 RS2T4 25P GT15 J71BR13 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 GT15 75J61BT13 Z Description GT15V 75V4 GT15V 75R1 GT15V 75V4R1 GT15V 75ROUT
353. of all items to change with x button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents Brightness Contrast Zz Refer to the following for brightness contrast setting Z L gt Section 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment c E Invert colors c Z 611150 5 Z lt 9 sir ITT 5 E Setting item ii ence if setting item is oF Landers touched ON gt OFF T Opening screen time Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Setting contents are defined if button Screen save back i ght is touched Battery alarm display Brightness contrast Invert Colors OFF IY o ZZ TOn gt Zaz Zee Oat OON 09 ONE Z gt J Minde wok Bush OK button i X button is touched without touching are Fou lose Phe Screen Phe channed button the dialogue mentioned left Bio l ill b led te wit a gt i W gt cance g is displayed Sok button The change contents are a canceled and the screen is closed a lt x button The display setting screen z is displayed D O gt WA CD If close the display setting and GOT setup zo screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents O LL in 09 H O Z O 58 On mts OA INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 1 Display Settings 11 7 11 1 3 Display setting operations 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment func
354. ol and information systems MES Interface 03 01 Oracle 8i ACCESS2000 ACCESS2003 and MSDE2000 are added to the Standard monitor OS 03 02 applicable database 2 41Z Option OS x The trigger buffering function is added MES Interface 03 02 MES interface Enables setting Do not sample for the function sampling setting in the device tag settings Industrial SQL Server 9 0 and Microsoft Standard monitor OS 03 03 SQL Server 2005 are added as an 2 58L Option OS x applicable database MES Interface 03 03 Access 2007 is added as an applicable Standard monitor OS 03 13 database 2 82L Option OS x Function to send resource data stored in MES Interface 03 13 the GOT to the database Function to import a tag file created by the third party programming software to GT 2 91V Standard monitor OS 04 03 4 Designer2 and set a tag as a device Tag import function App 51 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Q T 11 Appendix 4 2 For GT10 GT Designer2 Version 2 43V or later is applicable to GT1020 GT Designer2 Version 2 58L or later is applicable to GT1030 GT Designer2 Version 2 90U or later is applicable to GT1050 GT Designer2 Version 2 90U or later is applicable to GT1040 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION EJ Added GOT main unit Version of GT Designer2 Target Models Version of OS GT1020 LBD GT1020
355. ommand device keys using the keys shown below if OS necessary Makes the upper function valid Q SET Makes the lower function valid gt The keys shown below can be operated even if the lower function of a key is valid lt 2 H You do not need to operate the key now e Comparison symbol keys at the input of comparison operation commands lt gt e Minus key in command source data Dy For further information about the display of valid keys see the following zy LUG WEA Subsection 14 3 7 Display format of the display area Oe Sa Oa 3 Valid command device keys after setting each mode azi Valid command device keys after setting each mode are shown below a Valid keys after setting read write and insert modes A The upper functions of the command device keys are valid lt If necessary switch the upper and lower functions of necessary keys for operation A op b Valid keys after setting parameter other and help modes O The lower functions of the command device keys are valid 8 If necessary switch the upper and lower functions of necessary keys for operation 14 14 3 9 Selection and operation of modes x Select appropriate modes of the MELSEC A list editor for the operations described in Subsections 14 3 13 Er and 14 3 20 You can change modes as you desire during any of the operations described in Subsections 14 3 13 and 14 3 20 so that you can continue operations while changing modes
356. on B a DS ea eee es AND BATTERY E Touching button closes the screen yZ O LU ae O LL Lu U H O O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 Project Information 13 16 13 3 4 Operation of project information Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file D Touch and select the file to delete Screen mentioned left is displayed if Delete project data Play PROJECT 1 button is touched Do you want to delete 7 Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly If touch button the file is deleted If touch button the deletion is canceled ices e T When the deletion completes the dialog i box shown left is displayed If touch button the dialog is closed 13 17 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Copy operation The file in the A drive is copied to another directory of the A drive Copy to from C drive or D drive is disabled Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive Program Data Project information Select drive fo aii Iti Lie Gere C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select a destination Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder Program Data Project information Kind Name G1 PROJECT DIRKI PROJECT RAR B Please select a destination Copy file name PROJECT 1 Copy destination At PROJECT 2 Copy now
357. on Command and the user s manual for each CPU for corrective actions 14 84 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions I6 Error using list editor function on the link system When the MELSEC A list editor is used on the link system the PLC communication error may appear In this case check the error details and the corrective actions Error No Error message Corrective action 2 Time out error No response to the request Check the cable wiring COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Process cancel 4 New process request was given to the list editor function while Perform correct key operations on the GOT the CPU is processing Remote error Sum check error There may be noise interference A sum check error from the link communication has occurred Check the system again PLC No error Check the PLC number setting There is no station corresponding to the PLC number Set the correct number 19 This error may occur when the ACPU is reset during monitoring Perform the monitor setting again 24 Although remote stop pause is performed from the computer link Perform the remote run stop pause from either unit unit remote run stop is additionally performed Refer to the next page for error messages and actions 25 After confirming the device value explained at the next page with the system monitor function take action Link error 32 While the slave station is monitori
358. on Library 04 04 Standard monitor OS 04 02 Communication driver Supporting connection to multiple controllers on the o Multi channel function 2 90U Use the communication driver Ethernet network 04 02 or later for each connection Tag import function Function to import a tag file created by the third party programming software to GT Designer2 and set a tag as a 2 91V Standard monitor OS 04 03 device 2 For GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT 11 Item Utility Network unit status display GOT data package acquisition App 47 E Version of GT Description Version of OS Designer2 GT GT Soft GT 15 GOT1000 11 Displays details in OS information project information alarm information hard copy 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 information and advance recipe information properties Function to display the status of MELSECNET H communication unit and 2 020 Standard monitor OS 03 00 CC Link communication unit Function for copying the installed OS or Standard monitor OS 03 01 data in the GOT main unit to the memory 2 43V 7 BootOS 03 01 M car Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series oe Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Q Z Extended function OS and option OS can if be installed unlimitedly ZZ a Extended function OS and optio
359. on driver and Q26UDHCPU 2 77F A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O Supporting connection to QJ7ZICMON connection to Supporting connection to QJ7ZICMON 03 12 Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O 04 04 Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU 2 82L A QnA QCPU QJ71024 O QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU 03 13 Computer link Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU connection Supporting connection to QOQOUJCPU er Communication driver QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU 2 91V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 G Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and Q20UDEHCPU EA te me IIA x Supporting connection to MELSECNET H oem PLC to PLC network connection PLC to PLC network Supporting routing parameter setting with 243V Communication driver GT Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01 Continued to next page 04 03 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 24 GT11 Version of GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS GOT1000 Bus Serial Designer2 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R x x Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU connection to Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELSECNET H 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 connection to Supporting connection to CNC C70 C70 Communication driver Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B lt x MELSECNET H 03 09 S
360. on forms When the GOT is connected to an ACPU QCPU A mode O Available x Unavailable Connection form between GOT and PLC CC Link Function name Direct CPU Computer link 3 connection 12 GOT multidrop connection connection connection G44 4 MELsECAlstedtor OE x 1 When the PLC is the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJH use a CPU of version E or a later version Programs cannot be written to CPUs of version D or an earlier version 2 When the PLC is A3N A2N S1 A2N or A1N it can not be used 3 When the PLC is QCPU A mode it cannot be used 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Bus connection 14 52 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 1 Specifications Required option OS and option function board Z The option OS and option function board shown below are required z Option OS OS memory space user area Option function board Z MELSEC A list editor OKB GT11 50FNB ES 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 22 GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Site Ow of 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the on user area and information abou
361. on of ChNe O None LFA device amp Barcode 4 PC 1 Channel Driver assign a Assigning channel No Channel No s can be assigned to each of the communication drivers installed in the GOT Without setting Communication Settings in drawing software communication with PLC CPU is only available after assigning a channel No with this function b Changing communication driver The communication driver assigned to the channel can be changed using the communication setting To change the communication driver it is required to pre install the communication driver to be changed in the GOT L gt Section 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting 2 Standard interface display box Communication interface included as standard in GT100 a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD The standard interface includes the following three types RS232 For communication with PC drawing software PLC microcomputer bar code reader RFID and other equipment RS422 For communication with PLC and microcomputer USB For communication with PC drawing software GOT 1000 GOT front face GOT rear face USB interface Standard interface mini RS 422 interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface 10 2 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA 6 Standard i
362. on of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT156L e Q o O GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GOT1000 Series GT1555V SAN GT1550 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT1500 GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 GT1155 Q Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD Handy GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT110J0 GT 11 Abbreviation of GT1155 Q GT1150 Q GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD GT1045 Q Abbreviation of GT1045 QSBD GT1040 Q Abbreviation of GT1040 QBBD Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 LWLW Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GI1020LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW GT1050 GT1040 GT1000 GT10 Abbreviation of GT105LJ GT104 GT1030 GT1020 GOT900 Series Abbreviation
363. on switches refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Functions xX O Lu T O LL LU o H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 115 14 4 16 List monitor Displays and key functions The following describes the displays for the list monitor OLD M AQ LD EM 100 SET FM 500 L IM 500 OUT WY 010 OUT WY 020 OUT WY 030 LD Y O10 MOM i D 100 rst pur vce nop Fen 1 2 4 F 6 il 8 9 No Item Display contents 4 List display area The status of contacts and coils is displayed on the left of device displays The same operations as in the READ mode of the FX list editor can be executed Keys L 3 Subsection 14 4 7 Sequence program display Ends the list monitor When the list monitor is executed on the FX list editor screen the screen is switched to the FX list editor screen The status of contacts and coils is displayed as below Status Type of instructio Description W Displayed W Not displayed LD AND OR Contact instruction Normal open OFF LDI ANI ORI Contact instruction Normal close ON OUT SET Except TC Contact OFF RST Except TC and word OFF ON device Contac LDP ANDP ORP LDF ANDF ORF Not monitored Always gg not displayed Rise or fall contact instruction 14 116 14 4 M
364. one The set step number is larger than the maximum step b Set the correct step number number Setting value is not correct Set the correct value The function which cannot be executed was selected Select other function The set device symbol is incorrect Perform the correct key operation 1 Set the correct device symbol 2 Set the number within the range of CPU device The specified command was not found The device number exceeds the range _ Proceed to the next operation if it does not The identical coil is found in the sequence affect the control program a Correct the program if it affects the control When the CPU has detected the error stop i running of the operation After resetting the When the program is read it cannot be converted to the CPU check the command around the error proper command Write the correct command For check of the error step refer to 14 3 27 The command set at the time of read write or insert is Set the correct command not correct When writing in the Write or the Insert Delete mode the Turn OFF the memory protect switch in the memory protect switch in the memory cassette is ON memory cassette Memory assignment set in the parameter exceeded the Set the parameter within the capacity of the capacity of the memory cassette memory cassette Write the END command at the last step of the There is no END command program Restart the list edit
365. only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not O necessary when the system is connected to another CPU 4 On Off setting Set 1 On Set 0 Off 5 For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual 6 Device name GT Designer 3 Version L Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 123456789 7 T C set value a D displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is decimal Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are set Entry example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are set Entry example H ABCDE123 H displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is hexadecimal Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 123456789 8 Word device present value o D displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is decimal Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are set Entry example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are set Entry example H ABCDE123 H d
366. onnuta sate eatatate tens aatnet a cueehamenelestia bain ian eat oac nice 13 14 13 3 1 Function of project information cccccccsscccececeeeceueecececseeceeeceucecueecaeessueecueecseecseessuessageeseeens 13 14 13 3 2 Display operation of project INFOFMATION ccc cccccceeeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseueseeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeees 13 14 13 3 3 Display example of project information 2 0 cece ceccc cece eeeeceeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeees 13 15 13 34 Operation or project INTONMAt ON sasn a E a E a aa a ese 13 16 DAARIN IN AOU aes E T A SNA 13 24 13 4 1 F nction of alarm information eseese seesinane anena anaa aa aaea a a AAE Eana AEEA a iaa aiia 13 24 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information ccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeseeess 13 24 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information ccccccccceeccs sees eeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeaeeeseeeney 13 25 13 4 4 Alarm information operation snicics caches sa scheo hed Sateen ace eedadictemem ied aseeueiedadsmandaoidawcemhedaaamenteccusee 13 26 13 9 WIEMORY Card Formal sscueGarevzrrtentcteasedem tata a N n oie eareoraseheeeyeees 13 30 13 5 L FOrmat function Of memory Card sererai na wh es ee ee eels eee 13 30 13 5 2 Display operation Of memory Card fOrMAL c cece seecceeeceeeeaeceeeeeseeeceueeeeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeaeeeseeeey 13 30 13 5 3 Format operation Of memory CaN ssxenicssctecid occ escinte
367. onsult with Mitsubishi Electric e This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system e When using this product combining other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulation which a user should suit Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is used for user itself e If in doubt at any stage of the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the example indicated by this manual technical bulletin the catalog etc is reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of equipment and system when employing Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples e About this manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement e The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor CONTENTS SAFET PRECAUTIONS
368. ontents Q Z lt x 2 a Z O gt WA i LO we O W as O LL e Lu 09 H O Z O 58 25 aa Be OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 1 Display Settings 11 5 11 1 3 Display setting operations Language 11 6 GOT setup Di splay Opening screen time Sec 0 Min 0 None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Language Screen save time Brightness contrast select Language HARA D gt English ota GOT setup Display Language Opening screen time Sec 0 Min 0 None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Screen save time Br ightness contrast With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OKT 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations ED Touch the setting items to display the Select Language screen When touching the button of a desired language the language is selected and the screen returns to the Display screen Setting contents are defined if button is touched The language display does not change till is carried out i X button is touched without touching button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed button The display setting screen is displayed If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting
369. ontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS th O O Standard monitor OS 2 O O Communication driver 2 O O Communication driver 2 O O Option OS l Luj O O Option OS i 2 O O t Please match the number Point 7 Checking method of BootOS Standard monitor OS version 16 9 1 Check the version of BootOS or Standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details L gt Section 13 2 OS Information 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Aa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SERIAL 540001 BC BC _ BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION version MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 80M1 IND CONT EQ C US LISTED 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS b GI1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA z O Z 7 T sa MITSUBISHI gt GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL 5 MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ 5 IN 24VDC POWER MAX 00W __ SERIAL 00007201DP00001 A ae D P Z MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN ae BootOS version 25 ZO uF Hie H OE OZD a 2z LO ZS aE No AOD o o FZ Hui DEO lt 8 Ae opa OTN Q Z lt z l A Q g
370. operation 1 Restarting the GOT After Communication Setting is executed the GOT automatically restarts If the project data is downloaded GOT starts monitoring the communication device after restarting Before starting the operation check for safe conditions 2 Setting retention Once being established Channel Driver assign is retained until Communication Settings is updated Communication setting Definition af ChNe O None LFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Channe Dr iver assign 1 AJ 10CC24 MELDAS Cs S gt Barcode 9 Host PC Moadem Change assignment Channel No Flease select communication driver None A QnA QCPU OI 1024 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting a Install communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 to the GOT Communication Settings with AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 Communication Settings is not downloaded from drawing software After installing the communication driver touch the CH Driver assign button in Communication Settings The screen shown on the left is displayed Touch the button D Touch the communication driver installed to the GOT A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 Channe Dr iver assign The Channel Driver assign screen is 1 A QnA QCPUQU7 1024 4 l gn displayed again 8 Barcode Touch the button 9 Host PC Modem Touch the X button to return to the Communication Settings scre
371. or function If communication is not made properly check When the list editor function is started proper the following 1 GOT main unit 2 Connection of the cable communication with the PLC is not made 3 CPU main unit if any error has occurred Close and restart the editor for MELSEC A If communication is not made properly check When the editor for MELSEC A is started proper communication with the CPU is not made the following 1 GOT main unit 2 Connection of the cable 3 CPU main unit 1 Check the setting of RAM ROM 2 Check the RAM mounting 3 Check the setting of the memory protect switch in the CPU Correct writing was not made in the Write or Insert mode Writing insertion or deletion was attempted Stop the CPU during running of the CPU Change the PLC number and set the station for The PLC number is set to other station access to the host Continued to next page 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions Error message Description Corrective action The value exceeding the range of the program capacity Reduce the program capacity by K steps for KS over 5 by K steps was attempted to be set setting z The value exceeding the range of the file S The value exceeding the range of the file register LL KP over register capacity by K points was attempted gt capacity by K points was attempt
372. oreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 109 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics 14 4 14 Parameter setting Sets FX PLC parameters Parameters that can be changed and change targets 1 Parameters that can be changed The parameters that can be changed with the MELSEC FX list editor and the target FX PLCs are as follows O Can be set changed X Cannot be set changed Target CPU Item FXO S ISON FX1 FX2 C FX1S FX1N C FX2N C FX3G FX3U C moo eea x o o x x o o 0 Fileregisterspace seting oo x o o o oO oO tatchrangesetirg x Of OT x xt Oo x RUNteminalseting x x x Oo Oo fT Oo fF Oo initialization ofparameters Of oO o o f of o 0 When connecting an FXO S set 0 Setting other than 0 causes a parameter error 2 When the parameters are initialized the display on the MELSEC FX list editor is different from the FX PLC default values but do not change the latch range Changing the latch range causes an error OO 2 2 Change targets When a memory cassette is mounted the parameters in the memory cassette are targeted for changes Operation Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor 020 o Ae Memory capacity File reg capacity 0 block Latch range M 500 M1023 C 100 C 199 16bit S 500 999 C 220 C 255 32bit D 200 D 511 RUN terminal input Default 1 When checking parameters not changing it is not necess
373. ories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph 1 Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph 2 Set the Operation at frequency over time and initialize and continue in scatter graph Error occurred while writing in the device Correct the device In indirect specification of comment parts number the data operation result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range in which the device type can be expressed The part file does not exist Create the part file and download to GOT Check the monitor target station No of the project data 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 3 18 4 Error code 322 330 331 332 334 345 351 352 353 354 355 356 Error message Dedicated device is out of range Confirm device range Insufficient memory media capacity Confirm M card capacity Memory card not installed or M CARD switched OFF Memory media is not formatted Memory media error Replace memory media BCD BIN conversion error Correct data Recipe file error Confirm content of recipe file Recipe file make error Reboot GOT after inserting memory card Unable to write Recipe file Confirm memory card is inserted Recipe file write error Recipe file read error File system
374. out and procedures described in Section 14 7 3 Display and 2 operation of drawing check a When missing bits occurs contact your nearest sales office or FA Center oa Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements A flicker may be caused in some display colors This is a characteristic of the LCD panel it is not due to a fault or failure of the product INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 7 Drawing Check 14 123 14 7 1 Drawing check function 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check Touching Drawing check in the Display check displays the screen describing the drawing check operation Touch the upper right of the screen to start a drawing check Before execute drawing check 1 Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during the drawing check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch Upper right touch position position 2 For GT1155 256 colors color display blue black red purple green light blue yellow and white is available For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales the colors are reduced to the 16 scale monochrome This section describes with an example using GT1155 256 colors ED Missing bit Color Check
375. oving method of CF card Section 8 1 CF Card Ou 50 o enee Touch A Built in CF Card for drive Szo o information selection ia Select drive OZO Aa lis in Ch GNS Touching button starts the install Q Coi Flash Memory bn ZES D Internal SRAM TE VA u QON 9 Fie oe NG O lt OS information screen Storage file folder display screen eS eae es AND BATTERY we PH4dkB ed9837 KB i Install Upload Property Pata check install Upload _ Property Data chech H O O metit ie Gempleted amp When the installation is completed the Restart now dialog shown left is displayed TO GOT restarts if touch button oe Ba OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 2 OS Information 13 10 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in CF card D Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card L Section 8 1 CF Card OS information screen Touch A Built in CF Card of Select Program Data 0S inf drive select drive A Bui tain Ch csed D Touching starts the uploading C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen Program Data 05 Install Upigad Property bata checl 2A95S2KE Mame E When the upload is completed the dialog shown left is disp
376. ow If select the button the screen returns to the initial menu OK Cancel Touch S felf2 fol and then Enter The password is fixed to 5920 Touching executes read write check for the flash memory 13 3 Memory Check 13 3 3 Memory check operation Point P Remark Refers to the information required Refers to the supplementary explanations for reference Indicates the items in which the detailed explanation is described manual chapter section item of the manual 0 6 0 seen Indicates the operation steps Menu and items are differentiated with parentheses refers to the menu of GOT utility refers to the button in the dialog box of GOT utility 1 OVERVIEW About GOT A GOT is installed on the panel surface of a control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC within the control panel The GOT PLC carries out switch operation lamp display data display message display etc For the display screen two kinds of screens are available user screen and utility screen 1 Connector for program User screen GOT The user screen is a screen drawn by drawing software The objects Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numeric display can be arditrarily arranged on the display A horizontal format or vertical format may be selected for displaying a user s project Moreover multiple scr
377. ownloaded to the GOT to the CF card using drawing software or another GOT 2 Install the CF card mentioned by 7 to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card L Section 8 1 CF Card O Touch A Built in CF card in Select drive i touching button the screen mentioned left is displayed If touching button the download is executed Sane named project data has already downloaded Current Target Built Version 1207H f207H Built Date 02 01 05 702 01 05 Built Time 16 1746 716 17 46 Author id Downloading continue 7 Download is conpleted Restart now O Touch button If there is no project data of the same name in the C drive starts the download If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting the download If touching button an overwrite download is executed to a project data of the same name If touching button cancels the downloading When the downloading is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed GOT is restarted if button is touched 13 3 Project Information 13 22 13 3 4 Operation of project information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOO
378. page Version of GT11 GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS 5 GOT 1000 Bus Bus sera Designer2 Supporting connection to FUJI SYS 239 Communication driver FUJI SYS temperature controller l FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 00 temperature The functions to automatically stop controller monitoring faulty stations and to OAL Communication driver connection disconnect communications with l FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 03 O controllers are added Supporting connection to YAMATAKE 2 18 Communication driver YAMATAKE temperature controller YAMATAKE SDC DMC 02 02 O temperature The functions to automatically stop controller monitoring faulty stations and to TN Communication driver connection disconnect communications with l YAMATAKE SDC DMC 03 03 O controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA i i iail 2 43V YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 O emperature controller YOKOGAWA p UT2000 03 01 temperature The functions to automatically stop oo controller Da Communication driver monitoring faulty stations and to connection a 2 58L YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 O disconnect communications with UT2000 03 03 controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to RKC te 2 18U RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O temperature controller 02 02 Supporting connection to SRZ RKC temperature The functions to automatically stop Communication driver controller monitoring faulty stations and to 2 58L RKC SR
379. pending on the FX PLC being used For further information see the following manual The hardware manual of the FX PLC being used 14 4 2 Access range EPROM FX PLC memory status cassette For Stop only only The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range 14 90 een GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 2 Access range RUN STOP Reference Subsection 14 4 7 Subsection 14 4 8 Subsection 14 4 9 Subsection 14 4 10 Subsection 14 4 9 Subsection 14 4 11 Subsection 14 4 12 Subsection 14 4 13 Subsection 14 4 14 Subsection 14 4 15 14 4 3 Precautions Z O 1 Using other peripheral equipment for sequence program parameter change z When using the MELSEC FX list editor do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU from other peripheral equipment 5 lf you make a change temporarily exit the MELSEC FX list editor after the change is made then start the MELSEC FX list editor again If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment including GOT the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may not be the same resulting in an unintended operation of the PLC CPU Sw lt O siz aa 2 Sequence program change Of
380. peration 14 76 Details Input of keyword at start up Mode selection Switching of valid key Switching of valid key Action for incorrect input Operation of command help function Display of Comment Command code only Command code and 1 device Other than above command key input Other than above device key input Input when the keyword is registered in the ACPU Select the mode Switch the valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key by a user Perform the operation for incorrect key input Perform operation with the Help function command specification Display the comment stored in the ACPU Input the command code only Input the command code and 1 device Input the command other than above with the command key Input the command other than above without the command key 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 20 List of operation procedures Procedures key input sequence Keyword gt GO Mode key READ INSERT PARAM SHIFT gt Mode key WRITE DELETE OTHERS SHIFT or CLEAR Mode key or SHIFT gt Mode key Perform program display HELP gt 1 gt gt Input the capital letter operation in the Write Insert mode of the command C 1 E Input the capital gt Input the corresponding 60 1 letter of the command command number
381. pporting connection to SHARP PLC 2 09K SHARP JW 01 02 Supporting settings for the number of 2738 Communication driver retries and the timeout time l SHARP JW 03 09 ps O O Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2 09K TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O 01 02 Communication driver Supporting settings for the number of 2 73B TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O retries the timeout time and delay time 03 09 Supporting connection to model2000 S2T Communication driver 2 77F TOSHIBA PROSEC T V 03 12 Communication driver 2 77F TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini 03 12 Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Continued to next page App 28 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Version of Item Description GT Designer2 JTEKT PLC Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2 32J connection Supporting connection to HITACHI IES PLC 2 09K HITACHI IES PLC connection Supporting settings for the number of 2738 retries the timeout time and delay time HITACHI PLC Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 43V connection FUJI FA PLC Supporting connection to FUJI FA PLC 2 43V connection Supporting connection to PANASONIC PLC 2 09K Supporting connection to FP 2 18U N P N N Supporting connection to FP X PANASONIC The device range applicable to monitoring is extended 2 58L Up to 991F for R and up to 911 for WR can be
382. r Sold separately Product name Model name Contents RFID controller Commercially available RFID controller 9 For connectable RFID controllers and system equipment refer to the following Technical bulletin gt List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series T10 0039 The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb home page http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp melfansweb english index_e htm Serial multi drop connection unit Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Serial multi dro j GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection connection unit Connector conversion adapter Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Connector GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection conversion adapter 2 2 Component List 2 12 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 LU ep gt 09 AO OVERVIEW Z e H lt a gt S LL Z O SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specifications Item Specifications Displa Operating ees 0 to 50 C section ambient temperature O1er8N 4 5520 when horizontally installed 0 to 50 C when vertically installed p display section o 55 C when horizontally installed O to 50 C when vertically installed Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60
383. r details and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation D Check the error message D If the error code is not displayed check the error code of special register D9008 with the system monitor function Refer to Section 14 2 Remove the cause of the error Display 1 Example of display for an error in the CPU other than AnA and AnU Mode is displayed other mode Error step number is displayed step number of D9010 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 2 Example of display for an error in the AnA or ANUCPU Mode is displayed other mode Error step number is displayed step number of D9010 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Error detail code is displayed error code of D9091 Error history if available is displayed 3 Example of next display for the display of above error history is available Mode is displayed other mode Error history number is displayed history control No of ACPU Error step number is displayed Error message is displayed Error code is displayed Error detail code is displayed Second minute hour date month and year of the error are displayed Displayed if other error history is available Point f When an error message of the PLC CPU appears refer to the ACPU programming _ manual Comm
384. r pE TE AOO Settings Target PLC When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered When only keyword is registered 2 z lt Z gt FX PLC compatible with 2nd Ein Registration options can be selected DES keyword Oe Registration options 2 cannot be selected sad FX PLC not compatible with 2nd OOK SIZE keyword 22g 1 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd keyword 2 Registration options Q Z Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC to be used lt D O gt wA 0 LO x O m T O LL e T N H O 2 O H OF Oo Z gt zg aZ Oa INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 13 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Point 1 Selection of keyword protection level _ For the devices which can perform the online operation of FX PLC 3 levels of protection can be set When the monitoring or setting change by online devices is needed set the keyword taking the following into consideration a When only keyword is registered Protection level is selected by the head character of keyword All operation prohibition Set the keyword starting with one of A D to F or O to 9 Read incorrect write protection Set the keyword starting with B Erroneous write prohibition Set the keyword
385. r was ON with the non target key code Invalid key code set in the key code storage device Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range Recipe device points too large There is no empty area space in D drive If the alarm log file located in the D drive needs to be backed up copy it to the CF card with the utility and then format the D drive If the recipe function is used to read devices format the D drive and then read again to create the recipe data Capacity shortage of user memory RAM 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection and the cause is not clear in 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm execute the following troubleshooting Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection J MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 18 3 1 Locating error positions LU lt x Ze yyy H SH gt xo wa wz Ww lt lt X lt j lt Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part Please refer to User s Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register 1 How to locate error positions a Use of peripheral devices Using the peripheral
386. ram read and automatic scroll functions described above Displays a comment for the specified device Inserts a new program into the displayed program Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Moves the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Copies the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Displays a comment for the specified device Deletes a program at the specified step Deletes the specified block in the program Deletes all NOP instructions found in program codes described before the END instruction NOPLF instructions will not be deleted Displays a comment for the specified device Clears all parameters in the ACPU only Sets or changes various parameters like those for the memory capacity timer counter and latching range Sets or changes a keyword Changes values set to timer counter devices Displays details of an error in the ACPU and the associated step number Checks duplex coils instruction codes and other elements in the program With regard to a special function unit of the specified I O number monitors the contents of the buffer memory at the specified address Monitors the ACPU clock D9025 through D9027 Clears all contents of the ACPU memory and resets it to the initial state Clears the program Main Sub currently selected
387. rd is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents of the dialog When execute the CF card format touch button When cancel the CF card format touch button if touch button by the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm O Reconfirm whether to format the CF card If touch button starts formatting If touch button cancels formatting When the formatting is completed the Format is complete Zz completion dialog mentioned left is 2 displayed Z gt If touch button closes the dialog H CZ O lt Sy 220 siz sar Remark _ Restrictions on formatting 020 j e When use an unformatted CF card in GOT format the CF card by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted CF card e The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 z of the CF card and inherits the file system before formatting lt 5 ape 13 6 Memory Information nOA 13 6 1 Memory information function 9 The following shows the amount of the memory empty area size and boot Drive information empty area size lt 2 which can be used by the user of each drive A Standard CF card C Built in Flash Memory O lt Omtn 13 6 2 Memory information display operation 3 Main menu Program data control Section 9 3 Utility Display Program Data control rogral a con Project information eS eae es AND BATTERY Memory card Format f aj Me information SZ Program data control Sy oy
388. re mounted to the base unit Generic term for protocols designed to use MODBUS protocol messagages on a serial communication Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Functions This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version 2 96A GT Designer3 Version1 01B For the added functions by the product version upgrade refer to the list of functions added by GT Designer2 version upgrade in Appendices Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual 13 3 3 Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory Point When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following e CF card inserting removing method Section 7 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the CF card or Flash memory For details of Flash memory contact your neares sales office or FA Center The following example explains about Memory Check using Flash memory For the CF card memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory D Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen and touch the button INgelect the button the numeric keyboard win ow is displayed Internal Flush memory area write read check Execute n
389. re corrosive 0 to 90 lemper gas Atmosphere No corrosive gas 24VDC Measure 2 Power supply voltage check voltage across 20 4 to 26 4VDC Change supply power terminals Looseness Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws 3 Mounting Cera N status Dirt foreign Wieualcheek o dirt foreign matter Remove clean matter sticking oe Retighten screws with terminal Not loose Retighten terminal screws screwdriver screws 4 Connection Proximate status solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals connectors screws Snes System Replace with new battery alarm error code 500 report on the when the current battery 5 Battery Preventive maintenance has reached the specified Alarm Information life span even if battery voltage is not displayed screen Section 13 4 Alarm Information 17 1 Daily Inspection 17 2 17 3 Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the following L gt Chapter 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN Clean GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT 1000 pm m Point f Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents si
390. redeeceeveede chlo ned seateces xe oees ede eee 13 31 13 0 Memory Information seene a Neen ue vocutiec Ss uenacetoes Ueateuals 13 32 13 6 1 Memory information fUNCtION cccccccceecceeeceeeseeeeceeecaeecesecaueesaeeceuecaueceaeesueesaeecsueeseeeseeessogens 13 32 13 6 2 Memory information display operation cccccccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeees 13 32 13 6 3 Display example Of memory information cece ec eeeeceeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeesseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeseeeseeees 13 33 137 GO TLedata DaCKage GCOUISINION waieriesancosncentunnneocetaceaiantanarmoccnneatusduimanduareneceqnneits 13 34 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package ACQUISITION ccccceccceececeeeseceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaey 13 34 13 7 2 Operating the GOT data package acquisition FUNCTION cece cceccceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeees 13 34 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package ACQUISITION ccccccccecceseceeeeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeaeeess 13 35 13 7 4 GOT data package ACQUISITION OPELatiON cccccecccceeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeueeeeeeseeeseeees 13 36 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK T EE E E T 14 1 to 14 138 PELD DUO aaa a e ono sasea es aeanse aacere raves can an marG ace naeeeancsaatenewart 14 1 IA tt Debug TUM CUONS che at cicscat ts a teat dante leteteus ambit daamted enue adeee malaria a 14 1 14 1 2 Display operation of debug 4 255 a
391. rence and noise interference which may result in tT GOT malfunctions These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures Wiring path of the GOT s ground cable and power line 6 H Bundling the GOT s ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise which may result in malfunctions 5 Keeping the GOT s ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference 7 FG Power supply for power equipment Power supply for power equipment Good Wiring the ground cable away from the Bad Bundling the ground cable and Z power cable the power cable z O 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 3 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a sequencer to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the ground cable may have to be directly connected to the terminal on the GOT Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment If electric potential difference between the ground points created by it causes malfunctions lowering the voltage as shown in Remedy 1 below may solve the problem 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy e Remedy 1 Refer to the figures Remedy 1 1
392. rigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O value number Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O value number Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O trigger is met is added Function to display the data collected by aa 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 01 x lt the logging function in trend graph format Enables displaying logging data at the a 2 96A Standard monitor OS 04 04 x lt specified time on a trend graph Second specification and external control 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O are possible Standard monitor OS 02 02 X Logging 02 02 A _o x The binary CSV Unicode format files output can be stored to another folder by Up to 101 points can be set for scale i 04 i 01 O Function to collect and accumulate device 2 18U Option OS values 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 external control Function to read the device value and Extended function OS Device data
393. ription of operation gt NOW READING PLC PLESE WAIT A MOMENT MOTION CONTOROLLER NOT SUPPORTED Start the list editor function shows communication status with the PLC CPU Input of the keyword is requested KEYWORD When the keyword 040411 is input Input the keyword registered in Input the keyword to 6 letters KEYWORD 0 o the connected maximum with the device ACPU and press the key No constant setting key yo to 9 A to F When the input keyword is correct The GOT checks the input keyword and displays the result KEYWORD OK The check result display time is about 2 seconds To Mode Selection Subsection 14 3 9 Selection and operation of modes MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY When the input keyword KEYWORD NG is not correct 1 When the input keyword does not match with the registered keyword only the following operations in subsection 14 3 27 can be allowed Other modes Error step reading Buffer memory overall monitor Time monitor PLC No setting Main sub switching 14 56 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input i Z Point P When you forgot the keyword entered in the ACPU 2 e Even if you are unsure of the keyword entered in the ACPU you cannot delete it independently If deleting user data including sequence programs gt does not cause any inconvenience to you clear delete the e
394. rity een aed password input for each object x Utility call key Utility call key setting O x x Key sensitivity Key sensitivity setting po Key reaction speed Displaying key response speed Po oo Touch panel acjusimeni Ch Correcting touch position reading error x ee Q QnA ladder monitor Setting of data holding destination for setting MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function 2 Transparent mode Setting of communication target channel setting No when using FA transparent function i gt Video Unit Setting of the video input signal and x O Settings resolution Setting of the captive area size for each video channel the color tone contrast gt brightness and color intensity Setting of the RGB clock phase hori zontal screen position and vertical screen position Selecting base clock ol oo f Displaying the present time of the clock oll lo Time display and setting ii Setting the present time of the clock Po oo Displaying battery status Po o GOT Setup Video Display Settings RGB Display D D op m X lt O D gt O Settings XIXIXIJO App 11 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function O Applicable X Not Applicatble Not required Q ce GT Soft Drawing Installing OS s2 ee x Te Uploading ae Se EJ x ZA OS information Displaying the properties of OS Type version date A A System file OS data check Po x lio lt atakia jalia
395. rm display screen gt 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM G T error Reset 307 Monitor device not set 15 42 49 CPU error Ne Error self check System alarm disp Touch the button to reset system GOT error alarms 307 Monitor device not set 15 42 49 CPU error Ne Error Point 1 Before resetting System Alarm display Eliminate each cause before resetting system alarms Without eliminating causes System Alarm display cannot be reset even when touching the Reset button 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Write device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 14 136 14 11 System Alarm Display 14 11 3 Operating the system alarm display 14 12 GOT Start Time Z O O 14 12 1 GOT start time function 5 GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time 5 e Start time of GOT e Current time of GOT e Operating hours of GOT z 7 Ou 14 12 2 Display operation of GOT start time Zo a 82H Main menu Debug amp self check lt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Communication setting a Debug Q r GOT setup Self check bun Time setting amp display System alarm display zez Program data control F GOT start ti wie AOD y Touch GOT start time Touch Debug amp self check Qs aan ae GOT start time Opa feelf checki
396. rrent 15A or less 26 4V 2ms Permissible instantaneous a A l i Within 5ms O power failure time z O o l Noise voltage 1000Vp p Noise width 1 4s by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise 5 Noise immunity nt frequency o Dielectric withstand voltage SOOVAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth 10M or larger by insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and Insulation resistance earth Lu Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm2 zZ Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A z Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8 Nem screw Lu gt O Lu o QO O Lu Zz O q lt op Z Z x zZ Z O O O 3 4 Power Supply Specifications 3 8 3 9 e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Specifications Item GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Input power supply voltage DC24V 10 15 ripple voltage 200mvV or less Fuse built in 1 0A irreplaceable 11 16W 465mA 24VDC or 9 72W 405mA 24VDC or 7 92W 330mA 24VDC or Power consumption less less less 5 04W 210mA 24VDC or less Inrush current 26A or less 26 4V 4ms Permissible instantaneous within 0nis power failure time oo l Noise voltage 500Vp p Noise width 1 s by noise simulator of 25 to 60 Hz noise Noise immunity f requency Dielectric
397. rting the TrueType numerical font Gothic the TrueType numerical font Gothic Standard monitor OS 01 11 Jo fo O TrueType font E the TrueType numerical font 2 91V BootOS 01 11 G 7 segment Standard monitor OS 01 11 O Corresponding to the overlap window display Window screen 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O and the superimpose display GOT internal P Devices from GSO to GS1023 are available 2 96A Standard monitor OS 01 12 O evice GOT Setup The key reaction speed can be set The key reaction speed can be set reaction speed can be set 2 o 282 Standard monitor Standard monitor OS 07 09 Standard monitor OS 07 09 09 O n d to next pole Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 54 Item Description GT Version of GT GT GT A Version of OS 1050 Designer2 1030 1020 10401 The clock data storage to the GD device is Clock function i 2 3B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O possible Numerical Format String setting is possible 2 11F Standard monitor OS 01 08 qo O Display Numerical input Enables setting the asterisk display 2 96A Standard monitor OS 01 12 olo O The ASCII input can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 qo O ASCII input Enables setting the asterisk display 2 96A Standard monitor OS 01 12 Jojo O Comment The simple comment is added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O Disp
398. s Manual A9GT S50STAND gt AYGT SOSTAND User s Manual 8 12 8 7 Stand 8 7 1 Applicable stand Contents Adjust to 45 55 65 or 75 Angle adjusting fitting GOT mounting face L 8 8 Protective cover for oil Use of the protective cover for oil improves waterproof property oil resistance and chemical resistance of the GOT S 8 8 1 Applicable protective cover for oil The following protective covers for oil are applicable to the GT100 z Product name Contents z mD Protective cover for oil For 5 7 GOT a N zZ ors 8 8 2 Installation procedure O lt Point Before attaching protective covver for oil 2 For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control i panel follow the procedures as below 2 e Remove the GOT from the control panel Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance e Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel z D When the USB environmental protection cover is installed on the GOT remove the cover Lu 2 After removing the cover put the USB connector protective sticker on the USB connector M O Cone Lu E Check that the rubber packing is installed on the GOT rear face and z Fit the cover to each O then fit the protective cover for oil to each corner of the GOT front face GOT corner
399. s cannot be installed at the same time 3 Itis necessary to set the security level by drawing software 4 Mount a battery as necessary 5 It is necessary to mount a RS 232 connector for test lt gt Section 14 10 I O Check 6 GT11 will display only the GOT error and CPU error 7 It is necessary to mount the option function board and battery Integrated value reset Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Drawing Setting x X X X K Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions Q A lt O When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations AS n A Appendix 3 1 Relevant models zB The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below Lu op Battery for GOT1000 Series GT11 50BAT Lithium coin battery Non dangerous goods we ers ep Zo W lt lt Appendix 3 2 Transport guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company o m O m Z m Q Q lt Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions App 16 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series The following describes the fun
400. s normal Data normal When data is erroneous Data error Touch the button after selecting the file for data check The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left E If touch button the dialog is closed G If Data error is displayed the target file may be broken Download the target file again 13 3 Project Information 13 20 13 3 4 Operation of project information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS See Se NaN eee AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY we O LU E O LL e Lu U O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 6 Download Transfers the project data from the A drive Built in CF card to the C drive Flash Memory 13 21 Communicate with Memory Card Memory card write Boot OS write Untitled Project Base Screen Common settings Standard monitor OS C Communication driver Extended function 05 Option OS Attention Project data is only valid for the supporting OS therefore it is recommend to write the correct version of the OS GOT type GT11 Q 320x240 v Boot Drive Available size 6650339328 bute Project Data byte Memory card C v Download now 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information ED Transfer the project data to be d
401. se paper from the back of the new protective sheet and attach its adhesive side to the GOT display section When attaching the protective sheet make sure to fit it on the display section closely without leaving any clearance between them rs ts AD Remark Replacement time of protective sheet Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly 8 10 8 5 Protective Sheet 8 5 1 Applicable protective sheet 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environmental protection cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil z The GOT is installed with the USB environmental protection cover at factory shipment gt Replace when damage and deterioration are caused O 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover 6 The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT1100 E ma mD Product name Contents a Z USB environmental Environmental protection cover for USB interface on the main unit front gt l GT11 50UCOV protection cover panel conforming to IP67 8 6 2 Installing procedure Z x O 2 CD Turn the GOT power off a Disconnect the USB cable from the GOT if one is connected D Open the USB environmental protection cover equipped with the GOT and remove the mounting screws
402. se switches are available when their comments LON Al M are displayed O 32 A Scrolls information upward by a line a iE VA u QON w Scrolls information downward by a line 6 gt 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 7 displayed Z gt Cu W A Description of setting SET Cu y CC Link Ooa O tem Direct CPU Computer link OLN Bus connection j l connection connection connection G4 I lt FF When the host station a is selected As 0 When the Ee LO 2 Station No FF oe selected 1 4 1 to 64 When a gt local station a is selected E LL 3 CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not T l necessary when the system is connected to another CPU a Decimal number four digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 1234 4 Word devi H Hexadecimal number four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 gt O 5 Up to 16 devices can be entered When the CPU is an FXCPU devices cannot be entered Tae For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered oe 6 Mayicenam gt GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual ez GT Designer 3 Version L Screen Design Manual Fundamentals a OA 7 Monitor display area Up to 16 devices can be displayed at a time 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDAR
403. selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual Z O Z D LL gt E GT Designer2 Version _ Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version _ Screen Design Manual Fundamentals ny a CZ Point f When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and l the installed fonts are not matched Sw lt O The following screen will be displayed sv H Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is oam switched to the selected one Select Language Sz zm ION HAE 452 English guik QON a HEA X5 SE oe OLV Q Z lt x z 7 A gt WA TO we T ale O H O Z O whe On On mit oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 3 Utility Display 9 5 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu The following three types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the Standard monitor OS from drawing software to the GOT Flash memory Internal 1 When project data is undownloaded After the GOT is turned on a dialog box for notifying of absence of project data is displayed After the dialog box is displayed touch the button to display the main menu GOT power on Communication setting RE Time setting amp display oa Program data control A Debug amp self check Touch the button Language
404. set PLC connection Supporting settings for the timeout time 2 73B and the delay time Communication driver name has been 2 96A changed Supporting connection to MP2000 and MP3000 Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 41Z YASKAWA PLC connection 2 41Z Supporting settings for the number of 373p retries and the timeout time Supporting connection to CP 312 2 77F 2 32J Supporting connection to STARDOM YOKOGAWA PLC connection Supporting the Ethernet connection Supporting connection to the 2 3B MODBUS TCP Version of OS GT11 GT Soft 15 GOT 1000 Bus Bus sera Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 03 00 x x 2 Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H 01 02 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 01 02 Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H 03 09 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 03 09 Communication driver HITACHI S10mini S10V 03 01 Communication driver FUJI MICREX F 03 01 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 01 02 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 02 02 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 03 03 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 03 09 Communication driver PANASONIC MEWNET FP 04 04 Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 03 02 Communication driver Ethernet YASKAWA 03 02 x Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 03 09 Communicat
405. settings for the backup trigger setting and the maximum number of 2 73B x backup data Designation of the channel No used for 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 gt 4 adjusting and broadcasting is possible Function for setting any screen for the gt 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 GOT startup screen Boot OS 01 02 C O Enables displaying a BMP data stored in the A drive as the startup logo when the 2 73B Boot OS 03 09 S x o m O m Z m Q o lt OS boot drive is set to the A drive Setting of the grip switch LED of handy 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O System messages to be displayed on GOT can be customized or created by the 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O user Standard monitor OS 03 00 2 32J Option OS x Operation Log 03 00 Function to save the GOT operation performed by the user as a history The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V x external control Standard monitor OS 03 03 Option OS Enables saving the operation log for the 2 58L Operation Log 03 03 x operator authentication Extended function OS Operator authentication 03 03 2 00A Standard monitor OS 02 02 Comment group can be used 2 248U Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 02 02 02 Enables setting the background color of gt ATZ the figures in the Parts Editor screen Continued to next page
406. splay check Touch panel check vO gt Touch Touch panel check Sx Touch Debug amp Self check Starting the touch panel check Touching Touch panel check in the Self check displays the screen describing the touch panel check operation Touch the button in the description screen to start the touch panel check Point f Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 14 130 14 9 Touch Panel Check 14 9 1 Touch panel check function 14 9 3 Touch panel check operations Touching Touch panel check of Self check displays the screen explaining the touch panel check operation Touch the button to start the touch panel check Touch a part of the screen The touched part becomes a yellow filled display If not displayed in yellow even when touched the display part may be faulty In this case contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 4 For a monochrome 16 scale GOT the part is displayed t When you want to abort with a subtracted yellow color Black filled screen G If touch the upper left part returns to the Self check screen Upper left touch position EN Remark Checking the upper left part of the screen Remark Only the upper left part of the screen cannot b
407. ssage disappears The screen returns to the status before error Example Reading the step with the RST command Display the error message Delete the error message The error message disappears The next operation is resumed 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 81 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BAITERY STATUS DISPLAY J FILE DISPLAY AND x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 82 Error message Address error No corresponding program Memory cassette check Step over error Setting error Not selectable Operation error Device error Identical coil Command error Command setting error Memory protect Capacity over No END command PLC communication error PLC COMM ERROR PLEASE CLOSE PC write error PLC is running PC No error Corrective action In machine language writing the address which was Set the correct address tried to be written was at the write protect area The specified command was not found Check the program In communication with the CPU for clearing the keyword 1 Mount the memory cassette properly or writing the parameter the memory cassette is 2 Replace the memory cassette with a new insufficient or not mounted
408. ssed CF card removal prohibited CF card access switch OFF No access to CF card CF card removal possible Open or close when inserting or removing the CF card Battery cover Open or close when replacing the battery Power terminal and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and Power terminal grounding CF card interface Interface for installing the CF card to GOT CF card eject button Button for removing the CF card Bai GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history and recipe data atter The project data is stored in the built in flash memory 4 2 Back Panel 5 EMC DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION Point Authorized representative in Europe SYSTEM e This product is designed for use in industrial applications e Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 7 3 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8310 Japan e Manufactured at Mitsubishi Ele
409. st editor The sequence program of FX PLC can be list edited Emio oira ome 2 s OQ 14 1 2 Display operation of debug JZE Main menu o Debug amp self check Self check L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Debug a Main Menu Debug amp self check Debug self check Debug Z z a 0 Touch a debug O gt POUETI AE ud function to operate 9 LL was A list editor Jl EX list editor 14 HOH DICO Touch Debug amp self check Display Debug Example of system monitor x O Lu IL LL Lu o H O DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 1 Debug 14 1 14 1 1 Debug functions 14 2 System Monitor The system monitor function is capable of monitoring and changing the devices within a target controller It is intended to troubleshoot the controller system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing the system monitor an extended function OS from drawing software into the GOT you can monitor and test the devices of the controller and the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Any device on four dedicated screens can be monitored The system monitor function comprises four monitors entry monitor batch monitor TC monitor and BM monitor and you can monitor any device according to the application Entry monitor DEVICE MONITOR TESTMENUEF ORM NetNo JST FFICPUN 0 The entry monitor function monitors up to 8 controller de
410. st or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it The battery may be damaged by the drop or impact Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction DIS
411. stal Pata check Number Item Contents os LON l The drive of which file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is ee 1 Select drive o a XF not installed A Built in CF card will not be displayed Ont AON 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder in In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is O z displayed z D Name n A When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding LaL characters the 21th character or after are not displayed lt OLV Path name The path name of the currently displayed drive folder is displayed Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name Date and time The date and time when each file was installed are displayed The size of drive Displays the size in use size of the drive which is selected by drive selection l l Execution switch of each function install upload etc which can be executed on 8 Operation switch eS ae Nao es AND BATTERY the OS information screen oO lt 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files wa T ale g O Remark Displayed folders and files m g Refer to the following for the details of displayed folders and files 9 gt Section 13 1 4 Display file Z O whe On Ow Sz ni oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS
412. stated above correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one and check whether the error occurs If the error continues to occur it may have another cause Referring to 18 3 2 Further locating error positions locate the error position further 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 7 18 3 1 Locating error positions 18 3 2 Further locating error positions If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new one the error may be caused by the effect from another module Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located furthest from the operating position in the system and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur The module or extension cables bus connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below When use the extension base unit QnASCPU Example 1 Example 2 Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable OUT side from the GOT located one stage before the final stage Disconnect the bus connection cable IN side from the fina
413. t WA 0 LO x O LU T O LL l LU N H O Zz O ce On On Z Se aZ 12 oa ep OF Z TO Ooz ZEO OS Ono za Jg lt LO E D os ZOV 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 10 16 5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only if the GOT is not in its factory shipped condition even if BootOS is installed Normally installation is not required Point f Precautions when installing CoreOS The installation cannot be interrupted The followings should not be performed during the installation of CoreOS GOT may not operate e Turning OFF the GOT power e Pressing the reset button of GOT e Turning ON the CF card access switch e Removing the CF card lf GOT does not operate please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center If GOT does not recover after CoreOS is installed there may be a hardware problem Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS Before installing CoreOS 1 Installation method CoreOS can be installed only using the memory card The installation via USB RS 232 or Ethernet is not available 2 CF card to be used CF card of 32MB or more is required 3 BootOS By installing CoreOS BootOS is also installed with its latest version automatically No operation is required to the user 16 11 16 5 CoreOS 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS Installation method o
414. t stores the setting value 1 gt 3 gt No of timers of setting values 1 4 AnACPU after T256 and the top R L i device used in the low speed Top number of timer gt 2 S highspeed retentive timers T Set the number of counters aF Counter setting used and the top device 4 gt No of counters gt Top device for storage gt GO E D AnACPU only number that stores the setting of setting values O value after C255 y Setting of latch range Set the range of the device 5 Top number of latch gt GO GO 2 WDT setting for latch setting END 2 gt End number of latch gt GO 6 On WDT setting Set the value of the watchdog gt 1 gt 6 gt gt gt i it zg other than AnA AnU timer in the unit of 10 ms 6 me valle al PARIS MOIS qa D SS Setting of I O control baa gt 2 oga system only for Set the I O control system x A3HCPU and A3MCPU or Zz When parameter setting is 2 gt CLEAR gt END gt 4 wae rae of setting complete write the PLC Setting for multiple items is ze CPU APO ANAL ADIS End of writing is displayed rap 285 pla 28H 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 79 14 3 26 Operation in parameter mode P 14 3 27 Operation in other mode O Details Error check Program check Buffer memory batch monitoring Clock monitor Clearing of all PC memories Clearing of all programs Clearing of all device memories PLC No setting Main sub program swi
415. t stretch and bend the cover too much Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber e Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine e When the protective cover for oil gets dusts wipe the dusts off with a damp cloth e When the protective cover for oil is used the USB connector on the GOT front face cannot be used e When the protective cover for oil is used the human sensor does not correctly operate 8 14 8 8 Protective cover for oil 8 8 2 Installation procedure 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit Lu z GOT multi drop connection is a communication method for 1 N communication by connecting multiple GOTs gt to one PLC using the GT01 RS4 M serial multi drop connection module For details of GOT multidrop connection refer to the following 6 H gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual The 26 D O e GT Designer2 e GT Designer3 ep CZ O 7 e Communication driver e Communication driver L e Communication interface e Communication interface fi A ep Serial multi drop connection module Connect to the PLC pee Co eE o z j a ad Varies according to the connection type Lu RS 485 cable lt MAX500m gt D aa A a i Point 1 GOTs supporting the GOT multi drop connection The followings are the GOTs compatible with the GOT multi drop connection z
416. t the availability 1536 to 1 gt 2 7 gt L zy Setting of step relay W 2047 of the step relay gt 9zW When the parameter setting 2 CLEAR gt END gt A I Completion of setting is complete write the PLC Setting for multiple items is CPU also available gt GO End of writing is displayed Q Parameter setting Set the parameters other ZO O other than AOJ2HCPU than AOJ2HCPU PARAM 2 gt 1 zS Pija 1 gt 1 gt Capacity gt GO gt END gt 2 For main AOO Set the main sequence input unit 1K step Setting of memo i k program capacity and the file 1 L gt Capacity gt GO gt END 2 oran capacity ral lercaparii input unit 1K step g y 1 1 gt gt points GO gt END 2 For file register O gt input unit 1K point Lya mee Ni L Ssetiing Corner Set the top device number De L o gt than AnA AnUCPU used in the latch relay step 1 gt Top number of L gt Top number of S gt Go gt 2 ate relay Oa Lanting Saree een meet 1 2I Tap numar o t gt GO Top runber ors Oh l y ene relay internal relay i Top number of M gt 2 a lt x Set the top device used in the gt nuns ne low speed high speed C i other than AnACPU a 3 Top number of timer GO gt 2 T retentive timers S gt Set the number of timers mio used the top device number Top device for storage ae Timer setting tha
417. t the data bit when communicating 7bit 8bit lt Default 8bit gt PC connection type Z O O Z LL gt H 5 Transmission Speed Stop Bit Set the stop bit length when communicating 1bit 2bit lt Default 1bit gt Z e Set whether to execute or not the parity check 26 Parity during communication When executing set the Odd Even None lt Default Odd gt siz gt W type of the parity check OE iy ee lt Default AT amp FEO CO amp KO amp Init AT command Set the AT command for initialize the modem DOW2S0 1 gt Touch the Init button to initialize the modem Modem operation l l Q Touch the Cut button to disconnect the line Zo 2ES OO 2 Keyword settings of MELSEC FX On the communication detail setting screen of MELSEC FX registration deletion cancellation or protection of the keyword for FX series PLC can be executed oa lt MELSEC FX WCS lt 3 Communication Detail s Bab MELSEC FA OSH Transmission Speed S400 BPS z 7 A gt LL Q 0 LO Keyword O Lu Default T T H O Z O whe On Ow Sz ni oO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 11 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Regist Keyword is registered D Touching the Regist key displays the selection screen for the registration For a FX PLC that is not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard
418. t the data using other user areas 28 IZ GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual ae GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals ma 3 Option function board Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT O For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual aa WEA lt Section 8 3 Option Function Board VIn one ste O lt Q Z lt z O gt LU mle L O 14 lt T I 7 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 53 14 3 1 Specifications 14 3 2 Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products 14 3 3 Precautions The points of precaution when using MELSEC A list editor are described 1 2 14 54 Reading the MELSEC A list editor by specifying a command The MELSEC A list editor cannot be ready by specifying a dedicated command Executing the MELSEC A list editor Execute the MELSEC A list editor when the target PLC is not running It cannot be executed when the PLC is running Changing sequence programs parameters using another peripheral equipment When using the MELSEC A list editor do not change progr
419. tching Remote run stop Read write of machine language 14 80 Operation that checks the error step number error code for the current error in the ACPU other than AnA and AnUCPU Check the program double coil command code END command Monitor the buffer memory details of the special function unit Monitor the clock data of the ACPU Clear all memories in the ACPU Clear all sequence program microcomputer program and T C setting value areas Clear all details of the bit device and the word device in the ACPU Set the PLC No of other stations for access on the MELSECNET II B or MELSECNET 10 Select the main sub program displayed on the list edit screen Operate the run stop status of the ACPU from the GOT Specify the memory address absolute address of the ACPU Read the memory details and write the machine language to the memory 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 27 Operation in other mode O Procedures key input sequence SHIFT OTHER c 2 gt 4 Except AnA AnUCPU 2 gt 1 4 AnA AnUCPU SHIFT gt OTHER gt 2 f Gol SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 2 SHIFT gt OTHER SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 R Step number J OTHER gt 3
420. tents z GT11 50FNB Option function board z7 x 8 3 2 Part names 2 Groove for reverse installation protection Connector for connecting GOT Lever for removal Le Groove for reverse installation protection 8 3 Option Function Board 8 5 8 3 1 Applicable option function board 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board Installing D Turn the GOT power off Dummy cover G Rise the lever on the dummy cover with a fingernail as shown in the figure on the right D Pinch the lever with fingers and pull up it vertically to remove the dummy cover 4 Install the option function board to the option function board connector on the back panel of the GOT Push down the option function board by approximately 0 5mm with fingers along the groove for reverse installation protection Cross sectional view with option function board installed Push down by IN approx 0 5mm 1 Option function O F at four corners board a 1 l s ON GOT main unit X AJ a NS Floated x AJ ANN Inclined Do not keep the option function board in a floated or inclined status S Groove for Do not touch the circuit board in the GOT main unit during ier aaala the option function board installation 8 6 8 3 Option Function Board 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board Removing D Turn the GOT power off Option function board m 2 Rise the lever for removing the option function board ia with a fingernail
421. tes nancies oe meid ian a uae eae nen eee 14 43 14 2 25 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen 14 43 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 44 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key WINdOW SCIeeN ccceeeeeeeeeees 14 45 142 26 OST Operam PFOCCOUIC anna Oe cas tasews E E A Joes Gus weasel Vinge rae taca seus wane 14 47 14 2 29 Test operation basic procedure ccccceccceccceeeceeeeceeecececeeeceueceueceusecueeceeceuseseessasesaeeseeesaees 14 49 14 2 30 Error messages and corrective ACTIONS cccccccceccceeeceeeecececeeeceecaucecueecauecueeseeeceeeceeessees 14 50 14 5 VIEL SEC A LIST EQUON savsansiwritenaventiascaluuat Gcacionennaahenenuninerarcee ne eeeiacieaaenas 14 51 Fras T opece 16 ka eee eet Nereis nce ee re ea ce eer ee re 14 52 TASo Z ACCESS TANGE am Rent a Ore an av oe er 14 54 Mets he Ca OM S sodara E anieceeneaaaseeteestansee A Mat ca aeancta cect ase sere taceees eecae 14 54 ge Ba A DISD 1 Rene ede on nae ene ee Cem Tee ee eee ee eee eee 14 55 14 3 5 Operation of keyword IMU cckieic Secclnewss ocebbs nce Sa Ges ck cos tiaecs ales al coca jlan deasdeiebrnaais me aeneses eva eok aeeme 14 56 HC ODerallOM MENOS scsi cckc ah coe keane hikes coonieiec a a a E 14 58 14 3 7 Display format of the display Area ccccccecccsecceeeceeecceeeceeeceeecauee
422. tes the cable side connector shape a 2 2 Component List 2 4 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Bus cable for connection to QCPU Q mode Sold separately Product name Cable length Description Q add on cable GT15 QC12B 1 2m For connecting QCPU and GOT Inter GOT connection GT15 QC30B For interconnecting GOTs GT15 QC100B 10m GT15 QC150BS 15m Lona Q connection For connecting QCPU and GOT over a i i See 20m distance of 13 2 m or farther Requires AQGT cable GT15 QC250BS QCNB Long inter GOT on TESS ye or interconnectin s over a distance o connection cable GT15 QC300BS 30m g 13 2 m or farther GT15 QC350BS 35m Bus cable for connection to QnA ACPU motion controller A series sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Description For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT E lan able GT15 A1SC50B For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and GOT i For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion connection cable GT15 A1SCO7NB g l controller CPU A series and A7GT CNB GT15 A1SC50NB m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and A7GT CNB GT15 C12NB 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU motion controller GT15 C30NB 3 l CPU A series expanded base and GOT GT15 C50NB m GT15 AC06B 0 6m GT15 AC12B 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU motion controller Large CPU GT15 AC30B m CPU A series expanded base and A7GT CNB GT15 AC50B GT15 A370C12B S1 GT15 A370C25B S1 GT15 A370012B GT15 A370C25B connection cable 3 1 2m For connecti
423. that cannot be searched E The following devices cannot be searched 1 4 e Pointers interrupt pointers x e Constant K constant H constant E i i i i upi O e Bit devices with specifying numbers only L e Special function unit block buffer memory D e Devices specified with the operand of an applied instruction T Pointers and interrupt pointers can be searched for with command searches L gt H Command search in this section DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 101 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices 14 4 9 Writing commands Writes a sequence program to the FX PLC Overwrite Insert Writing basic commands 1 Operations a Inputting command only Ex ANB ORB command ae For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode b Inputting command and device AND commands etc For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode Point Moving the cursor to the position to write the command When starting to write a command place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot write a command with the cursor on an operand or set value line Command line Place the cursor on this line Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line 2 Example a Writing ORB command gt Set the lt WRITE
424. the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change 14 138 14 12 GOT Start Time 14 12 3 Display of GOT start time 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION Z O CLEAN Z T a In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes E For cleaning method refer to Section 17 3 Cleaning Method 15 1 Clean Z x Ou Zo Sz 15 1 1 Display operation of clean aan Main menu 39 3 Utility Display Main Menu m J z a e8 Simultaneous ly spaa Oa ty QON FEA X5 Qha E oe OXN Q Z Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not A operates ae LU mle LO 15 1 2 Operation of clean If touch the upper left and upper right corners of the screen at the same time the screen returns to the previous screen display Upper left touch Upper right touch position position DISPLAY SECTION On GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF For details of cleaning method refer to the following Section 17 3 Cleaning Method INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 15 1 Clean 15 1 15 1 1 Display operation of clean 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTO
425. the project data contents 2 Applicated to GT1150 QLBD only Standard monitor OS Ver 03 01 00 or later BootOS Ver 03 01 M or later INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 2 Point 1 Display setting by drawing software Set title display period screen save time and screen save backlight at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designerz2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Environmental Setting When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Screen save and screen save backlight OFF function When using the screen save and screen save back light OFF function select valid invalid by the system information reading device in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 select valid invalid by the reading device of System Information in GOT Environmental Setting For system information details refer the following GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting Z O O Main menu GOT setup 5 LCF Section 9 3 Utility Display 5
426. the utility display The password setting option in drawing software is located in the common menu Z O Z D LL gt E Main Menu Please Input password z Sw 220 Q ZZ LON zz When the password is not matched the following error message is displayed D CE 3 jal MRI AARE CE mar The password is wrong lt onak Ze OLV Q When touching Ok the screen returns to the monitor screen z A A gt 1 Input operation of password 49 1 Input the password after touching o to lo to key 2 Define the password by touching key after inputting password g O 3 To correct the input character touch key to delete the correcting T character and then reinput retype the new character 09 2 Password input cancel operation 9 When button is touched the screen returns to the monitor screen Refer to the following for details on setting passwords z C gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Ae On GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals z ns OA INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 3 Utility Display 9 7 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of the screen is as follows Title display Close Return button Main Menu Screen Window move buzzer Title display security setting Utility call key Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms T
427. ther information about items 1 to 10 shown above see the page that follows 14 26 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 10 Entry monitor 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the Entry Monitor screen Zz O Key switch Function 5 Z Activates the Quick test operation 2 TEST i gt L 3 Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices F Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the 5 MENU system monitor function Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the Z FORM Entry Monitor screen or comment no comment display Sa Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Z 20 LZ Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter monitor devices or delete or test entry devices Sir OE Entering monitor devices gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and OZD SET devices Deleting entry devices gt Subsection 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices Test operation Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is Sen not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their AAS Al iv
428. time is displayed in clock display The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of 3 Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the keyboard The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of 3 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Clock setting operations ie donc aus Ore Buteon Touching the button reflects the if you close the screen the changed settings and restarts updating the clock value will be canceled display OKT Then the settings are reflected to both clock data on the GOT and controller if touch X button the GOT restarts if the OK Cance clock settings is changed or the screen closes if clock settings is not changed If touch X button without touching button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed button The time display and setting screen is displayed GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Status Normal Normal Low None Low voltage When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure L gt Section 8 4 Battery 12
429. ting value Repeats with each touch ON OFF Sz nS Oj Mow e Key It is a key for inputting the numerical value It displays the keyboard on the bottom of 90 the screen when touched In the above mentioned screen example there is no setting item which displays the keyboard For the A gt Z gt operation of keyboard refer to the next page aa BEG ep ome oe OLV Touching confirms the numerical input When the setting range exists it repeats the numerical without displaying keyboard z N N Example 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps z ee a a a A gt e Setting Key It shifts to the setting screen of each setting item when touched wo Lo GOT setup Display x GOT setup Brightness contrast Language W Brightness setting Opening screen time o Sec Screen save time o Min O None Contrast setting D Screen save backlight gt E a E Battery alarm display Br ightness contrast a o Q Setting contents are reflected if button is touched i Z i button is pressed without touching button the dialogue below is displayed and the changes LL are canceled then the dialog box is closed On om Z gt With do not push OK button zg if you close the screen the changed aZ value will be canceled 0 OK OO ox Cance button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The operation setting screen is displayed INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MO
430. tion Brightness or contrast can be adjusted Function Contents Brightness setting Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels Contrast of display part can be adjusted by 16 levels Contrast settin J GT1155 QTBQ GT1155 QTBDQ and GT1155 QTBDA excluded 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast Main menu GOT setup Display Touch Display Battery alarm display Brightgess contrast Touch Brightness contrast Brightness contrast Touch to adjust the brightness Touch to adjust the contrast 11 8 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation Z O 6 Z T i al i aie eontra Gp Brightness can be adjusted by touching gt key of brightness adjustment E Contrast can be adjusted by touching key of contrast adjustment z O Setting contents are defined if button a is touched Siz OZD 11 i button is touched without touching With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed button the dialogue box shown on the value will be canceled left displayed OK o ZZ TOn gt Zaz Zee Oat OON button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed button The brightness contrast O adjustment screen is aan W A displayed DZ ep Bar If close the
431. tion Via 2 09K Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 26 Version of GT11 th GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS 15 GOT1000 Bus Bus sera Designer2 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver 2 63R 1 k k e Supporting connection to CNC C70 connection to Supporting connection to CNC C70 C70 CC Link G4 03 07 Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit Supporting connection to AJ65BT R2N Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 connection to Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 700 2738 Communication driver 1 k k O E EA settings for the number of CC Link G4 03 09 retries the timeout time and E EA time CC Link E ini Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU ITTF Communication driver a ion Via and Q26UDHCPU CC Link G4 03 12 x x O Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU 9 BOL Communication driver Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU CC Link G4 03 13 x QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU ION Communication driver Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and l CC Link G4 04 03 x Q20UDEHCPU X Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A xX x CC Link G4 04 04 Supporting connection to the Ethernet Communication driver 2 09K
432. tion Manual Mitsubishi Products D u L O 14 lt T I O 7 H DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 11 14 2 1 Specifications Precautions 1 Monitoring and testing real number data Real number data cannot be monitored and tested All word devices containing real number data are monitored in integer data binary data 2 Monitoring devices in 32 bit two word module When monitoring word devices T C D W etc in 32 bit two word module those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored Devices with 16 bits one word of data remaining are not monitored If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number the last device number of the specified controller will not be displayed Example When the data entry of the A2NCPU is monitored in units of 32 bits from odd numbers D1 D3 D1017 D1018 D1019 D1020 D1021 D1022 D1023 Device name gt a i rjq A gt a A gt Unit of moniter display 2 Nothing displayed 3 Changing the T C set values of large size and small size QnACPUs and displaying device comments The T C set values of QnACPUs whose date on the CPU rating plate is after 9707B can be changed and device comments can be displayed lt Information on the rating plate gt MELSEG PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER DATE 9707 B Function version Date of manufacture 4 Programs capabl
433. tion OS xX Printer 02 04 Thumbnail Output can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o x Extended function OS Operation panel ae Enables setting the operation panel 2 58L External I O Operation Panel x xX unction 03 03 Sound output Extended function OS i Enables setting the sound output 2 58L x lt function Sound Output 03 03 Function for loading the data read with bar 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 00 O cord reader to PLC CPU Number of settable devices is extended Barcode 2 2 1D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O from 32 to 1024 points Space 0x20 or NULL 0x00 can be 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O selected for blank device Function to write in the devices which data 7E Extended function OS are read by the RFID reader writer RFID 03 09 O RFID function Supporting the dedicated protocol ICU 60S and ICU 215 Mifare manufactured 2 91V by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp Standard monitor OS 03 00 Function to display an image taken by a Video display 2 32J Extended function OS video camera on the GOT Video RGB 03 00 l Standard monitor OS 03 00 Function to display the personal computer RGB display 2 32J Extended function OS screen on the GOT Video RGB 03 00 Function to operate the mouse pointer on Remote personal Standard monitor OS 03 13 the personal computer by touching the computer 2 82L Extended function OS personal computer screen displayed on operation
434. tion displayed on the TC Monitor screen is described below 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No 9 Displays a file name TC MON TOF N FILE MAME MA GQ PY 0 5y Operation start ij F 30 S Line A No comments displayed 5 Displays a set value Comments displayed 4 Displays a comment 6 Displays a present value 7 Displays a device number 10 Displays contact point and coil on off 8 Displays a device name 11 Monitor display area For further information about items 1 to 11 shown above see the page that follows 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the TC Monitor screen Key switch Function Activates the Quick test operation 3 Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the MENU system monitor function Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the FORM TC Monitor screen or comment no comment display Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices Entering monitor devices gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying mo
435. tion operation Z O O 5 GOT data package acquisition operation on the display gt Copy the following OS that is installed on the GOT and data to the CF card E GOT data packase acquisition x Touch A Standard CF Card under Select GUT s Us project data are copied to drive to hiahliaht it the CF card This CF card can be use Ee TO MAUJAN O for installation when the GOT is Touch the button to begin copying lt turned on 59 Please select a destination and Suz push Copy button Sue OZD select Drive Built in CF card Q a zzz AGH l E Different dialogs appear depending on the Caution status of the copying destination Follow Copy destination At the dialog that appears E gt gt i GOT data are already exist Pio If execute copy operation all GOT F data on the CF card will be deleted ome Copy nowt 5 eS eae es AND BATTERY Upon completion of OS Data copying a dialog that indicates a completion of copying will appear Copy is completed Touch the button to close the dialog 5 i LU window S LL l LU op H O O z O whe On 2 Sa e uj amp Ho OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 36 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Notes on copying operations 1 Copying the OS Project data to the GOT When the OS or project data are copied to the memory card using the GOT data package
436. tional 2 18U x lt Standard Font China Big5 02 02 Supporting the overlap windows 3 4 and Window screen 5 2 96A x x System alarm information printer status information and GT SoftGOT1000 end GOT internal device are added 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 of o O Standard monitor OS 03 02 Option OS x x MES Interface 03 02 Continued to next page device The devices for the trigger buffer of the 2 472 MES interface are added Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 38 Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 The settable range of GS is extended to 2 96A x the range from GSO to GS2047 For the GOT multidrop connection the SO Merna device to store the GOT station number is 2 96A O device dded aed Standard monitor OS 04 04 Devices for the MODBUS RTU con 2 96A O nection are added Supporting vertical installation type GOT Type 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x O display ON and OFF can beset and OFF can be set 2 243V Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 03 01 01 ama eers pt O Screen switching E setting the screen switching function devices for the overlap windows 3 4 and 2 96A x Designation of the channel No for which 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x lt station No is switched is possible Station No Switching
437. to set the special Debug System monitor from the Main Menu function switch P O x l l lt T For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of GT Designer2 Version L Screen Design ara the GOT to be used Manual ies GT Designer3 Version LJ Screen Design NZD Manual Functions ome oe OLN Display the functional change menu screen of the system monitor function Q Z lt x x fa O gt w O LO Point 7 1 How to display the utility aia For how to display the utility refer to the following lt Section 9 3 Utility Display x O Lu IL LL LI 7 H O 2 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The system monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not 6 been downloaded to the GOT 59 ni OO INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 13 14 2 2 Display 14 2 3 Operation procedure common to the system monitor screens 14 2 4 Functional change menu screen This subsection describes the configuration of the functional change menu screen and the functions of the keys displayed on it The table below describes the functions of the keys displayed on the functional change menu screen Key Function Performs entry monitoring in the Entry Monitor window Subsection 14 2 10 Entry monitor Performs batch monitoring in the Batch Monitor window Subsection 14 2 14 Batch monitor DEV MON BAT MON
438. to the 6 GOT the last displayed information will be retained 59 If the power to the GOT is turned on again and the system monitor function is Z gt reactivated the last displayed information will be deleted OO 2 Entry unit of monitor devices Each monitor device is entered in a combination of a network number and a CPU station number If the CPU station number is changed the entered monitor device will become invalid INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 17 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure Operating the key window Using the a and gt keys move the cursor to the item you want to set The displayed keyboard depends on the position of the cursor as shown below Displayed position of cursor WetNo O 8T EFICPUN 0 TaN A 7 16b 0 32b 1 0 Keyboard displayed when the cursor is placed on the device name x apie _0 ST_ _ FFICPUNo 0 DEVICEL D IMM 16b 0 32b 1 0 TB 9 AB ASS 6 0 0 AE E Keyboard displayed when the cursor is placed on the device number o If necessary enter numbers or characters from the keyboard key Used to delete a character of the entered information key Used to delete all characters under the cursor e The a w keys without a description do not function O Entry is completed by touching the key The keyboard clos
439. tor Executing the monitor and data change for Intelligent the buffer memory of intelligent function module module on the dedicated screen x a monitor Or monitoring available to check the signal A status of I O module Monitoring the network status of Network i MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 x monitor MELSECNET II and MELSECNET B Q motion Servo monitor and parameter settings of the monitor motion controller CPU Q series ms A Servo Executing each monitor function parameter amplifier change test operation and others of the x monitor servo amplifier Executing the position display monitor CNC equivalent to the display dedicated to MELDAS the alarm diagnosis monitor the x monitor tool offset parameter the program monitor etc Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 14 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM o m O m Z m Q o lt App 15 O Applicable X Not Applicatble Not required GT Soft A drive memory check Standard CF card Po x oo C drive memory check Built in flash x Memory check memory D drive D drive memory check Built in SRAM check Built in D drive memory check Built in SRAM Missing bits color draw display and Drawing check overlap display check of liquid crystal Fontcheck check Installed Installed fonts check check 4 panel Touch panel operation check check Connected target confirmation I O check Mo
440. tor OS 03 01 Jo o Up to 101 points can be set eect scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 value number Meter Attribute and Meter Attribute and Core canbe set can be set Daaa al Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected 2 OO 2 43v Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 03 01 01 243V Standard monitor OS 08 01 e tal oI Q 11 O O Continued to next page App 43 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Item Trend graph Line graph Bar graph Statistics graph Scatter graph Historical Trend Graph Time Action Logging Function Device data transfer function Recipe function Recipe function i Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O value number Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 value number Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 value number Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O t
441. tor3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series SWLID5C GTWkK2 E SWLID5C GTWK2 EV SWLID5C GTD2 E SWOD5C GTD2 EV Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of SWLJID5C GPPW E EV SWL D5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function Abbreviation of SWLJD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series Abbreviation of SWLJD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWLIDNC MTW2 E Abbreviation of SWLIRNC GSV type general start up support software for motion controller Q series Abbreviation of MRZJWLJ SETUP type servo set up software Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SWL SETUP WE Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWLID5C FXSSC E Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E Abbreviation of robot program
442. ue of TC possible during TC monitoring A An A h anging Ba L A Subsection 14 2 8 performing a quick test Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer Subsection 14 2 7 memory values in decimal or hexadecimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 These items cannot be monitored when a motion controller Q series is monitored The present value of Z cannot be changed None of the connection types supports V When a motion controller Q series is connected device comments cannot be displayed Indicates CC Link connection via G4 When a QCPU redundant system is used data of the set value cannot be changed The QSCPU does not support the connection type 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications 2 Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor Data change by test operation Quick test Display switching When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller Monitoring CC Link DEPL Bus Direct CPU Computer link GOT multidrop Reference connection connection connection Ga connection Setting Resetting bit devices possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Displaying device comments memory values in decimal or present values by entering devices to be monitored Subsection 14 2 10 in advance Monitoring t
443. unction OS CNC Data I O 04 04 Extended function OS GOT Platform Library 03 12 Option OS SFC Monitor 03 12 GOT Function Expansion Library 03 12 Extended function OS GOT Platform Library 04 04 Option OS Ladder editor 04 04 2 77F Function to edit the sequence program 2 96A stored in the controller by using the GOT l GOT Function Expansion Library 04 04 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Communication driver Function to monitor multiple controllers oo 2 18U Use the communication driver 02 02 or later for each connection with a single unit of GOT Continued to next page App 50 aoe Version of GT GT GT Soft Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 Option OS Function for monitoring each controller Gateway function Mail from one GOT PC or sending a mail from 2 09K 01 02 x GOT Gateway function Server Client Gateway function 01 02 Option OS Supporting the FTP server function 2 18U x Gateway functionFTP 02 02 Enables transfer of binary data by the FTP T Option OS server function l Gateway FTP 03 00 x Standard monitor OS 03 00 l Function to display document on the GOT 2 32J Option OS Dogumgnt display Document Display 03 00 function Image quality adjustment for documents is 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 possible Standard monitor OS 03 01 Function to execute data linkage between 2 43V Option OS x the contr
444. unction am System alarm display is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen ag For details of system alarm refer to the following manual 28 Z L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual ae GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions sue 14 11 2 Displaying the system alarm display O z Z gt Ff W S Main menu Debug amp self check NTD PR X5 C 9 3 Utility Display Sho BSE Debug amp self check lt az Communication setting gt cor setup Self check E Time setting amp display EB systegalarn display Q a Program data contro a ole E i Touch System alarm display a Touch Debug amp self ae check wa LO 1 lt System alarm display a Debue self checkiSystem alarm disp z T GOT error Reset A When touching Reset the 207 Monitor device not set system alarm display on the ard gg GOT is reset CPU error whe On No Error Qo Za L sia INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 11 System Alarm Display 14 135 14 11 1 System alarm display function 14 11 3 Operating the system alarm display system Alarm display resetting fself checkisystem alarm disp D Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred Error causes can be identified by the error code error message and channel No displayed on the System ala
445. unctions 14 2 19 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation When no devices are entered Display example when devices are already entered Neth a E E PG PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp Ne i ft ok UO a Lib JILE iti it Se 66 6265365 6654 If necessary perform Quick test operation If necessary switch the screen display Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test L 3 Subsection 14 2 7 Switching operation of monitor devices the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Enter the initial device name and a device number you want to monitor lt gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation lt gt Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Canceling keywords lt _ gt Subsection 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords 14 38 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 19 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords When the target controller is a Q CPU and a password is entered in the sequence program the keyword must be canceled to display the set values of times and counters The procedure for canceling keywords is described below TC MONITOR TES TEMEN OR a Touch SET NetNo OJST FE CPUNo O ENGE i IN i PG Et MRD EE When a password is entered in the sequence program KEY WORD E
446. undamentals Password Setting ccceeceeeees lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Point Restrictions on screen display The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT 11 4 2 Security change display operation Main menu a GOT setup Operation settings lt gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Touch Operation Security setting Security level change GOT setup iSecurity level change Please Input password Security level change Input the password of the security level which is set in drawing software 11 14 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions 11 4 3 Security level change operation Zz O O 5 Password input operation gt GUT setup i isecurity level change By touching 0 to 9 to key the Please input password password of the changed security level is input eae P z H When correcting the input character touch Sw 4 5 6 C0 0 key to delete the correcting character Sue l i B Tol 3Tele and input the password again ajam 11 0 A Del Enter After inputting password touch the key security level change success o ZZ TOn gt Zaz apis HANI OON When the password matches a message notifying successful
447. upporting connection to Q13UDHCPU gt 77F Communication driver and Q26UDHCPU l MELSECNET H 03 12 x x MELSECNET H a lal to QO2PHCPU and connection PLC to PLC network Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU TA Communication driver x Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU l MELSECNET H 03 13 Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QS001CPU x Supporting connection to QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q10UDHCPU 2 91 Communication driver Q20UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU and l MELSECNET H 04 03 x Q20UDEHCPU Communication driver Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2 96A x x MELSECNET H 04 04 Supporting connection to MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC connection Communication driver 2 09K x o connection to Q172HCPU MELSECNET 10 01 02 o Supporting automatic system switching 2 30 Communication driver for QCPU redundant system l MELSECNET 10 03 00 x Supporting routing parameter setting with 243V Communication driver GT Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01 x Supporting connection to Universal model Ae x etl 2 63R Communication driver Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELSECNET H 03 07 pps x Supporting connection to CNC C70 connection to Supporting connection to CNC C70 C70 x Communication driver MELSECNET 10 Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B R x xX connection PLC MELSECNET H 03 09 to PLC network Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU T Communication driver and Q26UDHCPU l MELSECNET H 03 12 x x Supporting co
448. ur aigis are displayed Display example 1234 Hexadecimal number Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 T Decimal number 25 Four digits are displayed Display example 1234 Sin 6 Present value Hexadecimal number DEO Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 sas Present values cannot be monitored when the CPU is an FXCPU ae OXN T Up to eight devices can be entered For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered 8 Device name C gt GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual z GT Designer 3 Version L Screen Design Manual Fundamentals A When the CPU is a QnACPU or QCPU A program name will be displayed When z there are plural program names the initial in 9 File name file name to be executed will be displayed Ay When the CPU is an ACPU or FXCPU MAIN PROGRAM will always be mio displayed aries E ON 14 10 Contact point and coil on off 4 4 OFF When the CPU is an FXCPU contact points and coils cannot be monitored a I When no comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time O 11 Monitor display area Te j i i ies i LL When comments are displayed Up to four devices can be displayed at a time 7 o 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 m DISPLAY SECTION CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 37 14 2 18 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key f
449. used to describe how to delete sequence program commands Before deletion e Delete the ANI 5 LD TO _ MO command 6 ANI MO 7 P K80 K5 D20 paman U After deletion 5 LD TO Delete the ANI 7 P K80 K5 D20 MO command f Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt Select the Delete mode 14 D20 SHIFT DELETE 14 K2Y0018 19 gt END 20 NOP D gt Read the 6th step _ SETH e HCO ep The GO key deletes the command at the cursor position The step number is brought forward Q The ANI MO command was deleted 14 72 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 17 Deleting commands 14 3 18 Using the help function Z O _ i i O HELP is input to use the Help function Z i i i i LL Input of HELP displays the Help function menus in each mode Select the corresponding item for gt execution 1 Reading the command in the sequence program Example of reading the area using the MOV command in the sequence program 6 Operation example Sa SO Sge ifs el 2 lt Key operation gt lt Display gt Input the HELP key in the Read mode HELP MENU 1 READ A pS ea lalate 2 COMMENT DISPLAY ZZ o 2ES RE D 1 Select Read DA i QON CLEAR END HELP MENU ep gt 2 Select INSTRUCTION READ F S4 KEY IN INSTRUCTION Duis DEO CLEAR END HELP MENU lt 5 2 Oak D Set the MOV command READ SEAT KEY I
450. ut can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by external control 2 21D Standard monitor OS 02 04 of o 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o 2 21D Standard monitor OS 02 04 of o 2 21D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Jo o 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 OES 2 O 273B Standard monitor OS 03 09 Standard monitor OS 03 09 2 73B 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 BE 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 of o 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 of o Standard monitor OS 03 09 For the advanced alarm display the title 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 row can be set to be hidden For the advanced alarm display the alarm information in the top row is output if the external output trigger is on when the cursor is hidden 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 DE Function for using BMP JPEG data in 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 memory card as parts Settings for BMP JPEG file parts can be 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 made on each object When Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a figure Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 DERT Stroke font Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Jo o 2 472 Standard monitor OS 03 02 of o 2 2aav Standard moni
451. ve and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it The battery may be damaged by the drop or impact Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen and backlight please consult your nearest sales office or FA center For the battery life refer to the following L Section 3 4 Power Supply Specifications For the life of the LCD screen or backlig
452. ver GOT multidrop r Supporting the GOT multidrop connection 2 96A 1 Multidrop Host 04 04 en x 4 O connection Multidrop Slave 04 04 Extended function OS Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 09K _ x O Barcode reader Barcode 01 02 connection Extended function OS Supporting connection to 2D code reader 2 2 1D x lt O Barcode 02 04 Printer S i Fate aaat 9970 Extended function OS upporting connection to printer connection i j Printer 02 04 x x x GT15 Standard monitor OS 01 02 Supporting the FA transparent function via USB 2 09K GT11 O Standard monitor OS 01 02 Boot OS 01 02 C FA transparent i MT Developer via USB MR Configurator and FR Configurator are added as 2 2 7D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O compatible software GX Configuration and PX Developer are 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x lt O added as compatible software Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 32 Version of Item Description GT Version of OS Designer2 Supporting the computer link connection between the GOT and PLC on GX 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Developer Supporting the computer link connection TT between the GOT and PLC on PX FA transparent Developer 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 FX Configurator FP is added as compatible software Supporting the Ethernet connection betwe
453. vices entered by the user in a single window L Subsection 14 2 10 Entry monitor TC monitor NetNo Q ST FF CPUNe 0 EMRE APG OPW OS 2 Operation start T 1 PY 30 SV Products Line amp T 5 p Ag U Sy T Pears Lies E 3 PY Ul eM Products Line C The TC monitor function monitors the present value set value contact point and coil of up to 8 controller timers T counters C from the device number specified by the user in a single window C Subsection 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 14 2 14 2 System Monitor Batch monitor BATCH MON TOR TES MENJ ORME NetNo OJST FFICPUNo 0 S O ea MI I I I 5 17 E a The batch monitor function monitors up to 16 controller devices from the device number specified by the user in a single window L Subsection 14 2 14 Batch monitor BM monitor monitoring Buffer memory BM MONITOR Heto 0 NOL a BM BM EM BM BM O ST FFI CPUNo 0 BM BM BM The BM monitor function monitors up to 16 devices from the initial device number in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module specified by the user in a single window C Subsection 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory Point f Displaying the system monitor screen The GOT can display one of the four monitor screens as a full screen z EA TEST MENU FORM SET 5 NetNo G
454. ware or modem For USB and RS 232 interfaces the simultaneous setting is possible However when either interface is communicating the communication is not allowed for another interface e Setting is not allowed for 2 to 7 e Fixed to 9 for the USB interface e Fixed to 1 for the BUS interface Driver display BOX The name of the communication driver for which a channel number is assigned is displayed None is displayed in the driver display BOX in the following cases e The communication driver is not installed gt Section 13 2 OS Information e 0 is set in the channel number specification menu BOX When setting the channel number to 9 the communication driver Host PC is automatically assigned When setting the channel number to 9 for the RS 232 interface the communication driver Host PC or Host Modem can be selected When setting the channel number to 9 for the USB interface the communication driver Host PC is automatically assigned Point Precautions for communication between GOT and connected devices 1 Installing Communication driver and downloading Communication Settings To perform communication with the connected device the following actions are necessary 1 Installing Communication driver Up to 4 OS installation 2 Assigning channel number and communication driver to communication interface Communication Setting 3 Downloading Communication Settings project data assign
455. witching screens in the Screen Sas Screen preview 2 96A O rod Preview window XYZ W lt lt Enables setting Specify the touch area setting Enables setting Specify the touch area the touch area aF 77F x For the set overlay screen function the setting to place the called screen under the basic screen is O Auxiliary setting added A 2 96A O For the set overlay screen function the setting to Q Z disable the background color of the called O at o screen is added x Reading BMP or Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data JPEG image reduced to a resolution of 2000 x 1600 or less 2 77F data on GT Designer2 Directly editing Enables editing the comment group directly in TTF comment group settings for the lamps and touch switches l PE Added common settings object functions GT a Version of GT GT GT Item Description i Version of OS 1050 Designer2 1040 1030 1020 Supporting piping 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 00 io O Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data Fig r reduced to a resolution of 2000 X 1600 or less 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O on GT Designer2 Supported Supporting logo text Standard monitor OS 01 12 soon Supporting Japanese Supporting Japanese supporting Europe Supporting Chinese Simplified supportin Standard font Pp 3 Simp Supp 2 91V Standard monitor OS 01 11 O Europe Supporting Chinese Traditional supporting Europe Suppo
456. within the premises Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive pollution is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation 3 1 3 1 General Specifications 3 2 Performance Specifications e GT1155 QTBD GI1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD E Specifications a 2 L GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD ia STN monochrome white 5 TFT color liquid crystal STN color liquid crystal black liquid crystal Display size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format 16 dot standard font 20 characters x 15 lines Horizontal format n Spay Chalaete 12 dot standard font 26 characters X 20 lines Horizontal format 4 e Monochrome white black 16 DE Display color 256 colors Scales FAG OO 09 Z O H L S m O LI A 09 e Left Right 50 degrees Top 50 degrees Bottom 60 degrees DE Horizontal format ht l Left Right 70 degrees Top l Left Right 45 degrees Top a Display angle 70 degrees Bottom 50 eee 55 deyr la 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format Top 66 degrees Botto 70 degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format Hardware version C or later Contrast adjustment
457. x 3 1 FREIOVAME IMOGES IS a nvsscas covediatencourastedesgeuadal eae qatee dada tessa netdamenmea tune tidassauiasuaetaeecteneae App 16 Appendix 3 2 Transpor QUIGEIINGS sv c2ieccedetinn Aiea Ae eee seed ec App 16 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade OMG P1000 SENES Jopera SEE App 17 Appendix 4 1 GT16 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 o ececccceccscececesceceececercesetesssceseevecereeveten App 17 Appendix 42 THOR GD TO sseienneieenadiu i a o eae eer a App 52 INDEX aen csc erator Index 1 to Index 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows mg GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT 1000 GT1695 GT1685 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1675M S Abbreviation of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675M V Abbreviation of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1665M S Abbreviation of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M V Abbreviation of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD e 0 D D ep O oO GT1600 GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1665 GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbreviati
458. y When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder If touch button starts to copy If touch button cancels to copy O When copying completes the dialog of completion is displayed If touch button closes the dialog Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder Program Data controli Property Date 02 01 05 Author ing S W versioniGT Designer Versio E 1 Title Sereen B 15 Operation B 16 Display Screen B 32 6 Operatione 13 19 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information if touch button after selecting the project data to display the property the property is displayed as shown left In property display the following information is displayed Item Contents Date Displays the creation date of the file Author Displays the author of the project data Drawing Displays name and version of the drawing S W software by which the project data is version created if touch a button the screen scrolls up down line by line If touch A button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 4 If touch button the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen Data check operation Carrys out data check of the selected project file When data i
459. y switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT Confirm the CF card access LED is extinguished remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of Z x O BootOS Standard Monitor OS gt 1 Boot OS installation z When the Boot OS is installed the GOT compares the version of the current Boot OS and the version of the Boot OS to be installed When the major version of the Boot OS to be installed is older than that of the current Boot OS the gt following warning dialogs will appear to prevent an accidental overwriting When installing from drawing software follow the messages that appear on the PC screen O JA SEF a When only the Boot OS is stored on the CF card OZO A message will appear to indicate that the installation cannot be proceeded Boot OS has been already installed Existing 0S ver 01 02 C a Expected 0S Ver 01 01 B bn Because of version down GOT aborts AAS installing TE NA u QON A lt x Touch the button to cancel the installation ce lt Restart the GOT o4 b When the Boot OS Standard monitor OS and other OSs are stored on the CF card The installation of the Boot OS will be skipped and an installation of the Standard monitor OS z and other OSs will take place A The following message will
460. y if the displaying range is one or two lines 1 GOT error The error in the GOT is displayed as an alarm 2 CPU error The error in the PLC CPU is displayed as an alarm 3 Network error The error in the network is displayed as an alarm Alarms with smaller priority cannot be displayed if system alarms overflow the displaying range As well the error code error message or time is not displayed if the displayed message overflows each line in the displaying range 18 1 Error Contents Display 18 1 18 2 Error code and reference manual Error source Error code Contents Reference 0 to 99 User s manual of the ACPU Error code of CPU for ACPU Value of D9008 connected with GOT Error code of CPU User s manual of the FXCPU to which GOT is connected 4 CPU FX PLC e Third party PLC 100 to 299 If a third party PLC is connected e Temperature controller OMRON temperature controller only Error code of the GOT main unit 300 to 399 function Error code of the GOT GOT 400 to 499 ee Section 18 2 communication function Error code of the GOT main unit 500 to 699 l function CPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU User s manual of the QCPU and Value of SDO for QCPU QnACPU QnACPU connected with GOT Servo User s manual of the servo take actions referring to the error message j 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier amplifier amplifier connected to GOT 1 The assigned error code for FXPLC is 100 t
461. y sensitivity value will slow down the key reaction speed When the GOT screen recognizes a single touch as two touches decrease the key sensitivity to slow down the key reaction speed Point Operation settings by drawing software Set buzzer volume and window move buzzer volume by GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Environmental Setting When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version O Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 10 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions 11 3 2 Display operation of operation setting Zz O O Main menu GOT setup Z 3 Section 9 3 Utility Display T E Touch Operation z O x SY hee 2x St Operation Oz Ww GOT setup Operation 1 1 Buzzer volume Window move buzzer Toucan lien Security setting change settings Utility call key o ZZ TOn gt Zaz spas HANI OON Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standar di 0 ms O z FEB ae lt m gt 5 SE oe OXN gt i Q Point Restart after setting change o Se lt x If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the z A setting of each item excluding the security setting is changed and touch the ae button on the GO

GT11 User's Manual - Automation Systems and Controls

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents